JP7313928B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines capable of executing games.

As a game machine, game balls as game media are shot into a game area by a shooting device, and when the game balls enter a prize winning area such as a winning hole provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. Further, there is a so-called pachinko machine configured to provide a variable display area in which identification information can be variably displayed (also referred to as "variation"), and to change the game state (the state of the gaming machine, specifically, the state in which the gaming machine is being controlled) when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display area results in a specific display result (so-called pachinko machine).

In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game of predetermined game media, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information in the variable display areas, and the player operates a stop button provided corresponding to each variable display area to stop the variable display of the identification information within a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. game media are paid out and a specific winning occurs, the game state is changed to a state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player (so-called slot machine).

The game value means that the state of the payout of prize balls or the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous to the player who is likely to win the hit ball, the generation of the right to become an advantageous state for the player, or the state in which the conditions for paying out the prize balls are likely to be satisfied.

In the pachinko game machine, a ``jackpot'' is generated when a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a performance pattern (identification information) started in a variable display area based on the winning of a game ball in a starting winning hole. It should be noted that the derivation display means that the symbol (final stop symbol) is finally stopped and displayed. When a big win occurs, for example, the big win opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big win game state in which the ball is likely to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning opening is closed. The number of openings of the big winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed after the opening time has elapsed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning slot may be called a round. Moreover, the game in a round may be called a round game.

Also, in the variable display area, patterns other than the final stop pattern (for example, the middle pattern of the left, middle, right patterns) continue for a predetermined period of time to stop, oscillate, scale, or deform in a state consistent with a specific display result. ) is called reach production. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the pattern variably displayed in the variable display area is not a specific display result, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In addition, there is a pachinko game machine configured to be able to set a set value among a plurality of stages of set values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute control of an advantageous state based on the set values.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (Fig. 12)

However, in the case of a gaming machine such as the one disclosed in Document 1, when it is desired to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work cannot be preferably performed.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing setting confirmation work .

(Means A) The game machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
setting means capable of setting a set value related to the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state;
setting confirmation control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed;
interrupt processing execution means for executing interrupt processing capable of executing game-related processing;
variable means for changing between a first state advantageous to the player and a second state disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means capable of executing a predetermined game a plurality of times for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
variable timing means for timing a change period for changing the variable means to the first state;
a state notification means for notifying that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation state;
an advantageous state notification effect executing means capable of executing an advantageous state notification effect for notifying that the control is to be in the advantageous state;
an advantageous state notification timing means for timing an advantageous state notification period during which the advantageous state notification effect is executed;
a notification effect executing means capable of executing a notification effect in response to the end of the advantageous state;
a notification timing means for timing a notification period during which the notification effect is executed;
a storage means capable of storing game information;
initialization means capable of initializing the game information stored in the storage means based on the operation of the initialization operation means;
The setting confirmation control means is capable of controlling the setting confirmation state when power supply to the game machine is started and before the interrupt process is executed,
The interrupt processing is executed after the setting confirmation state ends, and after the interrupt processing is executed, the setting confirmation state is not controlled until the power supply to the game machine is stopped,
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the change period is being clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is resumed and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the clocking of the change period is interrupted until the setting confirmation state is finished, and when the setting confirmation state is finished, the clocking of the change period is resumed;
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the advantageous state notification period is being clocked, and thereafter the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the timing of the advantageous state notification period is interrupted until the setting confirmation state is terminated, and when the setting confirmation state is terminated, the timing of the advantageous state notification period is resumed.
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the notification period is clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is resumed and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the clocking of the notification period is interrupted until the setting confirmation state is finished, and when the setting confirmation state is finished, the clocking of the notification period is resumed.
The storage means
a predetermined area for storing at least the game information; and a specific area for storing set value data indicating a set value corresponding to an address higher than the predetermined area,
Having an area for storing information not used in the game between the predetermined area and the specific area,
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably perform the setting confirmation work.
(Means 1) The other gaming machine is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, and includes a game state control means (CPU 103) for controlling the game state, a setting means (for example, the part of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 084IWS042) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, set value "1" to set value "6") that differ in the degree of advantage for the player, and a setting during a predetermined period (for example, special live performance period). Suggestion effect executing means (for example, in the effect control CPU 120, an icon is displayed by executing step 084IWS828, and a card is executed by executing step 084IWS450). and a predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect during a predetermined period (for example, a portion that executes a series of special live effects including an explanation effect, a live effect, and a gacha effect by executing steps 084IWS422, S443, and S450 in the effect control CPU 120). 1 mode/second mode card image display) and a second suggestion effect (for example, display of a third mode card image that is not selected when the set value is "1" or "2") that is easier to specify than the first suggestion effect. The second suggestive effect is executed at a different rate (for example, while the card image of the third mode is not displayed during the live performance period, the card image of the third mode can be displayed during the gacha effect period), and the game state control means (CPU 103) controls an advantageous state (big win game state) advantageous to the player and a game state different from the advantageous state. It is possible to control to a special state (high probability / high base state (probability variable state), high probability / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state)) advantageous to the player, and the selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the set value (as shown in FIG. 12-6, the determination value of the fluctuation pattern determination table is common regardless of the set value). / A period from the transition to the high base state (probability variable state) until the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times), or the period until the big hit game state is reached before the special game is executed the predetermined number of times), and the second period after the first period (the period after the game state is shifted to the high probability / high base state and the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times) without entering the jackpot game state (after 51 times or 1 In the first period, the selection rate of variable display patterns with a variable display period longer than the predetermined period is higher than in the second period (as shown in FIGS. 12-6 (A1) and (C1), when the display result is "loss", in the first period [excluding the final variation], "normal reach failure" (variation display period is 5 seconds), which is a longer variable display period than "non-reach failure (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds). Alternatively, the ratio of selecting "super reach out" (variable display period is 60 seconds) is higher than in the second period), and in the second period, the selection rate of variable display patterns with variable display periods shorter than the predetermined period is higher than in the first period (as shown in FIGS. 12-6 (A1) and (C1), when the display result is "no", in the second period, the variable display period is shorter than "non-reach out (shortened fluctuation)" (variable display period is 5 seconds). It is characterized by the fact that the ratio of selecting a certain "non-reach out (high-speed fluctuation)" (the fluctuation display period is 1 second) is higher than in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation].
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, when the game state is the special state, it is possible to realize a healthy game and improve the amusement of the game.

(Means 2) In means 1, the suggestive effect execution means executes the second suggestive effect at a higher rate when the suggestive effect is executed at the second timing than when the suggestive effect is executed at the first timing (for example, the card image of the third mode is not displayed during the live performance period, while the card image of the third mode can be displayed during the gacha effect period). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Means 3) Means 1 or Means 2 may include predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in a predetermined period (for example, a portion for executing a series of special live effects including an explanation effect, a live effect, and a gacha effect by executing steps 084IWS422, S443, and S450 in the effect control CPU 120). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the attention period.

(Means 4) In any of means 1 to 3, in a specific period (for example, a live performance period) prior to the second timing, a specific performance (for example, a live performance) is provided. By executing steps 084IWS448 to S450, the CPU 120 may select a capsule mode according to the winning number of game balls into the general winning opening 10 during the live performance period, select a card mode based on the selected capsule mode, and display a card image of the selected card mode. According to such a configuration, it becomes easier to execute the suggestive effect in which the setting value is easily specified by performing the action, so that the action of the player can be promoted.

(Means 5) Any one of means 1 to 4 includes shooting means (e.g., ball hitting operation handle 30) for shooting game media based on the action of the player, and specific detection means (e.g., general winning slot switch) for detecting game media shot from the shooting means. , Steps 084IWS448 to S450 may be executed to select a capsule mode according to the number of winnings of game balls into the general winning opening 10 during the live performance period, select a card mode based on the selected capsule mode, and display a card image of the selected card mode. According to such a configuration, the type of suggestive effect to be executed varies depending on the number of game media shot, so that the interest in the game can be improved and the shooting of the game media can be promoted.

(Means 6) In means 5, special display means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 084IWS828) capable of displaying a special display (e.g., icon display) corresponding to the number of game media detected by the specific detection means is provided. is executed, the third mode may be selected as the card mode when the number of icons displayed during the live performance period is 7 or more. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the player pay attention to the number of special displays displayed.

(Means 7) In any of means 1 to 6, a gaming machine that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state) advantageous to the player, and is capable of executing a predetermined effect (e.g., special live effect) in a predetermined period (e.g., special live effect period) including a specific period (e.g., special live effect period). A part for executing a series of special live effects including a gacha effect), and the predetermined effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect based on the variable display being performed a predetermined number of times (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute S442 when the result of step 084IWS420 is Y). According to such a configuration, the specific effect is performed periodically every time the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times, so that the game can be promoted.

(Means 8) In any one of means 1 to 7, a gaming machine that performs variable display and is capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, comprising a holding storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of storing information relating to the variable display as holding storage, and a prescribed production execution means capable of executing a prescribed production for a prescribed period including a specific period, wherein the prescribed production execution means is capable of executing a prescribed production over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the production control CPU 120 can execute a prescribed production over a plurality of variable displays. A series of special live effects including a live effect and a gacha effect can be executed), and when a pending memory indicating control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is displayed, the predetermined effect is not started (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may not execute S442 if step 084IWS421 is Y). According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute the predetermined effect.

(Means 9) In any one of means 1 to 8, a gaming machine capable of performing variable display and being able to be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, comprising predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in a predetermined period including a specific period, and specific advance notice effect execution means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 capable of executing a look-ahead advance notice effect) capable of executing a specific advance notice effect with a variable display that has not yet started as a notice target over a plurality of variable displays; A specified performance can be executed over a period of time, and the specified announcement performance executing means may not execute the specific announcement performance in the variable display for executing the prescribed performance (for example, the performance control CPU 120 may not execute the pre-reading announcement performance in the variation for executing the special live performance). According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute the predetermined effect.

(Means 10) Any one of means 1 to 9 includes storage means (for example, a setting suggestion history storage area provided in the RAM 122) capable of storing suggestion-related information (e.g., setting suggestion history information) relating to the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means, and display control means capable of displaying suggestion-related displays (e.g., setting suggestion history) relating to the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means based on the storage means storing the suggestion-related information. eye-catching effects of the 1st setting suggestion mode to the 4th setting suggestion mode, which may be special live effects, icon display in the special live effects, display of capsule images, or display of card images) can be executed for a special period (for example, two seconds) (for example, the production control CPU 120 executes step 068IWS805), and the display control means can display the suggestion-related display (for example, setting suggestion history) for a period longer than the special period (for example, for example, three minutes) , the effect control CPU 120 may execute step 068IWS124). According to such a configuration, when the suggestive effect is executed, it can be confirmed for a period longer than the special period after that, so that it is possible to easily recognize that the suggestive effect has been executed.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions related to means A1 and subsequent means below. Conventionally, game machines have been proposed that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player, and that selects a variation pattern according to the set value, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-47306.

However, in a game machine which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values, when the set value is high, the period required until the next big win is generated is short, gambling is too high, and there is a problem that a sound game can not be realized. In addition, when the set value is low, there is a problem that the period required until the next big hit occurs is long, which reduces the interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values, while realizing sound game playability and improving interest.

The gaming machine of means A1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
Variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display);
A game state control means (CPU 103) that controls the game state,
The gaming state control means (CPU 103)
An advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player and a special state (high probability/high base state (probability variable state), high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)) which is a game state different from the above advantageous state and advantageous to the player can be controlled,
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the setting value (as shown in FIG. 12-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the setting value),
In the special state (high probability/high base state (variable probability state)), there is a first period (period from when the game state shifts to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state) until a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times), or until a big hit game state is entered before the special game is executed a predetermined number of times), and a second period after the first period (after the game state shifts to a high probability/high base state, without entering a jackpot game state). There is a period (51 times or later or 101 times or later)) after the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times),
In the first period, the selection rate of the variable display patterns having a variable display period longer than the predetermined period is higher than in the second period (as shown in FIGS. 12-6 (A1) and (C1), when the display result is "loss", in the first period [excluding the final variation], "normal reach failure" (variable display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach failure" (variable display period is 5 seconds), which are longer variable display periods than "non-reach failure (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds). The rate of selecting the variable display period of 60 seconds) is higher than the second period),
In the second period, the selection rate of variable display patterns with a variable display period shorter than the predetermined period is higher than in the first period (as shown in FIGS. 12-6 (A1) and (C1), when the display result is "loss", in the second period, the rate of selecting "non-reach failure (fast variation)" (variation display period is 1 second), which is a variable display period shorter than "non-reach failure (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds), is higher than the first period [final variation]. except] is higher than
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the game state is the special state, it is possible to realize a healthy game and improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
Equipped with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is a game state different from the special state (high probability/high base state (probability variable state)) and is a predetermined state advantageous to the player (low probability/high base state (time saving state)).
The effect control means can execute a common effect in the predetermined state and the first period (as shown in FIGS. 12-4 (B1) and (C1), the effect control CPU 120, after the end of the jackpot game, when the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (time saving state) and when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state). Since it is controlled by time, the common "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the common "chance time" characters are displayed at the top of the screen)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
Equipped with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
The effect control means can execute a suggestive effect suggesting a shift from the first period to the second period (as shown in FIGS. 12-13 (1) and (5) to (7), the first period [final variation] (the 50th special symbol game after the variation display result of the first special symbol is a "big hit", or the 100th special symbol game after the variation display result of the second special symbol is a "big hit"). 120, a continuous challenge effect is executed to suggest a shift from the first period to the second period (that the high base state of the game state continues))
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A3,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is controllable to a special state (small winning game state) which is a game state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player,
The special state is a gaming state in which a game value is likely to be awarded due to the special state (the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and by controlling to a low base state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device is shortened, and the special variable winning ball device is controlled so that the game ball can easily win a prize)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4,
The gaming state control means (CPU 103)
After the advantageous state (big win game state) ends, it is possible to control to a predetermined state (high probability/first KT state (variable probability state)) which is a game state different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state)) and advantageous to the player,
The special state can be controlled in response to the execution of the variable display for a predetermined number of times in the predetermined state (shift to the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state) after the end of the big win game, and if the next big hit does not occur in the 100th variable display, the continuous challenge performance is executed at the 100th variable display, and the transition is made from the 101st variable display to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4,
The gaming state control means (CPU 103)
After the advantageous state (big win game state) ends, it is possible to control to a predetermined state (high probability/first KT state (variable probability state)) which is a game state different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)) and advantageous to the player,
In the predetermined state, it is possible to control to the special state in response to being controlled a predetermined number of times to a special state which is a game state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player (after the big win game is shifted to a high probability/first KT state (probability variable state), and if the next big win does not occur in the fluctuation display until the number of occurrences of the small win reaches 50 times, the continuous challenge performance of the success mode is executed with the fluctuation display in which the number of occurrences of the small win is the 50th, and the small win is performed. From the next and subsequent variable display of the variable display where the number of occurrences of the ball has reached 50 times, it shifts to the high accuracy / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state))
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A6,
Equipped with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a special effect suggesting a set value (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect),
The execution ratio of the special effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the special effect in the second period (in the first period, it is determined whether or not the first set suggestion effect is executed for each variable display, so the execution ratio of the first set suggestion effect for each variable display is 10%. On the other hand, in the second period, it is determined whether the first set suggestion effect is to be executed only for the final variation of the second period, so the execution ratio of the first set suggestion effect is 0% for each variable display except for the final variation in the second period. , the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect of the final change in the second period is 10%)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A7,
Equipped with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of special effects (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect) as a special effect suggesting a set value,
The type of special effects that can be executed in the first period differs from the type of special effects that can be executed in the second period (if the gaming state is in the high probability/high base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), it is determined in step S21TM1010 whether or not to execute the first setting suggestive effect, and in step S21TM1050 it is determined whether or not to execute the second setting suggestive effect. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-9, , When the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), it is determined in step S21TM1080 whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A8,
Production control means for controlling production (production control CPU 120),
Corresponding display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
The effect control means can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the pending display and the active display),
The execution ratio of the change effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the change effect in the second period (the execution ratio of the change effect is higher in the first period than in the second period).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means A10 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A9,
Production control means for controlling production (production control CPU 120),
Corresponding display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
The effect control means can execute an effect effect that acts on the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect effect that acts on the pending display and the active display),
The execution ratio of the action production in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the action production in the second period (the execution ratio of the action production is higher in the first period than in the second period).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means A11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A10,
Production control means for controlling production (production control CPU 120),
Determining means (CPU 103) for determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled before the variable display (variable display) is executed,
The effect control means can execute a notice effect based on the determination by the determination means (the effect control CPU 120 can execute a pre-reading notice effect that announces the degree of expectation of a big hit in the variable display (variable display whose execution is suspended) before execution),
The execution ratio of the advance notice effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the advance notice effect in the second period (the execution ratio of the prefetching advance notice effect is higher in the first period than in the second period).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

In addition, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-47306 (FIG. 19), a gaming machine has been proposed that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player, and selects a variation pattern according to the set value. In a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-47306 (FIG. 19), there is room for improving the interest of the player when controlled in an advantageous state. The invention according to the means B1 to B11 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and aims to improve interest in a game machine which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values when it is controlled in an advantageous state for the player.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
Variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display);
game state control means (CPU 103) for controlling the game state;
With production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
An advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player and a special state (high probability/high base state (probability variable state), high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)) which is a game state different from the above advantageous state and advantageous to the player can be controlled,
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the setting value (as shown in FIG. 12-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the setting value),
In the special state (high probability/high base state (variable probability state)), there is a first period (period from when the game state shifts to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state) until a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times), or until a big hit game state is entered before the special game is executed a predetermined number of times), and a second period after the first period (after the game state shifts to a high probability/high base state, without entering a jackpot game state). There is a period (51 times or later or 101 times or later)) after the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times),
The effect control means can execute a specific effect for informing whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (the effect control CPU 120 executes a battle effect for notifying whether or not a big win is won by a battle between a friend character and an enemy character after a ready-to-win state is established in a variation pattern involving super-reach (“super-reach failure”, “super-reach big hit”)),
The execution ratio of the specific effect in the first period is higher than the execution ratio of the specific effect in the second period (when the fluctuation display result is "miss", as shown in FIG. 12-6 (A1), in the first period [excluding final fluctuation], the rate of selecting "super reach miss" as the variation pattern is [10%], whereas in the second period, as shown in FIG. is [0%])
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the game state is the special state.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is a game state different from the special state (high probability/high base state (probability variable state)) and is a predetermined state advantageous to the player (low probability/high base state (time saving state)).
The effect control means can execute a common effect in the predetermined state and the first period (as shown in FIGS. 12-4 (B1) and (C1), the effect control CPU 120, after the end of the jackpot game, when the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (time saving state) and when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state). Since it is controlled by time, the common "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the common "chance time" characters are displayed at the top of the screen)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A game machine of means B1 or means B2,
The effect control means can execute a suggestive effect suggesting a shift from the first period to the second period (as shown in FIGS. 12-13 (1) and (5) to (7), the first period [final variation] (the 50th special symbol game after the variation display result of the first special symbol is a "big hit", or the 100th special symbol game after the variation display result of the second special symbol is a "big hit"). 120, a continuous challenge effect is executed to suggest a shift from the first period to the second period (that the high base state of the game state continues))
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B3,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is controllable to a special state (small winning game state) which is a game state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player,
The special state is a gaming state in which a game value is likely to be awarded due to the special state (the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and by controlling to a low base state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device is shortened, and the special variable winning ball device is controlled so that the game ball can easily win a prize)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B4,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
After the advantageous state (big win game state) ends, it is possible to control to a predetermined state (high probability/first KT state (variable probability state)) which is a game state different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state)) and advantageous to the player,
The special state can be controlled in response to the execution of the variable display for a predetermined number of times in the predetermined state (shift to the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state) after the end of the big win game, and if the next big hit does not occur in the 100th variable display, the continuous challenge performance is executed at the 100th variable display, and the transition is made from the 101st variable display to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B4,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
After the advantageous state (big win game state) ends, it is possible to control to a predetermined state (high probability/first KT state (variable probability state)) which is a game state different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state)) and advantageous to the player,
In the predetermined state, it is possible to control to the special state in response to being controlled a predetermined number of times to a special state which is a game state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player (after the big win game is over, it shifts to a high probability/first KT state (probability variable state), and if the next big win does not occur in the variation display until the number of occurrences of the small win reaches 50 times, the continuous challenge performance of the success mode is executed with the variation display in which the number of occurrences of the small win is the 50th, and the small win is performed. From the next and subsequent variable display of the variable display where the number of occurrences of the ball has reached 50 times, it shifts to the high accuracy / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state))
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B6,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing a special effect suggesting a set value (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect),
The execution ratio of the special effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the special effect in the second period (in the first period, it is determined whether or not the first set suggestion effect is executed for each variable display, so the execution ratio of the first set suggestion effect for each variable display is 10%. On the other hand, in the second period, it is determined whether or not the first set suggestion effect is executed only for the final variation of the second period, so the execution ratio of the first set suggestion effect is 0% for each variable display except for the final variation in the second period. , the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect of the final change in the second period is 10%)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B7,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of special effects (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect) as a special effect suggesting a set value,
The type of special effects that can be executed in the first period and the type of special effects that can be executed in the second period are different (if the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), it is determined in step S21TM1010 whether or not to execute the first setting suggestive effect, and in step S21TM1050 it is determined whether or not to execute the second setting suggestive effect. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-9, , If the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), it is determined in step S21TM1080 whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B8,
Equipped with corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding display (suspended display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
The effect control means can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the pending display and the active display),
The execution ratio of the change effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the change effect in the second period (the execution ratio of the change effect is higher in the first period than in the second period).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means B10 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B9,
Equipped with corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding display (suspended display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
The effect control means can execute an effect effect that acts on the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect effect that acts on the pending display and the active display),
The execution ratio of the action production in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the action production in the second period (the execution ratio of the action production is higher in the first period than in the second period).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means B11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B10,
Determining means (CPU 103) for determining whether or not the advantageous state (big hit game state) is controlled before the variable display (variable display) is executed,
The effect control means can execute a notice effect based on the determination by the determination means (the effect control CPU 120 can execute a pre-reading notice effect that announces the degree of expectation of a big hit in the variable display (variable display whose execution is suspended) before execution),
The execution ratio of the advance notice effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the advance notice effect in the second period (the execution ratio of the prefetching advance notice effect is higher in the first period than in the second period).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-47306 (FIG. 19), a gaming machine has been proposed that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player, and executes an effect suggesting the set value. With respect to the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-47306 (FIG. 19), there is room for improving the interest of the presentation related to the setting suggestions. The inventions relating to the means C1 to C11 have been made in view of the above-described actual situation, and their object is to improve the interest of the performance related to the suggestion of the setting.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
Variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display);
game state control means (CPU 103) for controlling the game state;
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) related to setting suggestion,
The gaming state control means (CPU 103)
An advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player and a special state (high probability/high base state (probability variable state), high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)) which is a game state different from the above advantageous state and advantageous to the player can be controlled,
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the setting value (as shown in FIG. 12-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the setting value),
In the special state (high probability/high base state (variable probability state)), there is a first period (period from when the game state shifts to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state) until a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times), or until a big hit game state is entered before the special game is executed a predetermined number of times), and a second period after the first period (after the game state shifts to a high probability/high base state, without entering a jackpot game state). There is a period (51 times or later or 101 times or later)) after the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times),
The selection ratio of the specific variable display pattern differs between the first period and the second period (when the variable display result is "loss", as shown in FIGS. 12-6 (A1) and (C1), the selection percentage of the variation pattern accompanied by super reach ("super reach failure") in the first period is higher than the selection percentage of the variation pattern accompanied by super reach ("super reach failure") in the second period);
The execution ratio of the special effect differs between the first period and the second period (in the first period, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display, so the execution ratio of the first set suggestion effect for each variable display is 10%. On the other hand, in the second period, since it is determined whether or not the first set suggestion effect is to be executed only for the final variation of the second period, the execution ratio of the first set suggestion effect is 0% for each variable display except for the final variation of the second period, and the final variation of the second period. The execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is 10%)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is a game state different from the special state (high probability/high base state (probability variable state)) and is a predetermined state advantageous to the player (low probability/high base state (time saving state)).
The effect control means can execute a common effect in the predetermined state and the first period (as shown in FIGS. 12-4 (B1) and (C1), the effect control CPU 120, after the end of the jackpot game, when the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (time saving state) and when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state). Since it is controlled by time, the common "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the common "chance time" characters are displayed at the top of the screen)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The effect control means can execute a suggestive effect suggesting a transition from the first period to the second period (as shown in FIGS. 12-13 (1) and (5) to (7), the first period [final variation] (the 50th special symbol game after the variation display result of the first special symbol is a "big hit", or the 100th special symbol game after the variation display result of the second special symbol is a "big hit"). 120, a continuous challenge effect is executed to suggest a shift from the first period to the second period (that the high base state of the game state continues))
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C3,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is controllable to a special state (small winning game state) which is a game state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player,
The special state is a gaming state in which a game value is likely to be imparted due to the special state (the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and by controlling to a low base state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device is shortened, and the special variable winning ball device is controlled so that the game ball can easily win a prize)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C4,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
After the advantageous state (big win game state) ends, it is possible to control to a predetermined state (high probability/first KT state (variable probability state)) which is a game state different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)) and advantageous to the player,
The special state can be controlled in response to the execution of the variable display for a predetermined number of times in the predetermined state (after the big win game is completed, the state is shifted to the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state), and when the next big hit does not occur in the 100th variable display, the continuous challenge performance is executed at the 100th variable display, and from the 101st variable display, the state is shifted to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C4,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
After the advantageous state (big win game state) ends, it is possible to control to a predetermined state (high probability/first KT state (variable probability state)) which is a game state different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state)) and advantageous to the player,
In the predetermined state, it is possible to control to the special state in response to being controlled a predetermined number of times to a special state which is a game state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player (after the big win game is over, it shifts to a high probability/first KT state (probability variable state), and if the next big win does not occur in the variation display until the number of occurrences of the small win reaches 50 times, the continuous challenge performance of the success mode is executed with the variation display in which the number of occurrences of the small win is the 50th, and the small win is performed. From the next and subsequent variable display of the variable display where the number of occurrences of the ball has reached 50 times, it shifts to the high accuracy / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state))
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means C7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C6,
The execution ratio of the special effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the special effect in the second period (in the first period, it is determined whether or not the first set suggestion effect is executed for each variable display, so the execution ratio of the first set suggestion effect for each variable display is 10%. On the other hand, in the second period, it is determined whether or not the first set suggestion effect is executed only for the final variation of the second period, so the execution ratio of the first set suggestion effect is 0% for each variable display except for the final variation in the second period. , the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect of the final change in the second period is 10%)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means C8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C7,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of special effects (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect),
The type of special effects that can be executed in the first period differs from the type of special effects that can be executed in the second period (if the gaming state is in the high probability/high base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), it is determined in step S21TM1010 whether or not to execute the first setting suggestive effect, and in step S21TM1050 it is determined whether or not to execute the second setting suggestive effect. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-9, , When the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), it is determined in step S21TM1080 whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means C9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C8,
Equipped with corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding display (reserved display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
The effect control means can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the pending display and the active display),
The execution ratio of the change effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the change effect in the second period (the execution ratio of the change effect is higher in the first period than in the second period).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means C10 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C9,
Equipped with corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding display (reserved display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
The effect control means can execute an action effect that acts on the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect effect that acts on the pending display and the active display),
The execution ratio of the action production in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the action production in the second period (the execution ratio of the action production is higher in the first period than in the second period).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means C11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C10,
Determining means (CPU 103) for determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is controlled before the variable display (variable display) is executed,
The effect control means can execute a notice effect based on the determination by the determination means (the effect control CPU 120 can execute a pre-reading notice effect that foretells the degree of expectation of a big hit in the variable display (variable display whose execution is suspended) before execution),
The execution ratio of the advance notice effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the advance notice effect in the second period (the execution ratio of the prefetching advance notice effect is higher in the first period than in the second period).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

Some conventional gaming machines can change the probability of a variable display result being a big hit (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state) by changing a set value (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). The gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 includes, for example, a judgment random number generation means capable of generating a judgment random number value for judging whether or not to control to an advantageous state within a predetermined numerical range. It is conceivable to vary the probability of controlling to an advantageous state by varying the numerical value. However, in the case where the advantageous state determination value is set differently for each set value set in the game machine in this way, if the advantageous state determination value is set over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is necessary to determine whether or not the random value for determination matches the advantageous state determination value a plurality of times. The invention according to means 1 to 21 has been made with attention to such problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine described in means 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values including an advantageous set value and a disadvantage set value with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a set value of 1 that is the most unfavorable set value for the player and a set value of 6 that is most advantageous to the player);
Judgment random number generating means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number for judging whether or not to control to the advantageous state,
Advantageous state determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
When the number of the advantageous state determination values differs according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the number of big hit determination values differs depending on the set value, and the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs),
The advantageous state determination value has at least a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is set to include the common numerical range and a non-common numerical range that is not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, a non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values ranging from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value) in a predetermined numerical range,
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, the jackpot numerical range is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a probability variable state)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
A storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing setting value information capable of specifying the setting value set by the setting means,
The advantageous state determination means reads the setting value information stored in the storage means each time it determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the processing of 207SGS550 of the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41), and the advantageous state determination value included in the non-common numerical value range corresponding to the setting value specified from the read setting value information is generated by the random value generation means for determination together with the advantageous state determination value included in the common numerical range. Set as an advantageous state judgment value for judging whether the judgment random number matches (for example, in the processing of 207SG556 of the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41, the CPU 103 sets the display result judgment table according to the set value read out in the processing of 207SG550)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value is repeatedly set each time the advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state, so that it is possible to prevent inappropriate determination from being made by an inappropriate advantageous state determination value.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 2,
The storage means can store the set value information read from the storage means by the advantageous state determination means as used set value information (for example, in the processing of 207SGS566 of the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41, the CPU 103 updates and stores the set value made in the processing of 207SGS550 as the used set value for determination),
It is characterized by further comprising collation means (for example, a portion for comparing the set value specified in the processing of 207SGS550 by the CPU 103 in the processing of 207SGS552 shown in FIG. 9-41 and the set value of the used judgment) capable of collating whether or not the set value information stored in the storage means is the same as the determined used set value information stored in the immediately preceding determination by the advantageous state determination means at predetermined intervals.
According to this feature, it is possible to identify that an inappropriate advantageous condition determination value is set by inappropriate set value information.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to means 3,
The collation unit performs collation every time the advantageous state determination unit determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state as the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-41, the part where the processing of 207SGS552 is executed each time the CPU 103 executes the variable display).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, each time it is determined by the advantageous state determination means whether or not to control to the advantageous state, the comparison is performed, so that it is possible to more accurately identify that an inappropriate advantageous state determination value is set.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to means 3 or 4,
It is characterized by having an error notification means (for example, a portion for displaying a notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to an error on the image display device 5 by the effect control CPU 120 executing error notification processing (207SGS439)) capable of executing error notification that the set value information is abnormal when the comparison result of the comparison means is not the same.
According to this feature, it is possible to make those around the gaming machine recognize that the setting value information is abnormal, and to promptly take measures against the abnormal setting value information.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to means 5,
The game control means controls the game to a non-playable state where the matching result of the matching means is not the same, and outputs error notification information indicating that the setting value information is abnormal to the error notification means (for example, as shown in FIG. A part that executes the processing of S554 and transmits an error designation command to the effect control board 12),
The error notification means can execute the error notification based on the error notification information output by the game control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether an error designation command is received from the CPU 103 in the error notification process (207SGS439), and executes the error notification according to the received error designation command when the error designation command is received)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate game from being executed due to determination based on inappropriate set value information.

The gaming machine of means 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display,
The advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state for each variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-41, a portion that determines the variable display result using the variable display result determination module each time the CPU 103 executes the variable display),
a pending storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the processing of 207SGS510 in the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 9-39) capable of storing the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random value generating means when the variable display execution condition is established;
prior to the determination by the advantageous state determining means, it is possible to determine in advance whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state based on the reserved storage (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. 9-40);
further comprising
The pre-determination means performs the pre-determination by executing a process common to the advantageous state determination means's process for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 determines the variable display result using the variable display result determination module even in the winning random number value determination process).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, part of the processing of the advantageous state determination means and the advance determination means can be shared, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
a storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing setting value information capable of specifying the setting value set by the setting means;
Based on the random value for determination generated by the random value for determination generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, special state determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 9-41) for determining whether to control to the special state.
further comprising
The game control means can be controlled to the special state based on the fact that the special state determination means determines to control to the special state (for example, based on the variable display result being a small hit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to 8 ″, and the part that controls to the small hit game state),
Regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the special state determination value is set to the same number so as to form a continuous common numerical range from a special reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range (for example, regardless of the set value, 32767 is a small hit reference value and the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values, as shown in FIG. 9-17). ,
The special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state based on the special state determination value included in the common numerical range regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, but each time the determination is performed, the setting value information stored in the storage means is read, and the special state determination value included in the common numerical range corresponding to the setting value specified from the read setting value information is set (for example, as shown in FIGS. The numerical range of the small hit determination value is in the range of 32767 to 33094 regardless of the set value, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is in the range of 32767 to 33421 regardless of the set value. judgment part)
It is characterized by
According to this characteristic part, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state, and when the advantageous state determination means sets the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the setting value specified from the setting value information, the processing for setting the advantageous state determination value and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting value specified from the setting value information can be shared, so that the capacity of the processing program can also be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8,
For the set value with the lowest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is not set (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the portion where the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to an advantageous state or not, since it is only necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state for only the common numerical range among the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range for the most disadvantageous setting value for the player.

The gaming machine of means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 9,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values including an advantageous set value and a disadvantage set value with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a set value of 1 that is the most unfavorable set value for the player and a set value of 6 that is most advantageous to the player);
Judgment random number generating means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number for judging whether or not to control to the advantageous state,
Advantageous state determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
When the number of the advantageous state determination values differs according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the number of big hit determination values differs depending on the set value, and the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs),
The advantageous state determination value has at least a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is set to include the common numerical range and a non-common numerical range that is not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, a non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values ranging from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value) in a predetermined numerical range,
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, the jackpot numerical range is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a probability variable state)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is necessary to make a plurality of determinations as to whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the respective numerical ranges of the judgment random number and the advantageous state determination value generated by the judgment random value generation means. Based on the random number for judgment generated by the means and the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, it is only necessary to execute the judgment whether to control to the advantageous state only once, so the processing load for judging whether to control to the advantageous state can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 10,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values including an advantageous set value and a disadvantage set value with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a set value of 1 that is the most unfavorable set value for the player and a set value of 6 that is most advantageous to the player);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number value for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state,
Advantageous state determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41);
Based on the fact that the advanced state is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state according to the advantageous state determination method, the probability that the probability is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is the normal state or the advantageous state corresponding to the number of the number of the advantageous state determination values corresponding to the set value, the advantageous state is increased to the normal number. A gaming control means that can be controlled to a special state corresponding to the special number that is the number of values (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special design process processing shown in FIG. 5).
with
When the number of the advantageous state determination values differs according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the number of big hit determination values differs depending on the set value, and the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs),
The advantageous state determination value has at least a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is set to include the common numerical range and a non-common numerical range that is not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, a non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values ranging from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value) in a predetermined numerical range,
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2, the jackpot reference value is 1020, and the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range).
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the predetermined reference value in the predetermined numerical range, regardless of whether it is the normal state or the special state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, the jackpot numerical range is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a variable probability state).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is necessary to make a plurality of determinations as to whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the respective numerical ranges of the judgment random number and the advantageous state determination value generated by the judgment random value generation means. Based on the random number for judgment generated by the means and the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, it is only necessary to execute the judgment whether to control to the advantageous state only once, so the processing load for judging whether to control to the advantageous state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when determining whether or not the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value for judgment is between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous condition judgment value (whether or not the random number value for judgment is within the numerical range of the advantageous condition judgment value), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous condition judgment value becomes the predetermined reference value. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state only by specifying the value of , the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 11,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol), and controllable between an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state) advantageous to the player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values including an advantageous set value and a disadvantage set value with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a set value of 1 that is the most unfavorable set value for the player and a set value of 6 that is most advantageous to the player);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number value for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state,
Advantageous state determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41);
Based on the random value for determination generated by the random value for determination generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, special state determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 9-41) for determining whether to control to the special state.
Controllable to the advantageous state when the advantageous state determining means determines to control to the advantageous state, and controllable to the special state when the special state determining means determines to control to the special state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5);
with
When the number of the advantageous state determination values differs according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the number of big hit determination values differs depending on the set value, and the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs),
The advantageous state determination value has at least a first common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) common to the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is set to include the first common numerical range and a non-common numerical range that is not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, a non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values ranging from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value) in a predetermined numerical range,
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2, the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value).
As the special state determination value, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the same number is set so that the second common numerical range is continuous from the second reference value different from the first reference value in the range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range (For example, regardless of the set value, the range from 32767 to 33094 is the common numerical range of the small winning judgment value, with 32767 as the small winning reference value, regardless of the setting value. part set as
When the variable display of the first identification information is executed, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state with the first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the part that determines whether to control to the small hit game state with 328 determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value), and performs the variable display of the second identification information. When it is determined whether to control to the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-19 and 9-20, if the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, 655 determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value determine whether to control to the small hit game state portion),
Although the numbers of the first special state determination value and the second special state determination value are different, they are set to be a continuous numerical range from the common second reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 328, and when the fluctuation special figure is the second special design, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 6. Although it is 55, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set as a small hit reference value of 32767, which is a common value regardless of the fluctuation special figure)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is necessary to make a plurality of determinations as to whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the respective numerical ranges of the judgment random number and the advantageous state determination value generated by the judgment random value generation means. Based on the continuous numerical range including the first common numerical value range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value generated by the random number value generation means for judgment, it is only necessary to execute the judgment whether to control to the advantageous state only once, so that the processing load for judging whether to control to the advantageous state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when determining whether or not the random number for judgment generated by the random number for judgment is between the minimum and maximum values of the special state judgment value (whether or not the random number for judgment is within the numerical range of the special state judgment value), one of the minimum and maximum values of the special state judgment value becomes the second reference value. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control to the special state only by specifying it, the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 12,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of being controlled between an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values including an advantageous set value and a disadvantage set value with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a set value of 1 that is the most unfavorable set value for the player and a set value of 6 that is most advantageous to the player);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number value for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state,
Advantageous state determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41);
Based on the random value for determination generated by the random value for determination generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, special state determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 9-41) for determining whether to control to the special state.
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means to control to the advantageous state, and controllable to the special state based on the determination by the special state determination means to control to the special state Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5);
with
When the number of the advantageous state determination values differs according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the number of big hit determination values differs depending on the set value, and the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs),
The advantageous state determination value has at least a first common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) common to the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is set to include the first common numerical range and a non-common numerical range that is not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, a non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values ranging from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value) in a predetermined numerical range,
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2, the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value).
The special state determination value is set to a second common numerical range continuous from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the setting value with the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state. In a range different from the numerical range of the judgment value, if the fluctuation special figure is the first special pattern, it is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 with 32767 as the small hit reference value.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value that changes according to the set value, the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified in the same range according to the set value, so that the processing load for determining whether to control to the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is necessary to make a plurality of determinations as to whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the respective numerical ranges of the judgment random number and the advantageous state determination value generated by the judgment random value generation means. Based on the continuous numerical range including the first common numerical value range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value generated by the random number value generation means for judgment, it is only necessary to execute the judgment whether to control to the advantageous state only once, so that the processing load for judging whether to control to the advantageous state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the common numerical range of the special state determination value is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is necessary to make a plurality of determinations as to whether or not to control to the special state based on the respective numerical ranges of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state because it is only necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the common numerical range of the state determination value.

The gaming machine of means 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 13,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of being controlled between an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, a set value of 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, and a set value of 6, which is the most advantageous set value for the player) including an advantageous determination value and a disadvantageous determination value with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state;
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number value for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state,
Advantageous state determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41);
Based on the random value for determination generated by the random value for determination generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, special state determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 9-41) for determining whether to control to the special state.
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means to control to the advantageous state, it is possible to control to the special state based on the determination by the special state determination means to control to the special state, and the probability of being determined to control to the advantageous state is a normal state (for example, a normal state or a short working time state) corresponding to a normal number that is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to a set value, or a number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the advantageous state. Special state corresponding to the special number (for example, probability variable state) controllable game control means (for example, a portion for executing the special symbol process processing CPU103 shown in FIG. 5),
with
When the number of the advantageous state determination values differs according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the number of big hit determination values differs depending on the set value, and the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs),
The advantageous state determination value has at least a first common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) common to the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is set to include the first common numerical range and a non-common numerical range that is not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, a non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values ranging from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value) in a predetermined numerical range,
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2, the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value).
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range, regardless of whether it is the normal state or the special state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, the jackpot numerical range is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a variable probability state).
The special state determination value is set to a second common numerical range continuous from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state in the set value with the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state. In a range different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346 or 1020 to 1674, which is the numerical range of the jackpot determination value when 6 is set as the set value in the gaming machine 1, if the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the set value and game state are set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 with the small hit reference value always set to 3267 to 33094 regardless of whether the set value or game state is normal state, time saving state, probability variable state, and the variable special figure is set. If it is the second special symbol, regardless of whether the set value or the game state is the normal state, the time-saving state, or the variable probability state, the part that is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as the small hit reference value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value that changes according to the set value, the special state determination means can always specify the numerical range of the special state determination value in the same range according to the set value, so that the processing load for determining whether to control to the special state can be reduced.
Furthermore, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change according to the set value, the special state determination means can always specify the same numerical range as the numerical range of the special state determination value regardless of the set value, so that the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is necessary to make a plurality of determinations as to whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the respective numerical ranges of the judgment random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the judgment random value generated by the judgment random value generation means and the advantageous state judgment value, it is only necessary to execute the judgment whether to control to the advantageous state only once, so the processing load for judging whether to control to the advantageous state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the second common numerical value range of the special state determination value is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is necessary to perform a plurality of determinations as to whether or not to control to the special state based on each numerical range of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the random number value and the second common numerical range of the special state determination value, the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 14,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values including an advantageous set value and a disadvantage set value with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a set value of 1 that is the most unfavorable set value for the player and a set value of 6 that is most advantageous to the player);
Judgment random number generating means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number for judging whether or not to control to the advantageous state,
Advantageous state determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
When the number of the advantageous state determination values differs according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the number of big hit determination values differs depending on the set value, and the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs),
The advantageous state determination value has at least a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is set to include the common numerical range and a non-common numerical range that is not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value that is a range from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value (values 2 to 6 excluding 1)) in a predetermined numerical range.
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the range of 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to the value according to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 60000 as the reference value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range are set as the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, and only by changing only the non-common numerical range, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state can be changed for each set value, so that the development load of the game machine regarding the set value can be reduced. In particular, in this invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous condition determination values is set to the minimum value of the non-common numerical range and a value larger than the maximum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous condition determination values, or the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous condition determination values is set to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range and a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous condition determination values. and the non-common numerical value range do not overlap, the development load of the game machine regarding the set values can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of means 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 14,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values with different probability of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a value from 1, which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player, to 6, which is the most advantageous setting value for the player);
Judgment random number generating means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number for judging whether or not to control to the advantageous state,
Advantageous state determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
When the number of the advantageous state determination values differs according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the number of big hit determination values differs depending on the set value, and the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs),
As the advantageous state determination value, a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range, and a non-common numerical range that is different for each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values that is a range from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value (all values 1 to 6))
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the range of 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to the value according to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 60000 as the reference value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range are set as the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, and only by changing only the non-common numerical range, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state can be changed for each set value, so that the development load of the game machine regarding the set value can be reduced. In particular, in this invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous condition determination values is set to the minimum value of the non-common numerical range and a value larger than the maximum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous condition determination values, or the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous condition determination values is set to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range and a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous condition determination values. and the non-common numerical value range do not overlap, the development load of the game machine regarding the set values can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of means 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 16,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of being controlled between an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value and a disadvantageous setting value with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a setting value of 1, which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player, to a setting value of 6, which is the most advantageous setting value for the player);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number value for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state,
Advantageous state determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41);
Based on the random value for determination generated by the random value for determination generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, special state determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 9-41) for determining whether to control to the special state.
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means to control to the advantageous state, and controllable to the special state based on the determination by the special state determination means to control to the special state Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5);
with
When the number of the advantageous state determination values differs according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the number of big hit determination values differs depending on the set value, and the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs),
The advantageous state determination value has at least a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) that is common to each setting value that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is set to include the common numerical range and a non-common numerical range that is not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, a non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values ranging from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value) in a predetermined numerical range,
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2, the jackpot reference value is 1020, and the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range).
The special state determination value is set to the same number in a continuous range from the range of the advantageous state determination value, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-53 and 9-54, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is a portion that includes 328 determination values that are consecutive to the numerical range of the big hit determination value, regardless of the set value).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
In particular, in this invention, since the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value and the numerical range of the special state determination value are set continuously, when it is determined whether the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination is between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value or the special state determination value (whether the value is within the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value or whether the value is within the numerical range of the special state determination value), the judgment random value generation means is used to determine whether to control to the advantageous state or the special state. Whether or not the random number value for judgment generated in is between the minimum value of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value and the maximum value of the numerical range of the special state judgment value, or whether the random number value for judgment generated by the judgment random value generation means is a value between the maximum value of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value and the maximum value of the numerical range of the special state judgment value. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.

The gaming machine of means 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 17,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol), and controllable between an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state) advantageous to the player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values including an advantageous set value and a disadvantage set value with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a set value of 1 that is the most unfavorable set value for the player and a set value of 6 that is most advantageous to the player);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number value for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state,
Advantageous state determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41);
Based on the random value for determination generated by the random value for determination generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, special state determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 9-41) for determining whether to control to the special state.
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means to control to the advantageous state, and controllable to the special state based on the determination by the special state determination means to control to the special state Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5);
with
When the number of the advantageous state determination values differs according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the number of big hit determination values differs depending on the set value, and the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs),
The advantageous state determination value has at least a first common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) common to the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is set to include the first common numerical range and a non-common numerical range that is not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, a non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values ranging from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value) in a predetermined numerical range,
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2, the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value).
As the special state determination value, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the same number is set so as to form a second common numerical range that is continuous from a second reference value that is different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range,
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, regardless of the set value, 32767 is the small hit reference value, and the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value),
When the variable display of the first identification information is executed, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state with the first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the part that determines whether to control to the small hit game state with 328 determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value), and performs the variable display of the second identification information. When it is determined whether to control to the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-19 and 9-20, if the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, 655 determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value determine whether to control to the small hit game state portion),
Although the numbers of the first special state determination value and the second special state determination value are different, the range of the advantageous state determination value at the setting value with the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is set to a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value at the setting value with the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state so that the numerical range is continuous from the common second reference value (For example, as shown in FIGS. is the second special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 655, but the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is a numerical range different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346, which is the numerical range of the big hit judgment value in the variable probability state when 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. 32767 is the small hit reference value, and 3276 when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol. It is set in the numerical range of 7 to 33094, and if the fluctuation special pattern is the second special design, the part set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33421)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value that changes according to the set value, the special state determination means can always specify the numerical range of the special state determination value in the same range according to the set value, so that the processing load for determining whether to control to the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is necessary to make a plurality of determinations as to whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the respective numerical ranges of the judgment random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Based on the random number for judgment generated by the random number for judgment generation means and the continuous numerical range including the first common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, it is only necessary to execute the judgment only once to determine whether or not to control to the advantageous state.
Further, for example, in the case where the common numerical range of the special state determination value is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is necessary to repeatedly determine whether or not to control to the special state based on each numerical range of the judgment random value generated by the judgment random value generation means and the special state judgment value. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to a special state or not, because it is only necessary to determine whether to control to an advantageous state based on the common numerical range of the state determination value.
Further, for example, when determining to control to an advantageous state based on whether or not the random number for judgment generated by the random number for judgment is between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state judgment value (whether or not the random number for judgment is within the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state judgment value becomes the first reference value. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state only by specifying the value of the other side, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.
Further, for example, when determining whether or not the random number for judgment generated by the random number for judgment is between the minimum and maximum values of the special state judgment value (whether or not the random number for judgment is within the numerical range of the special state judgment value), one of the minimum and maximum values of the special state judgment value becomes the second reference value. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control to the special state only by specifying it, the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 18,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol), and controllable between an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state) advantageous to the player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value and a disadvantageous setting value with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a setting value of 1, which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player, to a setting value of 6, which is the most advantageous setting value for the player);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number value for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state,
Advantageous state determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41);
Based on the random value for determination generated by the random value for determination generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, special state determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 9-41) for determining whether to control to the special state.
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means to control to the advantageous state, it is possible to control to the special state based on the determination by the special state determination means to control to the special state, and the probability of being determined to control to the advantageous state is a normal state (for example, a normal state or a short working time state) corresponding to a normal number that is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to a set value, or a number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the advantageous state. Special state corresponding to the special number (for example, probability variable state) controllable game control means (for example, a portion for executing the special symbol process processing CPU103 shown in FIG. 5),
with
When the number of the advantageous state determination values differs according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the number of big hit determination values differs depending on the set value, and the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs),
The advantageous state determination value has at least a first common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) common to the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is set to include the common numerical range and a non-common numerical range that is not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, a non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values ranging from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value) in a predetermined numerical range,
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2, the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value).
As the special state determination value, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the same number is set so as to form a second common numerical range continuous from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. set part),
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range, regardless of whether it is the normal state or the special state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, the jackpot numerical range is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a variable probability state).
The number of the special state determination values is the same number regardless of whether it is the set value set by the setting means and the normal state or the special state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the numerical range of 1020 to 1346 and 1020 to 1674, which are the numerical ranges of the big hit determination value when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. If is the first special symbol, regardless of whether the set value or game state is the normal state, the time-saving state, or the probability variable state, it is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 as a small hit reference value regardless of whether the variable special symbol is a second special symbol. part set as a numerical range),
The number of the special state determination values is the same number regardless of the setting value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, the numerical range of the small hit is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 with 32767 as the small hit reference value regardless of the setting value to be set if the fluctuation special symbol is the first special symbol. If the fluctuation special symbol is the second special symbol, regardless of the setting value to be set, The part that is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as the small hit reference value),
When the variable display of the first identification information is executed, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state with the first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the part that determines whether to control to the small hit game state with 328 determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value), and performs the variable display of the second identification information. When it is determined whether to control to the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-19 and 9-20, if the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, 655 determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value determine whether to control to the small hit game state portion),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the second special state determination value are different, the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state at the set value with the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is set to a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value so that the numerical range is continuous from the common second reference value (For example, as shown in FIGS. When the variation special figure is the second special symbol, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is 655, but the numerical range of the small hit determination value is different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346, which is the numerical range of the big hit determination value in the variable probability state when 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. The variation special figure is the first special symbol with 32767 as the small hit reference value. In the case, it is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33094, and if the variation special pattern is the second special design, the part set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33421)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value that changes according to the set value, the special state determination means can always specify the numerical range of the special state determination value in the same range according to the set value, so that the processing load for determining whether to control to the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is necessary to make a plurality of determinations as to whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the respective numerical ranges of the judgment random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Based on the random number for judgment generated by the random number for judgment generation means and the continuous numerical range including the first common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, it is only necessary to execute the judgment only once to determine whether or not to control to the advantageous state.
Further, for example, in the case where the common numerical range of the special state determination value is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is necessary to repeatedly determine whether or not to control to the special state based on each numerical range of the judgment random value generated by the judgment random value generation means and the special state judgment value. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to a special state or not, because it is only necessary to determine whether to control to an advantageous state based on the common numerical range of the state determination value.
Further, for example, when determining whether or not the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value for judgment is between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous condition judgment value (whether or not the random number value for judgment is within the numerical range of the advantageous condition judgment value), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous condition judgment value becomes the predetermined reference value. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state only by specifying the value of , the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when determining whether or not the random number for judgment generated by the random number value for judgment is between the minimum and maximum values of the special state judgment value (whether or not the random number for judgment is within the numerical range of the special state judgment value), one of the minimum and maximum values of the special state judgment value becomes the second reference value, so the special state judgment means selects the value other than the second reference value among the minimum value and the maximum value according to the fluctuation special figure. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control to the special state only by specifying it, the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 19,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of being controlled between an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values including an advantageous set value and a disadvantage set value with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a set value of 1 that is the most unfavorable set value for the player and a set value of 6 that is most advantageous to the player);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number value for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state,
Advantageous state determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41);
Based on the random value for determination generated by the random value for determination generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, special state determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 9-41) for determining whether to control to the special state.
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means to control to the advantageous state, and controllable to the special state based on the determination by the special state determination means to control to the special state Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5);
with
When the number of the advantageous state determination values differs according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the number of big hit determination values differs depending on the set value, and the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs),
The advantageous state determination value has at least a first common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) common to the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is set to include the first common numerical range and a non-common numerical range that is not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value that is a range from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value (values 2 to 6 excluding 1)) in a predetermined numerical range.
The first common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 is the big hit reference value and the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range).
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to the value according to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 60000 as the reference value).
Regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the special state determination value is set to the same number in a range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value so as to be a second common numerical range continuous from a second reference value different from the first reference value and the specific reference value (For example, as shown in Figs. Regardless of the set value that is set, if the fluctuation special figure is the first special design, it is always set in the range of 32767 to 33094, and if the fluctuation special figure is the second special design, the part that is always set in the range of 3267 to 33421)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state. Especially in this invention, since it is always determined whether or not to control to a special state based on the same numerical range of the small hit determination value, the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state can be reduced, and the amount of data related to the processing to determine whether or not to control to a special state can be suppressed.

The gaming machine of means 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 19,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of being controlled between an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state;
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number value for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state,
Advantageous state determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41);
Based on the random value for determination generated by the random value for determination generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, special state determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 9-41) for determining whether to control to the special state.
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means to control to the advantageous state, and controllable to the special state based on the determination by the special state determination means to control to the special state Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5);
with
When the number of the advantageous state determination values differs according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the number of big hit determination values differs depending on the set value, and the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs),
As the advantageous state determination value, a first common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) that is common to each set value that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range, and a non-common numerical range that is different for each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values that is a range from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value (all values 1 to 6)) are set.
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 is the jackpot reference value and the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range).
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to the value according to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 60000 as the reference value).
Regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the special state determination value is set to the same number so as to be a continuous common numerical range from a second reference value different from the first reference value and the specific reference value in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value (For example, as shown in FIGS. Regardless of the setting value, if the fluctuation special figure is the first special design, it is always set in the range of 32767 to 33094, and if the fluctuation special figure is the second special design, the part that is always set in the range of 3267 to 33421)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state. In particular, in this invention, whether or not to control to a special state is always determined based on the same numerical range of the small hit determination value, so the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state can be reduced, and the amount of data related to the processing to determine whether or not to control to a special state can be suppressed.

This invention may have only the matters specifying the invention stated in the claims of this invention, or may have a configuration other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention stated in the claims of this invention.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big-hit probability and small-hit probability for every setting value. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 084IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 084IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 084IW. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing processing executed when power is turned on; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor in setting change processing; It is an explanatory view showing a fluctuation pattern table. 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation control process processing in the characteristic part 084IW. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special live production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an icon display mode determination lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start waiting process in production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a capsule mode determination table, a card mode determination lottery table, a characteristic table showing characteristics of the card mode and the capsule mode, and an eye-catching presentation mode selection lottery table; It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display in production control process processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion history storage area; It is a flowchart which shows per special figure waiting processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of an eye-catching effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of setting suggestion history; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of a special live effect; It is a timing chart in the case of executing a special live effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of a special live effect in a modified example; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows a game information display part. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every jackpot classification in a special design display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the shift aspect of a 1st suspension indicator and a 2nd suspension indicator. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every jackpot classification in a round indicator. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the first special figure in the variable probability state. It is a figure showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the second special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the second special figure in the variable probability state. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big win variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), and (C) is an explanatory view showing a small win variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a start winning command buffer. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. 4 is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining changes in display contents of a display monitor; It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the RAM. 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing; 9 is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing; 7 is a flowchart showing power failure detection processing; It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing the display mode of the display monitor at the time of cold start, and (B) is a diagram showing the display mode of the display monitor at the time of occurrence of a set value abnormality error or recovery from power failure during setting change. (A) is a diagram showing changes in the display mode of the special symbol display device, the holding display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round indicator during execution of the setting change process, and (B) shows the change in the display mode of the special symbol display device when a set value abnormal error occurs or when the power is restored from the power failure during the setting change. It is a figure which shows a part of timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display result determination module; It is a flow chart which shows production control main processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing information stored in a RAM and a cleared state; It is an explanatory diagram showing an initial pattern for each received command. It is an explanatory diagram showing a notification mode when the pachinko game machine is started. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation example of non-detection operation control and actual operation confirmation operation control; FIG. 7 is a diagram showing operation speeds in operations of non-detection operation control and operation control for actual operation confirmation; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the end timing of setting value change and setting value confirmation and the number of executions of the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process; FIG. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. 7 is a flowchart showing power failure detection processing; It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. 10 is a flow chart showing setting value change processing in the characteristic portion 10F. 10 is a flow chart showing setting value change processing in the characteristic portion 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop start process in the characteristic part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop completion|finish process in the characteristic part 10F. It is a figure which illustrates the production|presentation control command in the characteristic part 40F. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control main process in the characteristic part 40F. It is a flow chart showing sub-side game stop processing in the characteristic portion 40F. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table referred to in a low probability state; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table referred to in a high probability state; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of pending display and active display in a low probability/low base state, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of pending display and active display in a low probability/high base state, and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of pending display and active display in a high probability/high base state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game flow regarding each production mode. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table referred to in the first period [excluding the final variation], (B) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the variation pattern determination table referred to in the first period [final variation], and (C) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation pattern determination table referred to in the second period. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot gaming state. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of a fluctuation start. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an execution/non-execution determination table for a first suggested effect, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an execution/non-execution determination table for a cut-in advance notice effect, and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a second setting suggestion effect execution/non-execution determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to a first suggested effect during a first period, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a specific example of an effect mode related to a first suggested effect during a second period. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding a second setting suggestion presentation; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding continuous challenge production|presentation.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided for variable display (also referred to as a special symbol game) of special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a variable display of decoration patterns (designs showing numbers etc.) as a plurality of kinds of decoration identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolled display or updated display) in the respective ``left'', ``middle'' and ``right'' decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

A first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first suspension display 25A displays the number of first suspension storage according to the number of LEDs lit, and the second suspension display 25B displays the number of second storage storage according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces come close to the winning ball device 6A, and a closed state in which game balls do not enter the second start-up winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being in an open state) by tilting the movable wing when the solenoid 81 is on. When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and forms a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball cannot enter (pass through) the big winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening so that the game balls can easily enter the big winning opening.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, a hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided for holding (storing) game balls paid out as prize balls or game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine so as to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed), the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or during the period when it is controlled to the big winning game state or the small winning game state described later (when the starting winning occurs but the special game based on the starting winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In a special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a big win pattern, for example, '7', the actual pattern differs depending on the type of big win to be described later) is stop-displayed as a fixed special pattern, it becomes a 'big win', and if a predetermined special pattern (small-win pattern, for example, '2') different from the big win pattern is stop-displayed, it becomes a 'small win'. Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is continued until the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses or the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9), whichever is earlier. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc., to be described later) are prepared, and jackpot types are set according to these. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the big winning opening is opened in the same opening mode as the big winning game state in the case of some big winning types (the number of opening times of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds and the closing timing of the big winning opening is the same, etc.). In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time saving state, control (high open control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening by shortening the average normal pattern fluctuation time (period of changing the normal pattern) than in the normal state, or improving the probability of becoming a "normal pattern hit" in the normal game than in the normal state. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc. The pachinko machine 1 is in the initial setting state of the pachinko machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be "normal game" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be "big win" (For example, when the system is reset and the predetermined return processing is not executed after the power is turned on). is controlled in the same way as

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is finished, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, when the special picture game at the occurrence of "small win" is the special picture game of the above-mentioned predetermined number of cuts, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and/or turning on/off of the game effect lamp 9, operation of the movable body 32, etc. may be performed.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, variable display of decorative patterns is started corresponding to the start of the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game in ``left'', ``middle'' and ``right'' decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided in the image display device 5.例文帳に追加At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game and the second special game, the fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means a mode in which, when the decorative patterns stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative patterns which are not yet stopped and displayed continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko game machine 1, a plurality of kinds of ready-to-win performances are executed with different ratios (also called big win reliability or big win expectation) of a display result (display result of a special game or display result of variable display of decorative patterns) to a ``big win'' according to a performance mode. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special pattern game becomes a ``big hit'', a fixed decoration pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of the decoration patterns is a ``big hit''). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

In the case of a ``variable probability big win'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd number decoration patterns (for example, ``7'' etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and in the case of a ``non-probability variable big win (normal big win)'' not controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, even number decoration patterns (for example, ``6'' etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special pattern game is a ``small hit'', a fixed decoration pattern (for example, ``1 3 5'' or the like) which is a predetermined small hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern is a ``small hit''). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of a part of the big win types (big hit type of the big win game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win", a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "losing", the variable display mode of the decorative patterns does not become the ready-to-win mode, and as a display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, fixed decorative patterns (also referred to as "non-ready-to-lose") of the non-ready-to-win combinations may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns to be "non-ready-to-lose"). Further, when the display result is ``losing'', after the mode of variable display of the decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, as the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, the fixed decorative patterns of a predetermined ready-to-win combination (also called ``ready-to-lose''), which is not a big hit combination, may be stop-displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is ``ready-to-lose'').

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decoration pattern during the variable display of the decoration pattern and then resuming the variable display, a pseudo-continuous performance may be executed in which one variable display is simulated as a plurality of times of variable display.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. By executing a common performance during the small winning game state and the big winning game state in a part of the big winning type (the big winning type of the big winning game state in the same manner as the small winning game state, for example, the big winning type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state), the player may not know whether the current state is the small winning game state or the big winning game state. In such a case, it may be made impossible to distinguish between the high-probability state and the low-probability state by executing a common performance after the end of the small-win game state and after the end of the big-win game state.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a normal game (including management of suspension), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

A game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

I / O 105, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation display device 25A, second reservation display device 25B, signal for controlling (driving) general design reservation display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 takes in a detection signal (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits the signal to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) to the effect control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control commands include, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the big winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of reserved memories, the game state), the command specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and has a function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances corresponding to the progress of the game, including various reports such as driving of the movable body 32, error reporting, and power failure recovery reporting) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, including determination of the effect to be executed, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the effect based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicates the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting/lighting-off mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating movable body 32, etc.) may be executed by effect control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

An I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in a performance control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backup data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is recovered, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before the restoration by executing timer interrupt processing for game control to be described later.

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, a performance control command designating the backed-up game state before power interruption, or a performance control command designating the display result of the special game being executed when the special game is being executed may be transmitted. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives the performance control command specifying the restoration time from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the power interruption has been restored or is being restored from the power interruption. The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start-up winnings, etc.), and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has occurred) are output to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and the small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details will be described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). A CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby enabling management of execution and suspension of a normal pattern game based on a detection signal from a gate switch 21 (based on the passage of a game ball through a passage gate 41) and control of opening of a variable winning ball device 6B based on ``per normal pattern''. The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission setting for transmitting a performance control command for designating determination results such as occurrence of start winning, number of pending memories, pre-reading determination, etc. is performed to a performance control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command at the time of start winning thus transmitted and set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG.

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In the special pattern normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a ``big win'' or a ``minor win'' and the type of the big win in the case of ``big win'' are determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed, based on the random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the production contents (type of reach production, etc.) during the variable display of the decorative pattern. It is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes processing of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, processing of measuring elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary, and the like. Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop processing includes a setting process for stopping the variation of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for stopping and displaying (deriving) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big win opening pre-processing includes a setting process for starting the execution of the round in the big win game state and opening the big winning port based on the fact that the display result is "big win". When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". The process during the opening of the big win includes a process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning hole and a process of judging whether or not it is time to return the big winning hole from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.例文帳に追加Then, when returning the big prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing the processing of stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning prize opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", and the processing during the opening of the big winning prize is finished.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The processing after opening the big win includes processing for determining whether or not the number of execution times of rounds in which the big prize opening is opened reaches a set upper limit execution number, and processing for setting to end the big win game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. When the number of execution times of the round does not reach the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of execution times of the round reaches the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the special process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes processing for waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending performance is executed as a performance operation for informing the end of the jackpot game state passes, and processing for performing various settings for starting variable probability control and time reduction control corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This processing during the opening of the small winning prize includes processing for measuring the elapsed time after opening the big prize winning port and processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the big prize winning port from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time or the like. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and performs register settings of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the production control board 12. Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the turning on of the performance control INT signal, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command) when using a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt prohibition state. The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various performance control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the performance control command reception buffer, setting and control corresponding to the read performance control commands are performed. For example, the read performance control command is stored in a predetermined area of a RAM 122 or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which performance control command is received and the contents specified by the performance control command can be confirmed by performance control process processing or the like. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative luminous bodies such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving operation of the movable body 32 are controlled to operate various effect devices. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11.例文帳に追加When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result (determined decorative pattern) of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the presence/absence of execution of various effects such as ready-to-win effects and various advance notice effects, the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output the sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and to output the command (electrical signal) to the lamp control board 14 for the game effect lamp 9 and decoration. Various production controls are executed during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking LEDs. After performing such performance control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative pattern is read out from the performance control pattern, or when a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11, etc., the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . When receiving a performance control command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, if the command designates the start of the big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when a command designating the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and a waiting time for receiving the command elapses, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit middle production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, an production control pattern corresponding to the production contents in the small-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the small-hit game state based on the set contents. In the small winning middle performance processing, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small winning game state from the main board 11, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5" corresponding to the small winning ending performance, and the small winning middle performance processing is finished.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small-hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small-hit game state, etc., and executes various effect control at the end of the small-hit game state based on the set contents. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In the big-win performance processing, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to "7" corresponding to the ending performance processing in response to receiving, for example, a command designating the end of the big-win game state from the main board 11, and the big-win performance processing is completed.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, for example, and executes various performance control of the ending performance at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 in the above basic description is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but it may be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winning.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a slot machine (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided in a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1, and may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit.

The game may be executed not only by loading a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) may include that one is a ratio of “0%”. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description on Characteristic Portion 084IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 084IW will be described.

In this characteristic part 084IW, the switch circuit 110 takes in a detection signal from the general winning hole switch (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered the general winning hole 10 and the switch is turned on) and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100.

In this characteristic portion 084IW, small symbols synchronized with the special symbols are displayed on the image display device 5 in a variable/stop manner. Specifically, in the low base state, mainly the first special pattern fluctuates, so small patterns synchronous with the first special pattern are displayed, and in the high base state, mainly the second special pattern fluctuates, so the small patterns synchronous with the second special pattern are displayed. Both the small symbols synchronized with the first special symbol and the small symbols synchronized with the second special symbol may be displayed regardless of the game state.

In this characteristic portion 084IW, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to be set to one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player.

In this example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a door open sensor (not shown) that detects that the game machine frame 3 is in an open state and outputs a detection signal. Further, in this example, the main board 11 is provided with a setting key (not shown) for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. In this example, since the substrate case (not shown) having the setting keys is provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, it is impossible to operate from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. Further, since the setting key requires the operation of a door key owned by a store clerk or the like of the game arcade, only the store clerk who possesses the door key can operate the setting key. The setting key is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF. In this characteristic portion 084IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may also be used. Further, in this example, a display monitor is arranged in the substrate case.

(big hit probability, small hit probability)
FIG. 8-1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the big-hit probability and the small-hit probability for each set value. As shown in FIG. 8-1, this example shows a case where the setting can be changed in six stages from setting values "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, but may be configured so that the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or in 7 or more steps.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-1, in the non-variable state (low probability state), the set value "1" is the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The set value ``2'', the set value ``3'', the set value ``4'' and the set value ``5'' increase in order, and the set value ``6'' has the highest jackpot probability ``247/65536'', which is the most advantageous setting for the player. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-1, in the variable probability state (high probability state), the winning probability of the big win is 10 times as a whole compared to the non-variable probability state (low probability state). The set value ``2'', the set value ``3'', the set value ``4'', and the set value ``5'' increase in order, and the set value ``6'' has the highest jackpot probability of ``2470/65536'', which is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, with respect to the small hit, as shown in FIG. 8-1, regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6", and regardless of whether it is a non-variable state (low probability state) or a variable state (high probability state), the small hit probability is constant at "6298/65536". That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common in the non-variable probability state and the variable probability state. Even in the case where the probability of a small win is constant while the probability of a big win is different according to the set value, as shown in FIG.

When a big hit is determined, the types of jackpots such as a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot), a probability variable jackpot, and a sudden probability jackpot (2R probability variable jackpot) are also determined. Further, when a small win is determined, it is conceivable that a plurality of kinds of small win types are determined, but the small win types are also determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values '1' to '6'.

In addition, the variation pattern is determined when the variable display is started, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6".

In this way, FIG. 8-1 shows an example of the big hit/small hit/loss probability for each set value, but for the sake of simplification, the small hit probability is 0/65536 regardless of which set value is set. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown below, the jackpot probability is the jackpot probability shown in FIG. 8-1, the small-hit probability is 0/65536, and the losing probability is the losing probability shown in FIG. 8-1.

(setting confirmation processing, setting change processing)
Next, the change of the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 in this characterizing part 084IW will be explained. Figures 8-2 to 8-4 are flowcharts showing game control main processing in the characterizing portion 084IW. In this characteristic portion 084IW, the processing of steps IWS001-S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1-S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 sets an effect control means activation waiting timer for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the game machine is started (step 084IWS003). In this case, sufficient time is set to the effect control means startup waiting timer from when the power supply to the gaming machine is started until the effect control CPU 120 is activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 084IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 084IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, it returns to step 084IWS004 and repeats the processing of steps 084IWS004 to S005. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 084IWS006.

By executing the processing of steps 084IWS003 to S005, after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is activated, the processing after step 084IWS006 is executed, and the setting values are changed and confirmed, and the RAM is initialized and restored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various kinds of commands such as a set value command, an initialization designation command, a command at the time of restoration, etc., which will be described later, are transmitted before the performance control CPU 120 is activated, and the occurrence of missing commands can be prevented.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the RAM clear flag indicating that the clear switch has been pressed when the game machine is powered on (step 084IWS006).

In this example, the RAM clear flag is not cleared in the later-described power-off process (see step 084IWS031), and the RAM clear flag is once cleared in step 084IWS006 when the gaming machine is powered on, and then, if the clear switch is set, the RAM clear flag is newly set (see steps 084IWS016 and S022). For example, the RAM clear flag may also be cleared when the power-off process is executed, and then if the clear switch is set when the game machine is powered on, the RAM clear flag may be newly set.

Next, CPU 103 determines whether or not backup data is stored in RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as step S4 (step 084IWS007). Specifically, at step 084IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 084IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 084IWS012.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 084IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) in the same manner as in step S5, and determines whether the data is normal (step 084IWS008). At step 084IWS008, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 084IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 084IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 084IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values "1" to "6" (step 084IWS009). If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is one of the set values "1" to "6", the process proceeds to step 084IWS011.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (N at step 084IWS008) or when it is determined that the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values "1" to "6" (Y at step 084IWS009), the CPU 103 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the RAM 102 (step 084IWS010). Then, the process proceeds to step 084IWS012.

When the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is one of the setting values "1" to "6" (N in step 084IWS009), the CPU 103 checks whether or not a setting change flag indicating that setting change processing for changing the setting value is being executed is set (step 084IWS011). If the setting change flag is set (step 084IWS011; Yes), that is, if the power supply to the game machine is restarted due to power failure or the like during the change of the setting value, the process proceeds to step 084IWS012.

At step 084IWS012, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor is ON (step 084IWS012). If the output signal from the door open sensor is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key is on (step 084IWS013). If the setting key is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 084IWS014). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes RAM clear 2 processing (step 084IWS015).

In this example, RAM clear processing includes RAM clear 1 processing (see step 084IWS051) and RAM clear 2 processing (see step 084IWS015) which is executed when a RAM error occurs.

In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the memory area of the RAM 102 other than the area for storing performance display information such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base, and the area for storing setting values is cleared, and the performance display information such as continuous ratio, role ratio, base, and setting value information are not cleared but held. The storage area of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 1 process is hereinafter referred to as a clear storage area 1 .

In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the area other than the area for storing performance display information such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base is cleared in the storage area of RAM 102, and the performance display information such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base is not cleared but held. In addition, in the RAM clear 2 process, the set values stored in the RAM 102 are also cleared. The storage area of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is hereinafter referred to as a clear storage area 2 . Therefore, in this example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is wider than the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 1 process.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 084IWS016) and proceeds to step 084IWS025. Note that the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102 .

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor is off (N at step 084IWS012), when the setting key is off (N at step 084IWS013), or when the output signal from the clear switch is off (N at step 084IWS014), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a setting value abnormality error command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 084IWS017).

Next, the CPU 103 shifts to the loop processing of steps 084IWS018-S020. In the loop processing, the CPU 103 executes 4ms wait processing for measuring a 4ms wait time (step 084IWS018). Then, after the wait time of 4 ms has elapsed, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 084IWS019 and displays a predetermined error (step 084IWS019). For example, the CPU 103 performs control to display a display (for example, display of "E") indicating a RAM abnormal error on the display monitor. Further, the CPU 103 controls the external output of the security signal to an external device such as a hall computer through the external terminal board (step 084IWS020). Then, the processing after step 084IWS018 is repeatedly executed.

By executing the processing of steps 084IWS007 to S020, in this characteristic part 084IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in steps 084IWS007 and S008, Y in step 084IWS009), or when a power failure occurs during setting change (Y in step 084IWS011), the setting key is turned on and the clear switch is turned on while the game machine frame 3 is open. The RAM is cleared under the condition that the setting value is changed after step 084IWS025. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened and the setting key and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 084IWS011; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 084IWS021). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 084IWS022).

In this example, the processing of steps 084IWS022 and 084IWS016 is executed to set the RAM clear flag when the ON state of the clear switch is detected for the first time when the game machine is powered on. After that, until the timer interrupt is set and the timer interrupt processing (game control processing) is started, there are a plurality of scenes where it is confirmed whether or not the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on. However, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on by confirming whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, instead of directly confirming the state of the clear switch (see steps 084IWS025, S034, and S048).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor is ON (step 084IWS023). If the output signal from the door open sensor is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key is on (step 084IWS024). If the setting key is on, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 084IWS025). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a setting confirmation command indicating execution of setting confirmation processing for confirming the setting value to the effect control CPU 120 (step 084IWS026). Then, the process proceeds to step 084IWS030.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a setting change command indicating execution of setting change processing for changing the set value to the effect control CPU 120 (step 084IWS027). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (step 084IWS028). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (that is, if an abnormality of the RAM 102 is detected), the CPU 103 sets the setting value to "1" in the setting value determination buffer (storage area for storing the current setting value provided in the RAM 102) (step 084IWS029). Then, the process proceeds to step 084IWS030. At this time, the CPU 103 resets the RAM abnormality flag.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation command or a setting change command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is illuminated in a predetermined manner). In this case, when an operation button for effect such as the push button 31B is pressed on the effect control board 12 side, "maintenance mode" or the like may be displayed to shift to the maintenance mode. The "maintenance mode" is a mode in which, for example, the date and time setting of the real-time clock, the history of various errors (recording when and what kind of error occurred), and the setting change history (recording when the setting value was changed and the setting value after change) can be checked. Note that when the setting key is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode is also terminated.

Next, the CPU 103 executes 4ms wait processing for measuring a 4ms wait time (step 084IWS030). Then, after the wait time of 4 ms has elapsed, the CPU 103 shifts to step 084IWS031 and executes power-off processing (step 084IWS031). In the power-off process of step 084IWS031, the CPU 103 executes a process of detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not the power has turned on). The power-off signal is output when, for example, a power monitoring circuit mounted on the power board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off process, when the CPU 103 detects that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 103 executes the power-supply-off process for saving necessary data (eg, backup flag, checksum) in the backup RAM area.

Next, the CPU 103 identifies the set values stored in the set value determination buffer, and displays the identified set values on the display monitor (step 084IWS032). Further, the CPU 103 performs control for externally outputting a security signal to an external device such as a hall computer through the external terminal board (step 084IWS033).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 084IWS034). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds directly to step 084IWS043.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the setting changing flag (step 084IWS035) and starts setting change processing. Next, it is checked whether or not an initial setting completion flag indicating that a value has already been set to the clear switch buffer for the first time after the game machine is powered on is set (step 084IWS036). The clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 102 and is a buffer for setting the input state of the clear switch (whether it is on or off). For example, the clear switch buffer is set to a value of "1" when the clear switch is on, and set to a value of "0" when the clear switch is off. If the initial set flag is set (if the value has already been set to the clear switch buffer for the first time since the game machine was turned on), the process proceeds directly to step 084IWS039.

If the first set flag is not set (that is, if no value has been set to the clear switch buffer since the gaming machine was turned on), the CPU 103 sets a value (for example, "1") indicating an ON state to the clear switch buffer (step 084IWS037). Also, the CPU 103 sets an initial setting flag (step 084IWS038).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the value currently set in the clear switch buffer to the previous clear switch buffer (step 084IWS039). The previous clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 102 and is a buffer for setting the input state (on state or off state) of the clear switch confirmed last time (4 ms ago in this example). For example, the previous clear switch buffer is set to a value of "1" if the previously confirmed clear switch is in the ON state, and is set to a value of "0" if it is in the OFF state.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms the current input state of the clear switch and sets the current input state of the clear switch in the clear switch buffer (step 084IWS040). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the value set in the clear switch buffer last time was in the OFF state (eg, "0") and whether the value set in the clear switch buffer was in the ON state (eg, "1") (step 084IWS041).

If the value set in the clear switch buffer last time is OFF and the value set in the clear switch buffer is ON, the CPU 103 updates and displays the set value displayed on the display monitor and stores it in the set value determination buffer (updates and stores the already stored set value) (step 084IWS042). For example, when "1" is displayed as the setting value on the display monitor, the display on the display monitor is updated to "2", and the setting value "2" is stored in the setting value determination buffer. Also, when "2" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor, the display on the display monitor is updated to "3" and the set value "3" is stored in the set value determination buffer. Also, when "3" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor, the display on the display monitor is updated to "4", and the set value "4" is stored in the set value determination buffer. Also, when "4" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor, the display on the display monitor is updated to "5", and the set value "5" is stored in the set value determination buffer. Also, when "5" is displayed as the setting value on the display monitor, the display on the display monitor is updated to "6", and the setting value "6" is stored in the setting value determination buffer. Also, when "6" is displayed as the setting value on the display monitor, the display on the display monitor is updated to "1", and the setting value "1" is stored in the setting value determination buffer.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key is on (step 084IWS043). If the setting key remains on, the process moves to step 084IWS030, and the processing of steps 084IWS030 to S043 is repeatedly executed, and the setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the setting key is turned off, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation process and setting change process, and proceeds to step 084IWS044.

By executing the above steps 084IWS025 to S043, if the RAM clear flag is not set (that is, if the clear switch is not turned on when the gaming machine is turned on) (steps 084IWS025, S034 N), the setting confirmation command is transmitted (step 084IWS026), and the setting confirmation process (especially step 084IWS032) is only performed, and the setting change process is performed. No. On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is set (that is, if the clear switch is turned on when the gaming machine is powered on) (steps 084IWS025, Y in S034), a setting change command is transmitted (step 084IWS027), and setting confirmation processing (especially steps 084IWS032) and setting change processing (especially steps 068IWS035 to S042) are performed.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) to the security information timer for setting the output period of the security signal (step 084IWS044). In this example, if the setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the game machine, the external output of the security signal is started by executing the step 084IWS033, but then the security information timer is set in step 084IWS044, and the security information timer is set. By executing the information output process (step S23) based on the value, the security signal is continuously output until the prescribed period (eg, 30 seconds) elapses.

On the other hand, in this example, the processing of step 084IWS020 is executed to output the security signal to the outside even when the RAM abnormality occurs. In this case, the security signal is continuously output to the outside until the power supply to the game machine is reset.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 084IWS045). Also, the CPU 103 erases the set values displayed on the display monitor (step 084IWS046). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control CPU 120 (step 084IWS047).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 084IWS048). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to recovery processing of step 084IWS049. The processing of steps 084IWS049 and S050 in this characteristic portion 084IW is the same as the processing of steps S6 and S7 shown in FIG.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 executes RAM clear 1 processing to clear the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 (068IWS051). The processing of steps 084IWS052 to S055 in this characteristic portion 084IW is the same as the processing of steps S9 to S12 shown in FIG.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram showing the processing executed when the power is turned on. In this characteristic portion 084IW, as shown in FIG. 8-5, when the setting key is on (and when the output signal from the door opening sensor is on) when the power is turned on, if the clear switch is on, setting confirmation processing (especially step 084IWS032) and setting change processing (especially 068IWS035 to S042) are executed, and initialization processing (RAM clear 1 processing (step 084IWS051)) is executed, and the clear switch is turned on. If it is off, only the setting confirmation process (especially step 084IWS032) is executed and the recovery process (step 084IWS049) is executed. If the setting key is off when the power is turned on, only the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 084IWS051)) is executed if the clear switch is on, and only the recovery process (step 084IWS049) is executed if the clear switch is off.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor in the setting confirmation process and the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 (A) and 8-6 (B), when the power is turned off (powered off) by the operation of a game hall clerk or the like, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, thereby ending the display on the display monitor. When the power is turned off and the large winning opening is open during a jackpot game or the like, power supply to the solenoid 82 is stopped and the large winning opening is closed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-6(C), when the game arcade clerk or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (if Yes in step S3 of the game control main processing), the setting key is ON On condition that the setting confirmation process is executed by the CPU 103, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor.

In the state in which the set values are displayed on the display monitor in this way, as shown in FIG. 8D, the CPU 103 sequentially updates the numerical values displayed on the display monitor each time it detects the operation of the clear switch by the store clerk or the like in the setting change process (for example, updates 1→2→3→4→5→6→1→ . . . each time the clear switch is operated). Also, the setting values displayed on the display monitor are stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-6(E), the CPU 103 turns off the display monitor when the setting key is turned off by the game parlor staff or the like, thereby notifying the amusement parlor staff or the like that the new set values have been stored in the backup area of the RAM 102.

Also, if the reserve memory is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserve memory is cleared. In addition, when the big winning hole is closed at the timing of FIG. 8-6 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off), when the setting is changed, RAM clear processing is executed and the memory related to the big win is erased, so the big winning hole remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change processing, and enters a state in which a game can be performed, that is, a state in which a variation display result, a jackpot type, a lottery for determination of a variation pattern, payout of prize balls, and the like can be executed.

In the setting change processing of the characteristic portion 084IW, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is exemplified as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be displayed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-6, the setting value is displayed using the first display of the four-digit display of the display monitor when confirming or changing the setting value. Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed by performing a dedicated 4-digit display on the display monitor. In this case, for example, if the setting value is "1", the display monitor displays "-S-1" in four digits, if the setting value is "2", the display monitor displays "-S-2" in four digits, or if the setting value is "3", the display monitor displays "-S-3" in four digits. Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed on all four digits of the display monitor. For example, if the set value is "1", a four-digit display of "1111" may be displayed on the display monitor, and if the set value is "2", a four-digit display of "2222" may be displayed on the display monitor.

The characteristic portion 084IW is provided with the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 8-7. As shown in FIG. 8-7, as the variation patterns when the variable display result is lost, there are provided a variation pattern Pt11 in which the effect content is non-reachable and the variation time is 5 seconds, a variation pattern Pt12 in which the effect content is non-reachable and the variation time is as short as 2 seconds, a variation pattern Pt13 in which the effect content is normal reach out and the variation time is 15 seconds, and a variation pattern Pt14 in which the effect content is super reach and the variation time is 30 seconds. It is Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7, as a variation pattern when the variable display result is a big win, there are provided a variation pattern Pt21 in which the performance content is a normal reach jackpot and the variation time is 15 seconds, and a variation pattern Pt22 in which the performance content is a super reach jackpot and the variation time is 30 seconds.

(Command analysis processing)
8-8 and 8-9 are flow charts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step 084IWS205). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 084IWS301). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. The case where the two match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the command reception buffer stores the reception command, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 084IWS302). After reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 084IWS303). The reason for incrementing by 2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 084IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 084IWS305).

If the received production control command is a setting value abnormality error command (step 084IWS306), the production control CPU 120 executes setting value abnormality error notification (step 084IWS307). For example, the performance control CPU 120 performs control such as displaying characters such as ``a setting value abnormality error has occurred'' on the image display device 5, outputting a sound indicating the setting value abnormality error and an error sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and causing a game effect lamp 9 and an LED to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when announcing the set value abnormality error, it is desirable to output a sound with a maximum volume or an error sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or to emit light from the game effect lamp 9 or LED at maximum brightness (for example, in the case of a full-color LED, emit white light).

If the received effect control command is a command for restoration (step 084IWS308), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display a restoration screen on the image display device 5 (step 084IWS309). For example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display characters such as "Restoring" or to display an initial result (for example, a combination of "123" symbols).

If the received effect control command is an initialization designation command (step 084IWS310), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display the initial screen on the image display device 5 (step 084IWS311). For example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the logo of the gaming machine maker, or to display the initial outcome (for example, a combination of symbols “123”). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 sets an initialization flag indicating that the initialization process (RAM clearing process) has been executed (step 084IWS312).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (effect control command specifying a variation pattern) (step 084IWS320), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 084IWS321). Then, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step 084IWS322).

If the received performance control command is a display result designation command (a performance control command for designating whether or not to be a big hit and the type of big win) (step 084IWS323), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 084IWS324).

If the received effect control command is a pattern confirmation designation command (a effect control command designating the fixed display of the stop pattern of the decoration pattern) (step 084IWS325), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag (step 084IWS326).

If the received production control command is a jackpot start designation command (production control command designating the start of a jackpot game) (step 084IWS327), the production control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 084IWS328).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (effect control command for designating the end of the jackpot game) (step 084IWS329), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 084IWS330).

If the received effect control command is a general winning hole winning designation command (a effect control command designating the winning of the game ball to the general winning hole 10) (step 084IWS340), the effect control CPU 120 sets a general winning hole winning designation command reception flag indicating that the general winning hole winning designation command has been received (step 084IWS341).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 084IWS331). Then, the process proceeds to step 084 IWS301.

FIG. 8-10 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing in the characteristic portion 084IW. In the production control process shown in FIG. 8-10, the production control CPU 120 performs a special live production in-progress process regarding the special live production after step S161 (step 084IWS800), and proceeds to steps S170 to S177.

The effect control CPU 120 in the characterizing portion 084IW can execute a special live effect for each specific period (specifically, every 100 times of variation). The special live performance is composed of an explanation performance for explaining the special live performance, a live performance for outputting music from speakers 8L and 8R and displaying a singing character on an image display device 5, and a gacha performance for displaying an image of a card coming out of a capsule on the image display device 5.例文帳に追加That is, in the special live performance, the explanation performance is performed first, then the live performance is performed, and finally the gacha performance is performed.

Hereinafter, the execution period of the special live performance is sometimes called "special live performance period", the execution period of the explanation performance is called "description performance period", the execution period of the live performance is called "live performance period", and the execution period of the gacha performance is sometimes called "gacha performance period". The explanation effect period, the live effect period, and the gacha effect period are all included in the special live effect period.

A plurality of types of display modes (hereinafter sometimes referred to as card modes) of cards displayed in the gacha effect are provided, and set values are suggested by the display modes of the displayed cards. Specifically, as card modes, there are provided first to third modes in which the number of star marks is different, and the reliability of setting values that are advantageous to the player is third mode>second mode>first mode (see FIG. 8-17(B)). The first mode is a mode with one star mark, the second mode is a mode with two star marks, and the third mode is a mode with three star marks.

A plurality of types of display modes (hereinafter sometimes referred to as capsule modes) are provided for the capsules displayed in the gacha effect, and the selection ratio of the card display mode differs depending on the display modes of the displayed capsules. Specifically, blue, green, and red, which are different display colors, are provided as capsule modes, and when blue, the first mode is likely to be selected as the card mode, when green, the second mode is likely to be selected, and when red, the third mode is likely to be selected as the card mode (see FIG. 8-17 (B)).

The capsule mode is determined based on the winning number of game balls into the general winning hole 10 in the live performance. Specifically, when the number of winning game balls into the general winning opening 10 in the live performance is 0 to 3, green is determined when the number is 4 to 6, and when 7 or more, red is determined as the capsule mode (see FIG. 8-17 (A)).

The explanation performance is a performance including reproduction of the explanation performance animation for 10 seconds, the live performance is a performance including the reproduction of the live performance animation for 90 seconds, and the gacha performance is a performance including the reproduction of the gacha performance animation for 20 seconds.

Also, the explanation effect, the live effect, and the gacha effect are effects that are started along with the start of the variation. In other words, even when the reproduction of the explanation effect moving image is finished, the end image of the explanation effect motion is continuously displayed when the explanation effect moving image is being changed or not changed, and the live effect is started when the next change is started. Similarly, even when the reproduction of the moving image of the live performance is finished, the end image of the live performance operation is continuously displayed when the live performance moving image is fluctuating or not fluctuating, and the gacha performance is started when the next fluctuation is started. Further, even when the reproduction of the gacha effect moving image is finished, if the gacha effect moving image is fluctuating or not fluctuating, the end image of the gacha effect operation is continuously displayed until the next fluctuation is started.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 in the characteristic portion 084IW displays an icon each time it detects the winning of the game ball into the general winning hole 10 during the live effect. A plurality of types of icon display modes (hereinafter sometimes referred to as icon modes) are provided, and the setting values are suggested by the displayed icon display modes. More specifically, a normal mode and a special mode are provided as icon modes, and the reliability of the set value being advantageous to the player is special mode>normal mode (see FIG. 8-12).

It should be noted that, up to this point, the description has been made on the assumption that all variations during the special live performance are lost, but the control is different when the big hit variation is included during the execution of the special live performance. For example, when the big win variation is started during the explanation performance, the reproduction of the explanation performance animation is interrupted, and after performing the variation performance corresponding to the big win variation, the game is controlled to the big win game state. In addition, when the big win variation is started during the live performance, the premier live performance as a special big win variation performance which is not normally executed is performed as the variable performance, and then the big win game state is controlled. In addition, when the big win variation is started during the gacha performance, the premium gacha performance as a special big win variation performance which is not usually executed is performed as the variable performance, and then the big win game state is controlled. In addition, when the big-hit pending memory corresponding to the big-hit variation is stored, the special live performance is not started.

FIG. 8-11 is a flowchart showing processing during special live performance. In the processing during the special live effect, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first live flag indicating that the explanation effect moving image is being reproduced is set (step 084IWS820), and if it is set, determines whether or not it is time to end the reproduction of the explanation effect image (step 084IWS821). Specifically, a timer is set to 10 seconds at the timing of starting the display of the explanation effect moving image (see step 084IWS422), and when the timer times out, it is determined that it is time to end the reproduction of the explanation effect moving image.

When it is time to end the reproduction of the explanation effect moving image, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first live flag (step 084IWS822), continuously displays the end image of the explanation effect moving image on the image display device 5 (step 084IWS823), and sets the first scheduled end flag indicating that the explanation effect is scheduled to end (step 084IWS824).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second live flag indicating that the live effect moving image is being reproduced is set (step 084IWS825), and if it is set, determines whether or not the general winning opening winning prize designation command reception flag is set (step 084IWS826). If it is set, an icon display mode determination lottery is performed to determine the icon mode (step 084IWS827). Specifically, the icon display mode determination lottery table shown in FIGS. 8-12 is used to determine the icon mode.

FIG. 8-12 is an explanatory diagram showing an icon display mode determination lottery table. In the icon display mode determination lottery table shown in FIG. 8-12, a determination value is assigned to each icon mode (normal mode, special mode) for each setting value (“1” to “6”).

For example, when the set value is "1", the normal mode is selected at a rate of 65% and the special mode at a rate of 35% as the icon mode. When the set value is "2", the normal mode is selected at a rate of 60% and the special mode at a rate of 40% as the icon mode. When the set value is "3", the normal mode is selected at a rate of 55% and the special mode at a rate of 45% as the icon mode. When the set value is "4", the normal mode is selected at a rate of 45% and the special mode at a rate of 55% as the icon mode. When the set value is "5", the normal mode is selected at a rate of 40% and the special mode at a rate of 60% as the icon mode. When the set value is "6", the normal mode is selected at a rate of 35% and the special mode at a rate of 65% as the icon mode.

In this way, the special mode is a mode suggesting that a set value that is advantageous to the player is set, and the normal mode is a mode that suggests that a set value that is disadvantageous to the player is set. Further, the normal mode and the special mode provided as icon modes are configured to be selectable regardless of which set value is set. That is, there is no conclusive indication of any setting or none.

After step 084IWS827, the determined icons are displayed (step 084IWS828), 1 is added to the number of displayed icons (step 084IWS829), and it is determined whether or not it is time to end the reproduction of the live effect moving image (step 084IWS830). Specifically, a timer is set to 90 seconds at the display start timing of the live effect moving image (see step 084IWS443), and when the timer times out, it is determined that it is time to end the reproduction of the live effect moving image. The number of displayed icons is set to 0 (not shown) when the special live effect is started, and is incremented by 1 each time an icon is displayed.

When it is time to end the reproduction of the live performance moving image, the second live flag is reset (step 084IWS831), the end image of the live performance moving image is continuously displayed on the image display device 5 (step 084IWS832), and the second scheduled end flag indicating that the live performance is scheduled to end is set (step 084IWS833).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a third live flag indicating that the gacha effect moving image is being reproduced is set (step 084IWS834), and if set, determines whether or not it is time to end the reproduction of the gacha effect moving image (step 084IWS835). Specifically, a timer is set to 20 seconds at the timing to start displaying the gacha effect moving image (see step 084IWS450), and when the timer times out, it is determined that it is time to end the reproduction of the gacha effect moving image.

When it is time to end the reproduction of the gacha effect moving image, the third live flag is reset (step 084IWS836), the end image of the gacha effect moving image is continuously displayed on the image display device 5 (step 084IWS837), and the third end schedule flag indicating that the gacha effect is scheduled to end is set (step 084IWS838).

(variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 8-13 is a flow chart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 084IWS111). The variation pattern command reception flag is a flag that is set when a variation pattern command is received, for example, in the command analysis process (step S75). If the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is not set, it is checked whether any of the live flags (first live flag to third live flag) or scheduled end flags (first scheduled end flag to third scheduled end flag) is set (step 084 IWS 150). If either the live flag or the scheduled end flag is set, the variable display start waiting process is ended. If any of the live flags or scheduled end flags is not set, processing relating to the display of the menu screen (steps 084IWS121 to S134) is performed.

Here, the menu screen in the characteristic portion 084IW will be described. The menu screen is displayed when a menu display operation is accepted in the customer waiting state. This menu screen includes a plurality of menu items, and by selecting one of the menu items according to the player's operation, the display is switched to the screen corresponding to the selected menu item. Menu items include "volume/light intensity setting", "custom", "jackpot probability confirmation", "setting suggestion history", "setting suggestion history deletion", and "end" (see FIG. 8-22 (3)). On the menu screen, the cursor is moved and displayed based on the operation of the stick controller 31A or the cross key (an operation member provided at a position operable by the player; not shown), and the menu item corresponding to the cursor is selected based on the operation of the push button 31B.

When the "volume/light amount setting" is selected, the sound volume/light amount setting state in which the sound volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light amount of the display screen of the image display device 5 can be set according to the player's operation is established.

When "custom" is selected, a custom state is entered in which the execution frequency of the effect, the effect mode, etc. can be set according to the player's operation.

When "confirmation of jackpot probability" is selected, it becomes a jackpot probability confirmation state in which the measured value of the jackpot probability for each game state is displayed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 measures the number of fluctuations and the number of big wins for each game state after the power is turned on, and divides the measured number of big wins by the number of fluctuations to calculate the measured value of the probability of big wins. The number of big wins may or may not include a type of big win that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a big win in which prize balls cannot be substantially expected, such as a sudden variable probability big win). Further, in the jackpot probability confirmation state, the actual value of the calculated jackpot probability itself may be displayed, or an image indicating the actual value may be displayed. For example, a character may be displayed and the measured value may be suggested by the color or movement of the character. Moreover, the actual value of the jackpot probability is not limited to that calculated by the effect control CPU 120, and may be calculated by the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. Thus, by displaying the measured value of the big hit probability, the player can predict which set value is set. In particular, the higher the frequency of big wins, the easier it is for the measured value of the big win probability to converge to the theoretical value (jackpot probability corresponding to the set value), so that the set value can be predicted with higher accuracy in a high probability state than in a low probability state.

When the "setting suggestion history" is selected, it becomes a setting suggestion history state in which the execution history of the eye-catching effect of the setting suggestion mode is displayed. Specifically, based on the setting suggestion history information stored in the setting suggestion history storage area, which will be described later, the execution history of the eye-catching effect of the setting suggestion mode is displayed (see FIG. 8-22 (4)). This allows the player to predict which set value is set.

When "delete setting suggestion history" is selected, a setting suggestion history deletion state is entered in which information stored in the setting suggestion history storage area can be deleted.

When "end" is selected, the display of the menu screen ends, and the normal screen (the screen in which the decoration pattern is stopped) is displayed.

As a process for displaying the menu screen, the effect control CPU 120 first starts displaying the menu screen when receiving a menu display operation (an operation to press the push button 31B) (Y in step 084IWS121, S122).

Although illustration is omitted, the menu display operation is effective only in the customer waiting state in which the player is not performing any operation. Specifically, at the timing when 20 seconds have passed since the last variation ended (for example, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command indicating that the variation has ended when the variation ends, and when 20 seconds have passed without starting a new variation after the production control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demonstration designation command), an operation promotion image (an image indicating that a menu screen is displayed by performing a pressing operation on the push button 31B) is displayed, and the operation promotion image is displayed. The processing of step 084 IWS121 is performed only with the detection of the menu display operation enabled.

The customer waiting state (a state corresponding to a non-playing state) may be, for example, a state in which no change is performed and there is no hold display, a state in which a game ball is not fired, a state in which an out ball is not detected, a state in which a touch sensor for detecting the player's contact with the batting operation handle 30 does not detect, or a state in which an infrared sensor or the like detects that the player is not in front of the gaming machine continues for a predetermined period of time. Further, by validating the menu display operation only in the customer waiting state, steps 084IWS122 to S134 relating to the menu are also processed in the customer waiting state.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 receives an operation to select the menu item "history of setting suggestion" (an operation of pressing the push button 31B while the cursor is placed on the menu item "history of setting suggestion"), it starts displaying the history of setting suggestion (Y in step 084 IWS 123, S124). Specifically, the display corresponding to the oldest information among the setting suggestion history information stored in the setting suggestion history storage area (the display indicating the presentation mode of the executed eye-catching presentation and the information indicating the time when the eye-catching presentation was executed) is displayed.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a setting suggestion history switching operation (right/left instruction operation to the stick controller 31A or the cross key (not shown) while the setting suggestion history is being displayed), it switches the setting suggestion history display (Y in step 084IWS125, S126). As described above, in step 084IWS124, display corresponding to the oldest setting suggestion history information stored in the setting suggestion history storage area is performed. However, by receiving an operation to switch the setting suggestion history, display corresponding to other setting suggestion history information different from the oldest information (display indicating executed eye-catching effect mode and information indicating executed time) is performed. That is, when the setting suggestion history is displayed, first, by selecting the menu item "setting suggestion history" from the menu screen, the display corresponding to the oldest setting suggestion history information is performed, and then, by receiving the switching operation of the setting suggestion history, the display corresponding to other setting suggestion history information is performed, and by repeatedly receiving the switching operation of the setting suggestion history, the setting suggestion history information to be displayed is switched.

When an operation of tilting the stick controller 31A to the left or an operation of pressing the cross key to the left is received, the display is switched to one corresponding to the previous setting suggestion history information. Further, when an operation of tilting the stick controller 31A to the left or an operation of pressing the cross key to the left is received while the display corresponding to the oldest setting suggestion history information is being performed, the display is switched to the display corresponding to the most recent setting suggestion history information.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives an operation for ending the setting suggestion history (an operation for returning to the menu screen; specifically, an operation for pressing the push button 31B while the setting suggestion history is being displayed), the setting suggestion history menu item is ended by ending the setting suggestion history display, and the menu screen display is started again (Y in step 084 IWS 127, S128).

Further, when 3 minutes have passed since the last operation, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the screen display related to the menu (all the displays related to the menu such as the display of the menu screen and the display of setting suggestion history) and displays the normal screen (the screen in which the decoration pattern is stopped) (Y, S130 of step 084IWS129). Specifically, when an operation on the push button 31B, stick controller 31A, or cross key (not shown) is detected, a timer is set to a value corresponding to 3 minutes and started, and when the timer times out without detecting any other operation, it is possible to determine that 3 minutes have passed since the last operation.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives an operation to delete the setting suggestion history, that is, an operation to select the menu item "delete setting suggestion history" (an operation to press the push button 31B while the cursor is placed on the "delete setting suggestion history" menu item), it deletes all the setting suggestion history information stored in the setting suggestion history storage area (Y in step 084 IWS 131, S132).

Also, when receiving another operation, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process corresponding to the received operation (Y in step 084IWS133, S134). For example, when an operation of selecting menu items such as ``volume/light quantity setting'', ``custom'', ``confirmation of jackpot probability'', or ``finish'' or an operation in the state after selecting these menu items is accepted, processing according to the operation is performed.

In step 084IWS111, if the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the variation pattern command reception flag (step 084IWS112), and if it is displayed, the display related to the menu (menu screen display, setting suggestion history display, etc., all display related to the menu) is ended (step 084IWS120). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "1" corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 084IWS113).

(Variable display start setting process)
8-14 to 8-16 are flowcharts showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 084IWS401). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the fluctuation number counter is 0 (step 084IWS420). The variation number counter is a counter indicating the number of remaining variations until the special live performance is executed, specifically, the counter is set to 100 when the power is turned on, decremented by 1 each time the variation is performed (at the end of variation), and set to 100 again when it reaches 0.

When the value of the fluctuation number counter is 0, the effect control CPU 120 sets 100 to the fluctuation number counter (step 084IWS424). Then, when the jackpot pending memory is stored, or when the variation to be started is the jackpot variation (Y of step 084IWS421, Y of S421A), the process proceeds to step 084IWS402. As a result, even when the variation is performed 100 times, the special live performance is not started when the big win holding memory is stored or when the variation to be started is the big win variation.

Also, when the big hit pending memory is not stored and the variation to be started is the loss variation, the reproduction of the explanation effect moving image is started (step 084IWS422). Note that the explanation effect moving image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 excluding the small pattern display area. That is, during the display of the explanation effect image, the start and stop of the variation of the special symbols are notified by the small symbols.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first live flag (step 084IWS423) and proceeds to step 084IWS415.

When the value of the variation counter is not 0 at step 084IWS420, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation to be started is a big hit variation (step 084IWS425). If the first live flag is set (Y in step 084IWS440) in the case of deviation fluctuation, the process proceeds to step 084IWS415. If the first end schedule flag is set, the first end schedule flag is reset (Y in step 084IWS441, S442), and the reproduction of the live effect moving image is started (step 084IWS443). It should be noted that the live performance moving image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 excluding the small pattern display area. That is, during the display of the live effect image, the start and stop of the variation of the special symbols are notified by the small symbols.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the second live flag (step 084IWS444), and proceeds to step 084IWS415.

If the first scheduled end flag is not set at step 084IWS441 and the second live flag is set (Y at step 084IWS445), the process proceeds to step 084IWS415. If the second end schedule flag is set, the second end schedule flag is reset (Y in step 084IWS446, S447), and the capsule mode determining process for determining the capsule mode is performed (step 084IWS448). Specifically, the capsule mode is determined using the capsule mode determining table shown in FIG. 8-17(A).

FIG. 8-17(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a capsule mode determination table. In the capsule mode determination table shown in FIG. 8-17(A), the capsule mode (blue, green, red) is associated with each icon display number (the number of winning game balls into the general winning hole 10).

For example, when the number of displayed icons is 0 to 3, "blue" is determined as the capsule mode, when the number of displayed icons is 4 to 6, "green" is determined as the capsule mode, and when the number of displayed icons is 7 or more, "red" is determined as the capsule mode.

After step 084IWS448, a card mode determination lottery process for determining the card mode is performed (step 084IWS449). Specifically, the card mode is determined using the card mode determination lottery table shown in FIG. 8-17(B).

FIG. 8-17(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a card mode determination lottery table. In the card mode determination lottery table shown in FIG. 8-17(B), determination values for card modes (first mode to third mode) are assigned to each capsule mode (blue, green, and red) and each set value.

First, the case where the capsule mode is "blue" will be described.

If the set value is "1", the first mode is selected as the card mode at a rate of 82%, and the second mode is selected at a rate of 18%. If the set value is "2", the first mode is selected as the card mode at a rate of 72%, and the second mode is selected at a rate of 28%.

If the set value is "3", the first mode is selected as the card mode at a rate of 36%, the second mode is selected at a rate of 45%, and the third mode is selected at a rate of 19%. If the set value is "4", the first mode is selected as the card mode at a rate of 22%, the second mode is selected at a rate of 49%, and the third mode is selected at a rate of 29%.

If the set value is "5", the card mode is selected 22% of the time in the first mode, 34% of the time in the second mode, and 44% in the third mode. If the set value is "6", the first mode is selected as the card mode at a rate of 12%, the second mode is selected at a rate of 35%, and the third mode is selected at a rate of 53%.

Next, a case where the capsule mode is "green" will be described.

If the set value is "1", the first mode is selected as the card mode at a rate of 78%, and the second mode is selected at a rate of 22%. If the set value is "2", the first mode is selected as the card mode 68% of the time, and the second mode is selected 32% of the time.

If the set value is "3", the card mode is selected 30% of the time in the first mode, 50% of the time in the second mode, and 20% in the third mode. If the set value is "4", the first mode is selected as the card mode at a rate of 20%, the second mode at a rate of 50%, and the third mode at a rate of 30%.

If the set value is "5", the first mode is selected 20% of the time, the second mode is selected 35% of the time, and the third mode is selected 45% of the time as the card mode. If the set value is "6", the first mode is selected as the card mode at a rate of 9%, the second mode is selected at a rate of 37%, and the third mode is selected at a rate of 54%.

Finally, a case where the capsule mode is "red" will be described.

If the set value is "1", the first mode is selected as the card mode at a rate of 80%, and the second mode is selected at a rate of 20%. If the set value is "2", the first mode is selected as the card mode at a rate of 70%, and the second mode is selected at a rate of 30%.

If the set value is "3", the first mode is selected 33% of the time, the second mode is selected 45% of the time, and the third mode is selected 22% of the time as the card mode. If the set value is "4", the first mode is selected as the card mode at a rate of 19%, the second mode is selected at a rate of 49%, and the third mode is selected at a rate of 32%.

If the set value is "5", the first mode is selected as the card mode at a rate of 19%, the second mode is selected at a rate of 33%, and the third mode is selected at a rate of 48%. If the set value is "6", the first mode is selected as the card mode at a rate of 9%, the second mode is selected at a rate of 34%, and the third mode is selected at a rate of 57%.

As a result, each card mode and each capsule mode will have the characteristics shown in FIG. 8-17(C). FIG. 8-17(C) is a property table showing the properties of the card mode and the capsule mode.

For example, in the first mode as the card mode, the selection rate when the setting value is "1" or "2" is higher than the selection rate when the setting value is "3" to "6", and the selection rate when the setting value is an odd number is higher than the selection rate when the setting value is an even number. selectivity when the set value is "5" > selectivity when the set value is "6"), suggesting low set values ("1", "2") and suggesting odd set values ("1", "3", "5").

Further, for example, in the second mode as the card mode, the selection rate when the set value is "3" or "4" is higher than the selection rate when the set value is "1", "2", "5", or "6", and the selection rate when the set value is an even number is higher than the selection rate when the set value is an odd number (selection rate when the set value is "2">selection rate when the set value is "1", selection rate when the set value is "4"). > selectivity when the set value is "3", selectivity when the set value is "6" > selectivity when the set value is "5"), suggesting medium set values ("3", "4") and suggesting even set values ("2", "4", "6").

Further, for example, in the third mode as the card mode, the selection rate when the setting value is "5" or "6" is higher than the selection rate when the setting value is "1" to "4", the selection rate when the setting value is "1" or "2" is 0%, and the selection rate when the setting value is an even number is higher than the selection rate when the setting value is an odd number (selection rate when the setting value is "4">selection when the setting value is "3"). Selectivity when the set value is "6">Selection rate when the set value is "5"), so high set values ("5", "6") are suggested, low set values ("1", "2") are denied, and even set values ("4", "6") are suggested.

Further, for example, “blue” as a capsule mode has a higher selection rate of the first mode than “green” and “red”, “green” as a capsule mode has a higher selection rate of the second mode than “blue” and “red”, and “red” as a capsule mode has a higher selection rate of the third mode than “blue” and “green”. As shown in FIG. 8-17(A), the capsule mode is selected according to the number of displayed icons (the number of winning game balls in the general winning opening 10). Therefore, the higher the number of winning game balls in the general winning opening 10, the higher the selection ratio of the third mode.

After step 084IWS449, reproduction of the gacha effect moving image corresponding to the determined capsule mode and card mode is started (step 084IWS450). The gacha effect moving image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 excluding the small pattern display area. That is, while the gacha effect image is being displayed, the start and stop of the variation of the special symbols are notified by the small symbols.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the third live flag (step 084IWS451), and proceeds to step 084IWS415.

If the second scheduled end flag is not set at step 084IWS446 and the third live flag is set (Y at step 084IWS452), the process proceeds to step 084IWS415. If the third scheduled end flag is set, the third scheduled end flag is reset (Y in step 084IWS453, S454), and the process proceeds to step 084IWS402.

If any live flag is set in step 084IWS425, the performance control CPU 120 stops the reproduction of the animation (description performance animation, live performance animation, or gacha performance animation), resets the set live flag (step 084IWS429), and shifts to step 084IWS415. Thus, when the big win variation is started during the display of the explanation performance moving image, the live performance moving image, or the gacha performance moving image, the reproduction of the displayed moving image is stopped and the big winning variation is performed. At this time, in the big hit variation, a special variation effect that is not normally performed may be performed. For example, a premium image that is normally not displayed may be displayed and a big win notification may be performed (a big win notification sound may be output). Further, for example, when the big win variation is started during the display of the live performance image, a premium live performance using music, background and characters which are not normally displayed may be executed as a variable performance, or when the big win variation is started during the display of the gacha performance image, a premium gacha performance in which a capsule mode or a card mode which is not normally displayed may be executed as a variable performance.

If the first end schedule flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 resets the first end schedule flag (Y in step 084IWS430, S431), and sets execution of a premier live performance (live performance using music, background and characters that are not normally displayed) (step 084IWS432). If execution of a premiere live presentation is set here, a process table corresponding to the premiere live presentation is selected in step 084 IWS 412 to be described later.

If the second end schedule flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 resets the second end schedule flag (Y in step 084IWS433, S434), and sets execution of a premium gacha performance (gacha performance in which a capsule mode or a card mode that is not normally displayed is displayed) (step 084IWS435). If execution of the premium gacha effect is set here, a process table corresponding to the premium gacha effect is selected in step 084IWS412 to be described later.

If the third scheduled end flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the third scheduled end flag (Y in step 084IWS436, S437), and proceeds to step 084IWS402.

At step 084IWS402, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop design) of the decoration pattern according to the variation pattern command read at step 084IWS401 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command) (step 084IWS402). That is, by executing the process of step 084IWS402 by the effect control CPU 120, a display result determining means for determining the display result of the variable display of the identification information (decoration pattern stop pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means is realized. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 084IWS402, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not the game is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the decorative symbols to be stopped based on only the variation pattern command.

In step 084IWS402, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decoration symbols in which three symbols are the same odd number symbols as stop symbols. Further, for example, when the received display result specifying command indicates a normal jackpot (unprobable variable jackpot), the CPU 120 for performance control determines a combination of decoration patterns in which three patterns are the same even-numbered patterns as stop patterns.

Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a sudden variable probability big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols of the sudden variable probability big win. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of "357" symbols as a sudden variable probability big hit symbol.

Also, when the received display result designation command indicates a failure, a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the ready-to-win effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined.

Incidentally, when a pseudo-run is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 also determines, in step 084IWS402, a chance symbol as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-run (for example, a combination of a jackpot symbol that does not become a reach and a symbol shifted by one symbol, such as ``223'' or ``445'').

A performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining a stop pattern, and determines a stop pattern of the decoration pattern by using a stop pattern determination table in which data indicating a combination of the decoration patterns are associated with numerical values. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs an eye-catching effect mode selection lottery for selecting the effect mode of the eye-catching effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "eye-catching effect mode") when super ready-to-win variation occurs (step 084IWS404). Specifically, the eye-catching presentation mode is selected using the eye-catching presentation mode selection lottery table shown in FIG. 8-17(D).

FIG. 8-17(D) is an explanatory diagram showing an eye-catching effect mode selection lottery table. In the eye-catching presentation mode selection lottery table shown in FIG. 8-17(D), determination values for the eye-catching presentation modes are assigned to the currently set set values (set values "1" to "6").

In the present embodiment, during execution of the super ready-to-win effect, the visibility of the decoration pattern is lowered so as not to interfere with the super ready-to-win effect. Therefore, in the case of super ready-to-win fluctuation, after the end of the super ready-to-win effect and the eye-catching effect, the decorative pattern is returned to the normal mode and switched to a screen for display. The eye-catching effect is a effect in which a predetermined image is displayed on the entire display area of the image display device 5 for two seconds. As a plurality of eye-catching performance modes of different display images, a non-setting suggestion mode that does not suggest the set value currently set and a first setting suggestion mode to a fourth setting suggestion mode that suggest the currently set value are provided.

The non-setting suggestion mode is an effect mode in which a small pattern and a filled image are displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 8-21 (4) described later). The first setting suggestion mode is an effect mode in which a small pattern, character A, and a filled image are displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 8-21 (4a), which will be described later). The second setting suggestion mode is an effect mode in which the image display device 5 displays the small pattern, the character B, and the filled image (see FIG. 8-21 (4b), which will be described later). The third setting suggestion mode is an effect mode in which a small pattern, character C, and a filled image are displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 8-21 (4c), which will be described later). The fourth setting suggestion mode is an effect mode in which the image display device 5 displays the small pattern, the character D, and the filled image (see FIG. 8-21 (4d), which will be described later).

For example, when the set value currently set is any one of '1' to '3', the non-set suggestion mode is selected at a rate of 50%, the first set suggestion mode at a rate of 27%, and the second set suggestion mode at a rate of 23% as the eye-catching performance mode.

For example, when the currently set setting value is "4" or "5", the non-setting suggestion mode is selected at a rate of 50%, the first setting suggestion mode is selected at a rate of 20%, the second setting suggestion mode is selected at a rate of 25%, and the third setting suggestion mode is selected at a rate of 5% as eye-catching presentation modes.

For example, when the set value currently set is "6", the non-setting suggestion mode is selected at a rate of 50%, the first setting suggestion mode at a rate of 20%, the second setting suggestion mode at a rate of 24%, the third setting suggestion mode at a rate of 5%, and the fourth setting suggestion mode at a rate of 1%.

Thus, the first suggested setting mode is a presentation mode that is likely to be selected when the currently set value is any one of '1' to '3', and the second suggested setting mode is a presentation mode that is likely to be selected when the currently set value is any one of '4' to '6'. Further, the third setting suggestion mode is a performance mode that can be selected only when the currently set value is one of ``4'' to ``6'', and the fourth setting suggestion mode is a performance mode that can be selected only when the currently set value is ``6''.

Here, it is assumed that the eye-catching effect is always executed when the super reach is lost, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the presence or absence of the eye-catching effect may be determined by a predetermined ratio lottery.

Also, as the production mode of the eye-catching production, the setting suggestion mode that suggests the setting value and the non-setting suggestion mode that does not suggest the setting value are provided, but only the setting suggestion mode may be provided. Moreover, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of non-setting suggestion modes, or to provide a single setting suggestion mode.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets execution of the eye-catching effect of the selected eye-catching effect mode (step 084IWS405), and proceeds to step 084IWS412.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the foretelling performance determined to be executed when the execution of the variation pattern and the foretelling performance (eye-catching performance, premier live performance, premier gacha performance, or other foretelling performance) is determined (step 084IWS412). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 084IWS413).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (parts for effect) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. In addition, the process timer set value is set with a variable time in the mode of variation. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decoration pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Also, the process table is stored in the ROM 121 in the effect control board 12 . Also, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

A process table used for performing performance control for a variation pattern with a ready-to-win performance is set with process data indicating that the left pattern is stop-displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of variation, and the right pattern is stop-displayed when a predetermined time elapses. Instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols may be synthesized and generated in accordance with the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the simulated run or the sliding performance.

Further, when the execution of the eye-catching effect of step 084IWS405 is set, a process table including the eye-catching effect is selected in step 084IWS412, and the process of step 084IWS414 and step 084IWS805 of the effect process during variable display (step S172) are executed according to the selected process table, thereby executing the eye-catching effect.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device (image display device 5 as a component for effect, various lamps as components for effect, and speakers 8L and 8R as components for effect) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 084IWS414).

In this characteristic part 084IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls to variably display the decoration pattern by the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command one-to-one, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern command.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 084IWS415). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 084IWS416), and terminates the variable display start setting process.

In addition, although not shown, the effect control CPU 120 performs, immediately before step 084IWS412 (after step 084IWS405 or when N in step 084IWS403), an advance notice effect setting process (for determining whether or not to execute each notice effect) for suggesting whether or not a big hit is to be achieved based on the variation to be started (for example, dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, mini character notice effect, group notice effect). A lottery is performed and settings are made according to the lottery result). During the execution of the special live performance (unless the variation of the big hit is started), the setting processing of the notice performance is not performed, that is, the execution of the notice performance is restricted during the execution of the special live performance.

FIG. 8-18 is a flow chart showing the effect processing during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not any of the live flags or scheduled end flags is set (step 084IWS500), and if set, proceeds to step 084IWS802.

If neither the live flag nor the scheduled end flag is set, the value of the process timer is decremented by 1 (step 084IWS801), and the value of the variable time timer is decremented by 1 (step 084IWS802). When the process timer times out (step 084IWS803), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 084IWS804). Also, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data which are set next (step 084IWS805).

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the eye-catching effect of the setting suggestion mode is executed (step 084IWS806), and if executed, stores the setting suggestion history information (the effect mode of the executed eye-catching effect and current time information) in the setting suggestion history storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step 084IWS807). As shown in FIG. 8-19, the setting suggestion history storage area is configured to be able to store, as setting suggestion history information, the effect mode of the executed eye-catching effect and the time information when the eye-catching effect was executed in association with each other. Also, the setting suggestion history storage area is initialized in the above-described initialization process (step S71). That is, the setting suggestion history storage area stores setting suggestion history information from when the power is turned on until when the power is turned off.

Note that the timing for storing the setting suggestion history information is not limited to the execution of the eye-catching effect. For example, the presentation mode of the eye-catching presentation scheduled to be executed may be stored at the timing of determining the presentation mode of the eye-catching presentation (at the start of variation in the present embodiment). Also, the time information may not necessarily be stored, and only the effect mode of the executed eye-catching effect may be stored. Further, setting suggestion history information may be stored and displayed as a setting suggestion history even when an eye-catching effect in the non-setting suggestion mode is executed.

Then, if the variable time timer has timed out (step 084IWS808), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 084IWS809).

FIG. 8-20 is a flow chart showing the special figure per waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special figure hit waiting process, first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed is set (step 084IWS8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step 084IWS8305. In this embodiment, when a jackpot design is displayed as a stop design of the decoration design, a stop design display flag is set at step 084IWS8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop pattern display flag is set means that the big win pattern is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, so the processing for displaying the stop pattern of the decoration pattern in step 084IWS8302 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step 084IWS8305.

If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (loss symbol, jackpot symbol) (step 084IWS8302).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the fluctuation number counter (step 084IWS8302A).

After that, when the CPU 120 for effect control does not display the jackpot symbol in the processing of step 084IWS8302 (that is, when the losing symbol is displayed) (N in step 084IWS8303), the CPU 120 for effect control moves to step 084IWS8311.

When the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed in the process of step 084IWS8302 (Y in step 084IWS8303), the effect control CPU 120 sets a stop pattern display flag (step 084IWS8304), and confirms whether or not a jackpot start designation command reception flag indicating that a jackpot start designation command has been received is set (step 084IWS8305). When the jackpot start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag (step 084IWS8306).

After that, a process table corresponding to the effect before the start of the big hit is selected (step 084IWS8321). Then, the process timer is started by setting the process timer setting value in the process timer (step 084IWS8322), and the control of the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, various lamps as the production component, the speakers 8L and 8R as the production component, and the movable body 32 as the production component) is executed according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data 1) (step 084IWS83). 23). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S176) during the big hit (step 084IWS8324).

When it is determined not to be a big hit (N of step 084IWS8303), the effect control CPU 120 resets a predetermined flag (step 084IWS8311). For example, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag and the second symbol variation designation command reception flag. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process and the fourth symbol process. However, for example, the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both the performance control process and the fourth symbol process, so as shown in this embodiment, it is desirable to reset in the special symbol per waiting process or the like at the end of the variation, or in the big hit end performance process at the end of the big hit. Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 084IWS8312).

Display examples of the image display device 5 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-21 to 8-23. FIG. 8-21 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of an eye-catching effect. For example, in the variation that results in super reach, the left and right patterns are set to the same pattern (here, "7") to generate reach (see FIG. 8-21 (1)), and the super reach effect is started (see FIG. 8-21 (2)). In this example, an enemy character fights with an ally character, and if the ally character wins, a big hit is won, and if the ally character loses, a super ready-to-win effect is performed. When super reach occurs, the decorative pattern is erased. If the ally character is defeated, it is suggested that it will be lost (see FIG. 8-21 (3)), and after two seconds of eye-catching production (see FIG. 8-21 (4)), the decorative pattern is displayed again (see FIG. 8-21 (5)).

FIG. 8-21(4) shows the eye-catching effect of the non-set suggestion mode. If the effect mode is the first setting suggestion mode, the eye-catching effect including the character A is shown in FIG. 8-21(4a). If the second setting suggestion mode is the eye-catching effect including the character B as shown in FIG. As shown in d), an eye-catching presentation including the character D is performed.

FIG. 8-22 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of setting suggestion history. For example, when the change ends (see FIG. 8-22 (1)) and a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has passed, an operation prompting image (an image indicating that the menu screen is to be displayed by pressing the push button 31B) is displayed (see FIG. 8-22 (2)).

Next, when a menu display operation (an operation to press the push button 31B) is performed (Y in step 084IWS121), display of the menu screen is started (see FIG. 8-22 (3)). Here, a right-pointing triangular cursor points to the menu item.

Then, when an operation to select the menu item "history of setting suggestion" (an operation of pressing the push button 31B with the cursor placed on the menu item "history of setting suggestion") is performed (Y in step 084IWS121), display of the history of setting suggestion is started (see FIG. 8-22 (4)). The illustrated example shows that the eye-catching effect of the first setting suggestion mode was performed at 10:38. Also, "1/36" is displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5, and this number indicates the order of the eye-catching performance of the setting suggestion mode and the number of times the eye-catching performance of the setting suggestion mode is performed. That is, in the illustrated example, it is shown that the eye-catching performance of the setting suggesting mode is performed 36 times after the power is turned on, and the first eye-catching performance of the setting suggesting mode performed at 10:38 is the eye-catching performance of the first setting suggesting mode performed at 10:38.

As described above, when 3 minutes have passed since the last operation, the screen display related to the menu is ended and the normal screen is displayed, that is, the display related to the menu is continuously displayed until 3 minutes have passed since the last operation. As a result, the setting suggestion history can be displayed for a period longer than the execution time of the eye-catching effect, and the player can check the setting suggestion history and take pictures for a long period of time.

Further, when the display example shown in FIG. 8-21 (4a) and the display example shown in FIG. 8-22 (4) are compared, the display screen of the actually executed eye-catching effect of the first setting suggestion effect mode and the display screen of the eye-catching effect of the first setting suggestion effect mode that can be viewed as the setting suggestion history are different in display form (size, pose), but the displayed characters are common. As a result, the player can easily recognize which effect mode of the eye-catching effect has been executed.

FIG. 8-23 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of a special live effect. For example, at the 101st change from the power-on, after performing an effect notifying that a special live effect will be performed, an explanation image (explanation regarding the winning of the game ball into the general winning hole 10 during the live effect) is displayed (Figs. 8-23 (1) and (2)), and after the display of the explanation effect video is finished, the live effect video is displayed (Fig. 8-23 (3)).

An icon is displayed each time a winning of a game ball into a general winning opening is detected during the display of the live effect moving image (Fig. 8-23 (4)). In the illustrated example, three icons are displayed, the first and third icons being normal mode, and the second icon being special mode.

After the display of the live effect moving image is finished, the gacha effect moving image is displayed (FIG. 8-23 (5)). In the illustrated example, a device for ejecting capsules and eight icons are displayed. The second and eighth icons are special modes, and the other icons are normal modes.

In the gacha effect animation, a blue capsule pops out from the device (Fig. 8-23 (6)), eight icons act on the capsule to change the color of the capsule from blue to red (Fig. 8-23 (7)), and a card in the third mode (three star marks) is displayed from the capsule (Fig. 8-23 (8)).

FIG. 8-24 is a timing chart when executing a special live effect. The timing chart shown in FIG. 8-24 shows the control timing of each effect in the special symbol variation and the special live effect. In Figures 8-24, all variations are assumed to be outlier variations.

For example, at timing T1, which is the 101st fluctuation start time after the power is turned on, the special live effect is started, and the display of the explanation effect moving image is started. Then, at timing T2 10 seconds after timing T1, the display of the explanation effect moving image ends. After that, the end image of the explanation effect moving image is continuously displayed until timing T3 when the next special symbol variation is started. During this period, the small symbols are variably/stopped displayed in synchronization with the special symbols.

At the timing T3 at which the first variation starts after the display of the explanation effect moving image ends, the display of the live effect moving image is started. Then, at timing T4, 90 seconds after timing T3, the display of the live effect moving image ends. After that, the end image of the live effect moving image is continuously displayed until timing T5 when the next special symbol variation is started. During this period, the small symbols are variably/stopped displayed in synchronization with the special symbols.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-24, the period from the end of the variation performed at timing T4 to timing T5 is longer than the other variation stopping period, which indicates that the pending memory is not stored. That is, regardless of whether or not the pending memory is stored, the end image of the live effect moving image is continuously displayed until the next variation starts.

If the next variation does not start even after waiting for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), the end image of the live effect moving image may be ended and the display may be switched to a normal deviated image (decorative pattern of the background and the deviated pattern according to the game state). Although the end image of the live performance moving image has been described here as an example, the end image of the explanation effect moving image and the end image of the gacha effect moving image are similarly displayed continuously until the next variation starts regardless of whether or not the pending memory is stored.

The display of the gacha effect moving image is started at the timing T5 when the first variation is started after the display of the live effect moving image is finished. Then, the display of the gacha effect moving image ends at timing T6, which is 20 seconds after timing T5. After that, the end image of the gacha effect moving image is continuously displayed until the timing T7 when the variation of the next special symbol is started. During this period, the small symbols are variably/stopped displayed in synchronization with the special symbols.

As described above, according to this characterizing section 084IW, the gaming machine is capable of executing a game by a player, and a setting means (in this example, a portion for executing step 084IWS042 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (set value "1" to set value "6" in this example) with different degrees of advantage for the player, and a plurality of types of suggestive effects (in this example, a portion that executes step 084IWS042 in the game control microcomputer 100) that suggest settings by the setting means. Then, in the gacha effect, the card image display in any one of the first to third modes (normal mode/special mode icon display, non-setting suggestion mode/first setting suggestion mode to fourth setting suggestion mode eye-catching effect, etc.) can be performed by suggesting effect execution means (in this example, the part of the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 084IWS450), and a specific period (live effect period in this example) before the suggestive effect is executed by the suggestive effect executing means. A specific effect execution means (in this example, a portion that executes step 084IWS443 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (in this example, a live effect), and the suggestive effect execution means executes any one of a plurality of types of suggestive effects at different rates according to the execution status of the game by the player during the specific period A capsule mode is selected according to the winning number of game balls into a general winning hole 10 in a presentation period, a card mode is selected based on the selected capsule mode, and a card image of the selected card mode is displayed. As a result, since the selection ratio of the suggestive effect differs according to the execution status of the game during the specific period, the effect can be varied, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Concretely, in a game machine which performs a suggestive performance after a specific period in which the execution of the suggestive performance is stimulated by executing the specific performance, it is assumed that the player interrupts the shooting of the game ball during the specific period, but in that case, the operation rate is lowered. Therefore, by varying the selection ratio of the suggestive effect according to the game execution status of the player during the specific period, it is possible to encourage the player to actively play the game even during the specific period.

In this characterizing section 084IW, a capsule mode is selected according to the number of winnings of game balls into the general winning opening 10 during the live performance period, a card mode is selected based on the selected capsule mode, and a card image of the selected card mode is displayed.

Although the number of game balls entering the general winning hole 10 is used as the "execution status" here, it is not limited to this. For example, one of a plurality of types of suggestive effects may be executed at different ratios depending on whether or not the game ball enters the general winning hole 10 during the live performance period. In other words, suggestive production means that execution of the gaming by a player during a specific period of gaming or not (for example, the CPU120 for directing control of the General Award 10 in the live production period of the production control period 10 is a prize -winning period of 10. It may be possible to select a capsule form according to whether or one or more, select a card format based on the selected capsule, and display the card image of the selected card format). As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the characteristic part 084IW includes shooting means for shooting game media based on the action of the player (in this example, the hitting operation handle 30) and specific detection means for detecting the game media shot from the shooting means (in this example, a general winning slot switch). 20, by executing steps 084IWS448 to S450, a capsule mode is selected according to the winning number of game balls into the general winning opening 10 during the live performance period, a card mode is selected based on the selected capsule mode, and a card image of the selected card mode is displayed). As a result, it becomes easier to execute the suggestive effect in which the setting value can be easily specified by playing the game, so that it is possible to encourage the player to play the game.

It should be noted that, here, the description has been made using the general winning opening switch as the "specific detection means", but the invention is not limited to this. For example, one of a plurality of suggestive effects may be executed at different ratios according to the number of game media detected by the first starter switch 22A, the second starter switch 22B, the gate switch 21, the count switch 23, a launch sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, or an out sensor for detecting the out ball.

Further, one of the plurality of suggestive effects may be executed at different ratios according to the number of game media detected by the sensors of the plurality of types. For example, one of a plurality of suggestive performances may be executed at different ratios according to the number of game media detected by the general prize winning port switch and the number of game media detected by the out sensor.

In addition, when the number of reserved memories is the upper limit value, even if the first starter switch 22A or the second starter switch 22B detects the game ball after performing the shooting operation of the game ball, the reserved memory is not stored (because of so-called over-winning), so it is assumed that the player interrupts the shooting of the game ball. Therefore, when the number of reserved memories is the upper limit value and the game ball is detected by the first start switch 22A or the second start switch 22B (when over winning occurs), the situation may be advantageous to the player. Specifically, when the first start switch 22A or the second start switch 22B detects a game ball when the number of reserved memories is the upper limit value, the suggestive effect that makes it easy to specify the set value is executed at a higher rate (the third mode can be easily selected as the card mode). Similarly, even when other detection means such as an out-sensor detects a game ball when the number of pending memories is the upper limit value, it is also possible to execute a suggestive effect that makes it easy to specify the set value at a higher rate.

In addition, as the effect pattern of the special live effect, a plurality of patterns with different sensors for measuring the execution status of the game are provided (for example, a first pattern in which the card mode is determined based on the number of winning game balls into the general winning port 10, a second pattern in which the card mode is determined based on the number of game media detected by the out sensor, and a third pattern in which the card mode is determined based on the number of game media detected by the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B). Any pattern may be selected to perform a special live effect. For example, the effect patterns may be selected in a predetermined order, or the effect patterns may be selected by lottery. As a result, it is possible to provide a variety of special live performances, and to improve interest.

Further, when the effect pattern is selected by lottery, the selection ratio may vary depending on the set value. For example, the first pattern may be easily selected when advantageous setting values are set for the player, and the second pattern may be easily selected when unfavorable setting values are set for the player. As a result, the set value can be suggested by the effect pattern of the special live effect, and the interest can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 084IW, the suggestive effect executing means can execute, as suggestive effects, a first suggestive effect (display of card images of the first and second modes in this example) and a second suggestive effect (in this example, display of a card image of a third mode in which the set value is denied that the set value is "1" or "2"). Compared to the case where the number of detected game media is small, the second suggestion effect can be executed at a high rate (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 084IWS448 to S450, so that when the number of game balls entering the general winning hole 10 during the live effect period is large, it is easier to select the “red” capsule mode than when the number is small, and when the “red” capsule mode is selected, the “blue” or “green” capsule mode is selected. It was decided that the third mode is more likely to be selected than when the third mode is selected). As a result, it becomes easier to execute the suggestive effect in which the set value can be easily specified by performing the action, so that the action of the player can be encouraged.

In addition, the characteristic part 084IW includes special display means (in this example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 084IWS828) capable of displaying a special display (icon display in this example) corresponding to the number of game media detected by the specific detection means. In this case, the second suggestive effect can be executed (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 may select the third mode as the card mode when the number of icons displayed during the live effect period is 7 or more by executing steps 084IWS448 to S450). As a result, interest in the game can be improved by drawing attention to the number of special displays displayed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 084IW, one icon is additionally displayed each time a game ball wins into the general winning hole 10, but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, for example, one icon may be displayed each time a game ball enters the general winning hole 10 three times.

Further, for example, one icon may be additionally displayed based on the out-sensor detecting passage of game balls 10 times (detecting 10 out-balls).

Alternatively, icons corresponding to the number of game media detected by multiple types of sensors may be displayed. For example, one icon may be displayed each time a game ball enters the general winning hole 10, and one icon may be displayed based on the out sensor detecting the passage of the game ball ten times (detecting ten out balls). In that case, the display mode of the icon displayed based on the winning of the game ball into the general winning hole 10 and the icon displayed based on the out-sensor detecting the passing of the game ball 10 times may be the same or different.

In addition, if a plurality of types of display modes (for example, a special mode and a normal mode) can be selected as the display mode of the icon, the display mode may be selected at a different rate between when the icon is displayed based on the winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 10 and when the icon is displayed based on the out sensor detecting the passage of the game ball 10 times. For example, when a game ball enters the general prize winning port 10, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, but when the out sensor detects the passage of the game ball, none of the prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when the icon is displayed based on the out sensor detecting the passage of the game ball 10 times, the special mode may be more easily selected than when the icon is displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 10.例文帳に追加Conversely, when the icon is displayed based on the winning of the game ball into the general winning hole 10, the special mode may be more easily selected than when the icon is displayed based on the out-sensor detecting the passage of the game ball 10 times.

In addition, in this characteristic part 084IW, the capsule mode and the card mode are determined according to the number of icon displays, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the capsule mode and the card mode may be determined based on the display mode (normal mode, special mode) of the displayed icons. For example, the capsule mode may be determined based on the total value of the number of displayed icons and the number of displayed special mode icons. If the total number is any of 0 to 5, blue is selected, if the total number is any of 6 to 10, green is selected, and if 11 or more, red is selected as the capsule mode.

Also, the capsule mode may be selected by lottery. For example, the capsule mode may be selected according to a selection ratio based on the number of displayed icons. For example, if the number of displayed icons is 0 to 3, the selection ratio of the capsule mode is blue>green and red; if the number of displayed icons is 4 to 6, the selection ratio of the capsule mode is green>blue and red;

In addition, the characteristic part 084IW is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling an advantageous state (in this example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and is capable of executing a predetermined effect (in this example, a special live effect) during a predetermined period (in this example, a special live effect period) including a specific period. A part for executing a series of special live effects including effects, live effects, and gacha effects), and the predetermined effect execution means can execute a predetermined effect based on a predetermined number of times of variable display (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute S442 when Y in step 084IWS420). As a result, the specific effect is periodically performed each time the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times, so that the game can be promoted.

Further, in this characteristic portion 084IW, a special live effect as a "predetermined effect" is configured to be executable each time a change is performed a predetermined number of times (100 times). Thus, in the period immediately before the execution timing of the special live performance, the player can be made to think to continue the game until the special live performance is performed and the set value is suggested, and the player can be urged to actively play the game.

Further, while the special live effect is not being executed, a notification effect may be performed to notify the execution timing of the next special live effect. For example, if the configuration is such that the special live performance can be executed every time the variation is performed a predetermined number of times, the number of remaining fluctuations until the special live performance is executed may be indicated as ``the special live performance will start in the remaining 10 times.'' As a result, the player can clearly recognize the execution timing of the special live effect, and can be encouraged to play more aggressively.

Also, in the characteristic part 084IW, the special live effect can be executed every time the change is performed 100 times, but the trigger for executing the special live effect is not limited to this. For example, a real-time clock that has a function of outputting time information including year/month/day/day of the week and hour/minute/second information and that operates with an independent power source (for example, a button battery) may be installed, and a special live performance can be executed when the real-time clock indicates a specific date and time. Further, if the execution timing of the special live performance in a plurality of game machines is set to be a common time (the real-time clock indicates a specific time), the special live performance can be performed as simultaneous performance in the plurality of game machines. Also, a special live effect may be performed when a specific timer provided inside the effect control CPU 120 times out.

Also, the execution timing of the special live effect may be determined by lottery. For example, the number of fluctuations (specifically, the value set in the fluctuation number counter in step 084IWS424) until the next special live effect is executed may be determined by lottery. For example, 10 times, 50 times, and 100 times are provided as the number of fluctuations until the next special live effect is executed, and any number of times may be selected by lottery. In that case, the selection ratio of the number of fluctuations until the execution of the next special live effect may differ based on the set value. As a result, it is possible to suggest a setting value according to the execution frequency of the special live presentation, and to improve interest.

For example, if the set value is more advantageous to the player, 10 times is likely to be selected as the number of times of variation until the next special live performance is executed, and if the set value is more disadvantageous to the player, 100 times is more likely to be selected as the number of times of variation until the next special live performance is executed. Conversely, if the set value is more advantageous to the player, the number of times of variation until the next special live performance is executed is more likely to be 100, and if the set value is more disadvantageous to the player, the number of times of variation until the next special live performance is executed is more likely to be selected to be 10, so that the lower the execution frequency of the special live performance is, the more advantageous the set value is to the player.

In addition, the characteristic part 084IW is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. , a series of special live effects including a live effect and a gacha effect can be executed), and when a pending memory indicating control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is displayed, the predetermined effect is not started (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute S442 if step 084IWS421 is Y). As a result, the special live effect is less likely to be interrupted by the variation of the big win, and the predetermined effect can be preferably executed.

Further, although the description is omitted in the characteristic part 084IW, a specific advance notice effect execution means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that can execute the look-ahead notice effect by executing step S161) capable of executing a specific advance notice effect (for example, a pre-reading notice effect) targeting a variable display that has not yet started is provided over a plurality of variable displays. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 may not execute the pre-reading preview effect in the variation of executing the special live effect). As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect of the pre-reading advance notice effect from being reduced due to the execution of the special live effect during the pre-reading notice effect, and to suitably execute the predetermined effect.

Concretely, by not starting the pre-reading advance notice effect in the period immediately before the execution period of the special live effect and the special live effect period during which the special live effect is being executed, it is possible to realize that "the specific advance notice effect is not executed in the variable display for executing the predetermined effect" (the execution periods of the special live effect and the pre-reading notice effect do not overlap). For example, when the upper limit number of consecutive fluctuations of the look-ahead advance notice performance is 4 times, a specific flag is set from the start of the fluctuation (the 98th fluctuation from power-on or the previous special live performance) when the value of the fluctuation counter is ``3'', and execution of the look-ahead notice performance is prohibited in the state where the specific flag is set. The specific flag may be reset at the timing when the display of the gacha effect moving image ends or at the timing when the third scheduled end flag is reset.

In the characterizing part 084IW, different capsule modes are selected based on the number of prizes won into the general prize winning openings 10 during the live performance.

In addition, although the description of the characteristic part 084IW is omitted, the variation counter may be initialized when the power is turned off or when the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed.

Further, as described above, according to the present characteristic part 084IW, in the gaming machine capable of executing a game, setting means (in this example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 084IWS042) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (in this example, setting value "1" to setting value "6") among a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and setting by the setting means during a predetermined period (in this example, a special live presentation period). Suggestion effect execution means (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 084IWS828 to display an icon, and executes step 084IWS450 in the effect control CPU 120). The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing, as suggestive effects, a first suggestive effect (in this example, displaying a normal mode/special mode icon that can be selected with any set value, and displaying a first mode/second mode card image) and a second suggestive effect (in this example, displaying a third mode card image that is not selected when the set value is "1" or "2") in which the set value is easier to specify than the first suggestive effect. The second suggestive effect is executed at a different rate between when the suggestive effect is executed at the first timing (in this example, the timing at which the game ball wins into the general winning hole 10 during the live effect period) and when the suggestive effect is executed at a second timing (in this example, a predetermined timing during the gacha effect period provided after the live effect period) after the first timing during the predetermined period (in this example, the card image in the third mode is not displayed during the live effect period, while the gacha effect period is performed.) It is possible to execute the display of the card image of the third mode). As a result, the execution ratio of the second suggestive effect, which makes it easy to specify the set value, differs depending on the timing at which the suggestive effect is executed, so that attention can be paid to the execution timing of the suggestive effect, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 084IW, the explanation was made using the special live effect period as the “predetermined period” during which the suggestive effect can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a series of performance periods such as a period from the start to the end of a big win, a period from the start to the end of a high base state, and a period of execution of a series of look-ahead performances (read-ahead zone performances) in a plurality of continuous variations may be used.

Further, in this characteristic part 084IW, as the first suggestion effect, the display of the icon of the normal mode/special mode and the display of the card image of the first mode/second mode can be executed, and as the second suggestion effect, the display of the card image of the third mode can be executed to make it easier to specify the setting value than the first suggestion effect. In other words, as the second suggestive effect, an effect that denies that the set values are "1" and "2" is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if it is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance A that can be selected regardless of the set value and is executed at a rate of 50% when the set value is "6" and a setting suggestion performance B that is a performance that can be selected regardless of the set value and is executed at a rate of 80% when the set value is "6". In this way, any set value may not be denied, and an effect with a high execution ratio may be performed as the second suggestion effect when a specific set value is set.

Further, in this characteristic part 084IW, the suggestive effect execution means executes the second suggestive effect at a higher rate when the suggestive effect is executed at the second timing than when the suggestive effect is executed at the first timing (in this example, the card image of the third mode is not displayed during the live performance period, while the card image of the third mode can be displayed during the gacha effect period). As a result, the later the execution timing of the suggestive performance is, the easier it is to execute the second suggestive performance in which the set value is easily specified, so that the player can pay attention to the execution timing of the suggestive performance and improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 084IW, only icon modes that can be selected for any set value are provided, but this is not limiting, and for example, a special mode that can be selected only for a specific set value may be provided as an icon mode. Also in this case, the rate of selecting the third mode as the card mode may be higher than the rate of selecting the special mode as the icon mode.

In addition, this characteristic part 084IW is provided with a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect in a predetermined period (in this example, a portion for executing a series of special live effects including an explanation effect, a live effect, and a gacha effect by executing steps 084IWS422, S443, and S450 in the effect control CPU 120). As a result, since the suggestive effect is performed during the predetermined period during which the predetermined effect is performed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the period in which the player should pay attention.

In addition, in this characteristic part 084IW, each effect (explanation effect, live effect, and gacha effect) that constitutes the special live effect is started at the start of the fluctuation, so the final image of the video that has finished being displayed is continuously displayed during the period from the end of the display of the explanation effect video to the start of the live effect, the period from the end of the display of the live effect video to the start of the gacha effect, and the period from the end of the display of the gacha effect video to the start of the next change. no. For example, the start timing of each performance (description performance, live performance, and gacha performance) constituting the special live performance may be other than the start of fluctuation, and the live performance may be started at the timing when the display of the explanation performance animation is finished, and the gacha performance may be started at the timing when the display of the live performance animation is finished.

Alternatively, a variation pattern having a variation time corresponding to the length of the special live performance may be selected. For example, when a special live effect is executed every 100 variations, a special variation pattern (variation time: 120 seconds) may be selected for every 100 variations (i.e., the 101st variation from the power-on or the start of the previous special live effect), and an explanation effect video (10 seconds), a live effect video (90 seconds), and a gacha effect video (20 seconds) may be displayed in the variation of the special change pattern.

In addition, the first variation pattern (variation time: 10 seconds) is selected for the 101st variation from the power-on or the start of the previous special live performance, the second variation pattern (variation time: 90 seconds) is selected for the next variation, and the third variation pattern (variation time: 20 seconds) is selected for the next variation. A gacha effect may be executed as the effect.

In addition, in this characteristic part 084IW, when the big win variation is started during the special live performance, it is explained that the big win variation performance is performed without displaying the card image, but in this case, the card image is not displayed (the set value is not suggested) even though the player is actively played and the icon is displayed. Therefore, when the big win variation is performed after the start of the special performance, instead of not displaying the card image, a setting suggestion performance at the time of the big win suggesting the set value may be performed in the big win performance. As a result, it is possible to secure an opportunity for the player to be suggested the set value. Also, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect at the time of big hit may be changed based on the number of winnings of game balls into the general winning hole 10 during the live effect period. For example, when the number of winning game balls into the general winning hole 10 is 0 to 3 during the live performance period, the setting suggesting performance at the time of the big win is not executed, and when the number of winning game balls into the general winning hole 10 during the live performance period is 4 or more, the setting suggesting performance at the time of the big win may be executed.

In addition, as described above, according to the present characteristic part 084IW, the gaming machine is capable of executing a predetermined game, and a setting means (in this example, the part that executes step 084IWS042 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (in this example, setting value "1" to setting value "6") with different degrees of advantage for the player, and a plurality of types of suggestive effects (in this example, the part that executes step 084IWS042 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a plurality of types of suggestion effects (this example). In this case, suggestive effect execution means (in this example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 084IWS805 in the present example) that can execute any one of the first set suggestion mode to the fourth set suggestive mode) for a specific period (two seconds in this example); A display control means (in this example, a part for executing step 084IWS124 in the performance control CPU 120) capable of displaying a suggestion-related display (set suggestion history in this example) related to the suggestion performance executed by the suggestion performance execution means for a period longer than a specific period (three minutes in this example) based on the storage of the suggestion-related information. Thus, when the suggestive effect is executed, it can be confirmed for a period longer than the specific period after that, so that it is possible to easily recognize that the suggestive effect has been executed.

Specifically, when the suggestive effect is performed in a mode that ends based on the passage of time (for example, when it is performed as part of a variable effect or a big win effect), it is assumed that the player misses the suggestive effect, but as described above, by making it possible to display the suggestive effect over a period longer than the specific period that is the execution period of the suggestive effect, even when the suggestive effect is overlooked, the execution of the suggestive effect can be confirmed by the suggestive related display. For example, as a way to enjoy a game machine of a type that allows setting values, it is assumed that the display screen of the suggestive effect is photographed and the photographed image is uploaded to a server on the Internet (for example, it is published on an SNS (Social Networking Service)). Therefore, as described above, by making it possible to display the suggestive relation display over a period longer than the specific period that is the execution period of the suggestive effect, it is possible to photograph the suggestive relevant display and upload the photographed image to a server on the Internet even if the display screen of the suggestive effect is not photographed during execution of the suggestive effect.

The "suggestive effect" is not limited to the eye-catching effect, and any effect such as a cut-in notice effect, a character notice effect, a group notice effect, a button effect, a ready-to-reach effect, a simulated continuous effect, a pre-reading effect, a special live effect, an icon display, a capsule image display, and a card image display in the special live effect may be executed as the "suggestive effect".

That is, when the special live effect is executed, the information of the displayed icons (e.g., the number of displayed icons, the icon mode) may be stored so that the information can be confirmed as an icon display history from the menu screen. The information of the displayed capsules (e.g., the capsule mode) may be stored and the information can be confirmed as the capsule display history from the menu screen.

Also, the eye-catching effect as the ``suggestion effect'' can be executed only when the super reach is lost, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ``suggestion effect'' can be executed in the case of, for example, the super reach jackpot, the normal reach jackpot/loss, or the non-reach jackpot/loss.

Also, the execution timing of the "suggestive effect" is not limited to during fluctuation, and may be executed in the jackpot game state.

Also, although the upper limit period for displaying the setting suggestion history is set to 3 minutes, it is not limited to this as long as it is longer than 2 seconds which is the execution period of the eye-catching presentation, and it may be 3 seconds, or the setting suggestion history can be displayed without an upper limit.

In addition, according to the characteristic part 084IW, the detection means (in this example, the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the action of the player is provided, and the display control means can display the suggestive related display based on the detection result of the detection means in a non-game state (in this example, a customer waiting state) in which the player is not playing a game (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 084IWS121 to S124. As a result, the menu screen can be displayed in the customer waiting state, and the setting suggestion history can be displayed on the menu screen. Thus, it is possible to switch between display and non-display depending on the taste of the player.

As described above, the customer waiting state as a non-gaming state may be a state in which no change is performed and conditions such as a state in which there is no hold display, a state in which no game ball is fired, a state in which an out ball is not detected, a state in which a touch sensor that detects a player's contact with the hitting ball operation handle 30 does not detect, or a state in which an infrared sensor or the like detects that the player is not in front of the gaming machine continues for a predetermined period of time.

Further, since the suggestive relation display can be displayed in a non-game state in which the player is not playing a game, the suggestive relation display can be displayed without interfering with the variable performance or the big win performance.

Further, according to the characteristic part 084IW, the display control means performs display including information (in this example, a character display corresponding to the set suggestion mode of the executed eye-catching effect) as the suggestion related display related to the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect execution means. As a result, it is possible to visually determine which suggestive effect has been executed, making it easier to recognize the executed suggestive effect.

In this characteristic part 084IW, an image including a character display corresponding to the eye-catching effect mode is displayed as the setting suggestion history, but it is not limited to this as long as the setting suggestion mode of the executed eye-catching effect can be specified. For example, the same image as the display image of the executed eye-catching effect may be displayed as the setting suggestion history. Also, the name of the rendering mode (for example, "first suggested setting mode", "second suggested setting mode", "third suggested setting mode", and "fourth suggested setting mode"), the character name corresponding to the rendering mode, or an image such as an emblem symbolizing the character may be displayed as the setting suggestion history.

Further, as the display form of the setting suggestion history, the effect modes of the executed eye-catching effects may be displayed one by one as described above, or may be displayed as a list. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the performance modes of the eye-catching performances executed during the day may be highlighted (shortened performances in which the eye-catching performances are shortened are continuously performed in the order of execution). Further, another image display section (sub-image display section) different from the image display section 5 may be provided so that the setting suggestion history can always be displayed on the sub-image display section regardless of the progress of the game.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 084IW, it is possible to display all setting suggestion histories for the current day, but this is not restrictive. For example, the displayable setting suggestion histories may be limited in terms of time (for example, only the history up to 3 hours before the current time can be displayed) or numerical limit (for example, only up to 10 histories including the most recently executed eye-catching effect can be displayed).

Also, in this characterizing portion 084IW, when the super reach is lost, the eye-catching effect mode is always selected at the ratio shown in FIG. 8-17(D), but this is not restrictive. For example, a plurality of super ready-to-win performances with different degrees of reliability for big wins are provided, and when the variation is accompanied by the super ready-to-win performance with high reliability, the setting suggestion mode may be more easily selected than when the variation is accompanied by the super ready-to-win performance with low reliability. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of disappointment when the player loses despite the highly reliable super ready-to-win effect being performed.

Further, according to this characteristic portion 084IW, after starting the display of the suggestive-related display, the display control means ends the display of the suggestive-related display when at least one of the first condition for detecting the action of the player (pressing the push button 31B in this example) and the second condition for elapse of a period longer than a specific period (in this example, three minutes have passed since the last operation) is satisfied (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 performs step 084I). By executing WS127 to S130, the display of the setting suggestion history is ended). As a result, the display period of the information regarding the suggestive effect can be changed according to the player's preference.

Further, according to this characteristic portion 084IW, the storage means can store suggestion-related information related to suggestion effects executed during the period from power-on to power-off of the gaming machine (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 performs step S71 to initialize the setting suggestion history storage area when the power is turned on. Therefore, the setting suggestion history storage area can store setting suggestion history information from when the power is turned on until when the power is turned off.). This makes it possible to enhance the production effect of the suggestive production.

Concretely, a player who browses the suggestion-related display may predict the current set value, but since the player can browse the information about the suggestion performance executed from the power-on to the present time, the prediction can be made with higher accuracy.

Further, according to this characteristic part 084IW, the storage means can erase the stored suggestion-related information based on the action of the player (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 performs steps 084IWS131 and S132). As a result, it is possible to select a suggestive effect to be left as a history according to the player's taste.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 084IW, all the information stored in the setting suggestion history storage area is erased at once, but it is not limited to this. For example, of the information stored in the setting suggestion history storage area, only part of the information selected by the player may be erasable. As a result, it is possible to erase setting suggestion histories that other players do not want to see. For example, if another player sees the history indicating that the eye-catching effect of the fourth setting suggestion mode indicating that the setting value is most advantageous to the player is performed, the other player will recognize that the advantageous setting game machine is set with the most advantageous setting value for the player. As expected, by making it possible to erase any setting suggestion history based on the player's operation, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

Further, the conditions for erasing the information stored in the setting suggestion history storage area are not limited to detection of the player's action, but include the power being turned off, setting values being changed, RAM clear processing being performed, a state in which the game is not in progress (a state in which there is no change and no pending display, a state in which no game balls are fired, a state in which an out ball is not detected for a predetermined period of time, a state in which a touch sensor that detects the player's contact with the batted ball operation handle 30 does not detect, an infrared sensor, etc.). The information stored in the setting suggestion history storage area may be erased on condition that the player is not in front of the gaming machine for a predetermined period of time.

Also, it may be possible to set the setting suggestion history based on the game clerk's operation. For example, it may be possible to set whether the setting suggestion history up to how many hours before the current time can be disclosed, or it may be possible to set not to disclose the setting suggestion history. This enables setting according to the policy of the amusement arcade.

In addition, in this characteristic part 084IW, the effect mode of the executed eye-catching effect and the execution time of the eye-catching effect are displayed as the setting suggestion history, but other information related to the eye-catching effect may be displayed. For example, it may be possible to display the number of executions for each effect mode of the executed eye-catching effect. Specifically, it may be possible to display such as "first setting suggestion mode: 3 times, second setting suggestion mode: 5 times...".

In addition, in the characteristic part 084IW, the setting suggestion history is not limited to being displayed based on the action of the player, and may be displayed when other conditions are satisfied. For example, it may be performed based on a predetermined timing as a part of the variation performance or the big hit performance. For example, the information indicating the type of suggested effect executed last time may be displayed in a predetermined ready-to-win effect, or may be displayed as a predetermined round effect in the jackpot game state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 084IW, the eye-catching performance as the suggestive performance is performed during fluctuation, and the setting suggestion history as the suggestion-related display is displayed in the customer waiting state, but the combination of the execution timings of the suggestive performance and the suggestive-related display is not limited to this, and may be an arbitrary combination during fluctuation/during the jackpot game state/during the customer waiting state. For example, the suggestive effect may be performed during variation, and the suggestive related display may be displayed in the big hit game state. Further, the suggestive effect may be performed in the big win game state, and the suggestive related display may be displayed in the game state (for example, probability variable state) after the big win game state is finished. Concretely, the setting suggestion history may be displayed by performing the suggestion performance in the ending period of the big win game state, and displaying the image in the suggestion performance as it is as the background in the variable probability state that shifts after the big win game state.

Further, in this characteristic part 084IW, as described above, the eye-catching effect of any effect mode can be displayed as the setting suggestion history, but the effect mode of the eye-catching effect that is not subject to display of the setting suggestion history may be provided.

For example, the suggestion effect executing means can execute a first suggestion effect (for example, an eye-catching effect of a first set suggestion mode) that suggests that a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player is set, and a second suggestion effect that suggests that a set value that is advantageous to the player is set (for example, an eye-catching effect of a second set suggestion mode to a fourth set suggestion mode). It is possible (for example, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the eye-catching effect of the first setting suggestion mode as the setting suggestion history, and displays the eye-catching effects of the second to fourth setting suggestion modes). As a result, it is possible to prevent the desire to play from decreasing.

The "advantageous set value" and the "unfavorable set value" for the player may be classified based on the probability of a big win (a set value where the jackpot probability is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value is defined as an "advantageous set value" and a set value where the jackpot probability is less than a predetermined threshold is defined as an "advantageous set value"), or may be defined based on the ball output rate (ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls fired) (a set value where the payout rate is 100% or more is defined as an "advantageous set value"). and a set value that is less than 100% is set as a “disadvantageous set value”).

In addition, "limiting the display of the first suggestive relation display" is a concept including limiting the display of the first suggestive relation display while remembering that the first suggestive effect has been executed, and limiting the display of the first suggestive relation display without remembering that the first suggestive effect has been executed.

Also, "restrict display" may mean that no display is performed at all, or that display is performed more passively than when there is no restriction. For example, the first suggestion-related display may be displayed in a smaller range than the second suggested-related display, or the first suggested-related display may be displayed for a period shorter than the second suggested-related display.

Further, for example, the suggestion effect executing means can execute a fixed suggestion effect (e.g., an eye-catching effect of the fourth setting suggestion mode) for definitively informing that a specific set value is set, and the display control means may limit the display of the suggestion-related display related to the fixed suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may not display the eye-catching effect of the fourth set suggestion mode as the setting suggestion history). As a result, since it is possible to leave room for imagining which set value is set, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Note that the ``determined suggestion effect for deterministically informing that a specific set value has been set'' is not limited to definitively informing that the currently set set value is the set value that is most advantageous to the player among the set values, as described above. may be

For example, if the display of suggestion-related display related to the fixed suggestion performance for definitely notifying that a set value advantageous to the player is set is restricted, it is possible to prevent the gambling spirit from being excessively aroused. Further, for example, if the display of the suggestion-related display related to the fixed suggestion performance for definitely notifying that the set value disadvantageous to the player is set is restricted, the player's desire to play can be prevented from being lowered.

In addition, although the card mode is determined based on the player's action status (the number of winning game balls into the general winning hole 10) during the live performance, the card mode is not limited to this, and for example, the card mode may be determined based on the player's action status during the live performance. Specifically, a description will be given using the following modified example. Note that descriptions of the same portions as those in the above-described embodiment are omitted.

In the modified example, a rhythm game using the push buttons 31B is played during a live performance, and the capsule mode (selection ratio of the card mode) is determined based on the score of the rhythm game.

Here, the control of the effect control CPU 120 in the rhythm game will be described. In the rhythm game, the performance control CPU 120 visually presents (displays on the image display device 5) the timing matched with the rhythm of the music output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the live performance, and adds points based on detection of the operation of the push button 31B during the receivable period provided before and after the presented timing (hereinafter sometimes referred to as presentation timing).

Moreover, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected in the receivable period, the effect control CPU 120 adds a different score based on the error between the presentation timing and the operation timing of detecting the operation of the push button 31B. Specifically, the acceptable period is divided into a first period, a second period, a third period, and a fourth period, starting from a period in which the error from the presentation timing is small, and the effect control CPU 120 receives 100,000 points when the operation of the push button 31B is detected in the first period, 50,000 points when the operation of the push button 31B is detected in the second period, 30,000 points when the operation of the push button 31B is detected in the third period, and the operation of the push button 31B is detected in the fourth period. In this case, 10,000 points are added respectively, and the score after the addition is displayed on the image display device 5 . Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the characters "PERFECT" on the image display device 5 when the operation of the push button 31B is detected in the first period, the characters "GREAT" when the operation of the push button 31B is detected in the second period, the characters "GOOD" when the operation of the push button 31B is detected in the third period, and the characters "BAD" when the operation of the push button 31B is detected in the fourth period.

Also, the effect control CPU 120 determines the capsule mode based on the final score in the rhythm game. Specifically, if the score in the rhythm game is less than 300,000 points, "blue" is determined as the capsule mode, if the score is 300,000 points or more and less than 800,000 points, "green" is determined, and if the score is 800,000 points or more, "red" is determined as the capsule mode, and the card mode is determined according to the selection ratio according to the determined capsule mode. That is, in this modification, the capsule mode is determined based on the number of times the push button 31B is operated and the operation timing.

FIG. 8-25 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of a special live effect in the modified example. For example, at the 101st change from power-on, after performing an effect informing that a special live effect will be performed, an explanation effect video that displays an explanation image (explanation about playing a rhythm game during the live effect) is displayed ((1), (2) in FIG. 8-25), and after the display of the explanation effect video is finished, the live effect video is displayed (FIG. 8-25 (3)).

In the live effect moving image displayed here, display relating to the rhythm game is performed. For example, a solid line is fixedly displayed in the lower display area of the image display device 5, and an operation instruction image imitating the push button 31B is displayed moving from top to bottom along with a dotted line. Then, the user is prompted to operate the push button 31B at the timing (presentation timing) when the dotted line reaches the solid line.

Each time an operation to the push button 31B is detected during the acceptable period during display of the live effect moving image, a score corresponding to the period during which the operation is detected is added and displayed (FIG. 8-25 (4)). In the illustrated example, since the operation of the push button 31B is detected in the third period, 30,000 points are added and the characters "GOOD" are displayed.

After the display of the live effect moving image is finished, the gacha effect moving image is displayed (FIG. 8-25 (5)). In the illustrated example, the score of the rhythm game is 870,000 points.

In the gacha effect animation, a blue capsule pops out from the device (Fig. 8-25 (6)), the score of the rhythm game acts on the capsule, and the color of the capsule changes from blue to red (Fig. 8-25 (7)).

As described above, according to the modified example, the gaming machine is capable of executing a game by a player, and includes detection means (push sensor 35B in this example) for detecting the action of the player, setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player, suggestive effect execution means capable of executing any one of a plurality of types of suggested effects for suggesting settings by the setting means, and execution of a specific effect capable of executing a specific effect during a specific period before the suggested effect is executed by the suggested effect executing means. and the suggestive effect execution means executes one of a plurality of types of suggestive effects at different rates according to the state of detection of the action of the player in the specific period (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 in the modified example selects the capsule mode according to the score of the rhythm game during the live effect period (the number of operations and the operation timing of the push button 31B), selects the card mode based on the selected capsule mode, and displays the card image of the selected card mode). As a result, since the selection ratio of the suggestive effect differs depending on the detection state of the action in the specific period, the effect can be varied, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that although the score of the rhythm game (that is, the number of motion detection times and the motion detection timing) is used as the "state of motion detection" here, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one of a plurality of types of suggestive effects may be executed at different rates depending on whether or not the push button 31B is operated during the live performance period. That is, the suggestive effect executing means may execute any one of a plurality of types of suggestive effects at a different rate depending on whether or not an action by the player during the specific period is detected (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in the modified example may select the capsule mode according to whether the number of times the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the live effect period is 0 or 1 or more, select the card mode based on the selected capsule mode, and display the card image of the selected card mode). As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The “detection status of motion” may also be the length of a detection period during which motion continues, or the frequency of motion detection.

Further, the motion detected by the detection means is not limited to pressing the push button 31B, but may be a tilting operation on the stick controller 31A, a motion of the player that can be detected by a non-contact sensor such as an infrared sensor or an optical sensor, or a motion of the player that can be detected by a pressure sensor.

In addition, the suggestive effect executing means can execute, as suggestive effects, a first suggestive effect and a second suggestive effect in which the set value is easier to specify than the first suggestive effect, and in a specific period, when the detection frequency of the player's motion is high, the second suggestive effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the player's motion is detected low (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 in the modified example can execute the second suggestive effect at a higher rate when the score of the rhythm game in the live effect period is higher than when the score is low). As a result, it is easy to select “red”, and when the “red” capsule mode is selected, the third mode is more likely to be selected than when the “blue” or “green” capsule mode is selected). As a result, the type of suggestive effect to be executed changes depending on the number of game media shot, so that the interest in the game can be improved and the shooting of the game media can be promoted.

In this modified example, different capsule modes are selected based on the actions of the player during the live performance, but different capsule modes may be selected based on the actions of the player during the explanation performance in addition to the live performance.

Also, it may be possible to execute a plurality of modes of live production with different output music, in which case a rhythm game corresponding to the rhythm of the output music may be played (that is, a plurality of types of rhythm games with different music may be provided). As a result, it is possible to give variations to the performance, and to improve the interest.

Also, the difficulty level of the rhythm game may be selectable by the player. For example, the difficulty level of the rhythm game may be selected from three levels of easy, normal, and hard based on the player's operation, and the rhythm game may be played according to the selected difficulty level. For example, 10 receivable periods may be provided for easy, 20 receivable periods may be provided for normal, and 30 receivable periods may be provided for hardware.
Therefore, the data capacity of the ROM 121 can be saved.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of executing a game, and includes a gaming state control means (CPU 103) for controlling the gaming state, a setting means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 084IWS042) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, set value "1" to set value "6") with different advantages for the player, and during a predetermined period (for example, special live performance period), Suggestion effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 084IWS828 to display an icon and executes step 084IWS450) capable of executing any of a plurality of types of suggestive effects for suggesting settings by the setting means (e.g., normal mode or special mode icon display, first to third mode card image display, non-set suggestion mode/first set suggestion mode to fourth set suggestion mode eye-catching effects, etc.). a portion for displaying a card image), and predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect during a predetermined period (for example, a portion for executing a series of special live effects including an explanation effect, a live effect, and a gacha effect by executing steps 084IWS422, S443, and S450 in the effect control CPU 120), and the suggestive effect executing means provides a first suggestive effect as the suggestive effect (for example, display of a normal mode/special mode icon that can be selected at any set value, and a second suggestive effect (e.g., display of a third mode card image that is not selected when the set value is "1" or "2") can be executed, and the suggestive effect is executed at a first timing during a predetermined period (e.g., the timing at which the game ball enters the general winning hole 10 during the live effect period), and at a second timing after the first timing (e.g., the predetermined period). , a predetermined timing during the gacha performance period provided after the live performance period), the second suggestion performance is executed at a different rate (for example, the card image of the third mode is not displayed during the live performance period, while the card image of the third mode can be displayed during the gacha performance period), and the game state control means (CPU 103)
Control is possible between an advantageous state (big win game state) advantageous to the player and a special state (high probability/high base state (probability variable state), high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)), which is a game state different from the above advantageous state and advantageous to the player, and the selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the set value (As shown in FIG. 12-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the set value. ), the special state (high-probability/high-base state (probability-variable state)) includes a first period (a period from when the game state transitions to a high-probability/high-base state (probability-variable state) until a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times), or until a jackpot game state is entered before the special game is executed a predetermined number of times), and a second period after the first period (after the game state shifts to a high-probability/high base state, the jackpot game state is entered. There is a period (after 50 times or 100 times) after the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times)), and in the first period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined period is higher than in the second period (As shown in FIGS. 12-6 (A1) and (C1). In the second period, there is a gaming machine in which the ratio of selecting the "non-reach loss (high-speed fluctuation)" (variation display period is 1 second), which is a shorter fluctuation display period than the "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds), is higher than the first period [excluding the final fluctuation].
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, when the game state is the special state, it is possible to realize a healthy game and improve the amusement of the game.

Also, the suggestive effect and the variable display pattern may be associated with each other. For example, when a long variation pattern is selected, the execution frequency of the second suggestive effect may be higher than when a short variation pattern is selected. By doing so, not only the degree of expectation for a big hit but also the set value can be estimated, thereby improving interest.

Also, the setting suggestion effect may be performed in the first period in the special state. By doing so, it is possible to improve the game interest in the first period (the first half of the special state) in which a variable display pattern with a long variable display period is likely to be selected in order to realize a sound game. In particular, since the selection ratio of each variable display pattern is common regardless of the set value, and the set value cannot be discriminated by the selection ratio of each variable display pattern, the game interest can be further improved by performing the setting suggestion performance.
Also, when performing the setting suggesting effect, the setting value may be suggested by a plurality of elements. In this way, when setting values advantageous to the player are suggested by a plurality of elements, the player can be more confident that the setting values are advantageous to the player, and even when setting values advantageous to the player are not suggested by a certain element, if setting values advantageous to the player are suggested by other elements, the player can continue to expect that the setting values are advantageous to the player, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine capable of improving interest, a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
Variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display);
A game state control means (CPU 103) that controls the game state,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
An advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player and a special state (high probability/high base state (probability variable state), high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)) which is a game state different from the above advantageous state and advantageous to the player can be controlled,
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the setting value (as shown in FIG. 12-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the setting value),
In the special state (high probability/high base state (variable probability state)), there is a first period (period from when the game state shifts to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state) until a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times), or until a big hit game state is entered before the special game is executed a predetermined number of times), and a second period after the first period (after the game state shifts to a high probability/high base state, without entering a jackpot game state). There is a period (51 times or later or 101 times or later)) after the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times),
In the first period, the selection rate of the variable display patterns having a variable display period longer than the predetermined period is higher than in the second period (as shown in FIGS. 12-6 (A1) and (C1), when the display result is "loss", in the first period [excluding the final variation], "normal reach failure" (variable display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach failure" (variable display period is 5 seconds), which are longer variable display periods than "non-reach failure (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds). The rate of selecting the variable display period of 60 seconds) is higher than the second period),
In the second period, the selection rate of variable display patterns with a variable display period shorter than the predetermined period is higher than in the first period (as shown in FIGS. 12-6 (A1) and (C1), when the display result is "loss", in the second period, the rate of selecting "non-reach failure (fast variation)" (variation display period is 1 second), which is a variable display period shorter than "non-reach failure (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds), is higher than the first period [final variation]. are higher than]). An example of the form of this gaming machine will be described below as another example of form.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 207SG of this Embodiment)

Next, a characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-7, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 207SG001a formed in the shape of a vertically elongated rectangular frame, a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface, and a game machine frame (underframe) 207SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. In the game machine frame 207SG003, a glass door frame 207SG003a having a glass window is provided so as to be rotatable about the left side between a door open position at which the front surface of the game machine frame 207SG003 is opened and a door closed position at which the front surface is closed. It is designed to be able to see through the skill area.

The game machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-1, a first reserved memory display area 207SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 207SG005U are set at two locations on the left and right of the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5 . In the first reserved memory display area 207SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 207SG005U, a reserved memory display for identifiably displaying the number of reserved memories (special figure reserved memory number) of variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed. The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is formed as a left game area 207SG002L where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed as a right game area 207SG002R where game balls can flow down.

The left game area 207SG002L is a game area where a game ball hit relatively weakly (left-handed) by operating the ball operating handle 30 flows down. It is a game area that flows down through 2C.

In addition, the left game area 207SG002L is provided with a general prize winning port 10, and the right game area 207SG002R is provided with a passage gate 41, a variable prize winning ball device 6B, a general prize winning port 10 and a special variable prize winning ball device 7 from upstream to downstream of the right game region 207SG002R. In other words, a game ball flowing down the left gaming area 207SG002L can enter the first start winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and a game ball flowing down the right gaming area 207SG002R can enter the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and the passing gate 4. 1 can be passed.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening.

As shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-7, the main board 11 in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment is housed in a board case 207SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. In addition, the main board 11 is provided with a lock switch 207SG051 for switching to a set value change state in which the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, a setting changeover switch 207SG052 functioning as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and an open sensor 207SG090 for detecting the opening of the game machine frame 207SG003. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment is also a state in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by a store clerk or the like (setting value confirmation state).

A setting switching main body provided with an operation portion that can be operated by a player, such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052, is accommodated in the board case 207SG201 together with the main board 11. The lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 are formed on the back surface of the board case 207SG201 so that they can be operated without opening the board case 207SG201. It is exposed on the rear side through an opening.

Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 207SG003 is closed. Further, since the lock switch 207SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. In addition, the lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch that can execute switching operation between ON and OFF, which will be described later, with a setting key. In the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 207SG201. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and placed on top of the board case 207SG201. In other words, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 207SG201. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 207SG003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame 207SG003 opened, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment includes a first special symbol display device 207SG004A capable of executing a variable display of the first special symbol, a second special symbol display device 207SG004B capable of executing a variable display of the second special symbol, and a first reservation capable of displaying the number of first reserved memories. Display device 207SG025A, second reservation display device 207SG025B capable of displaying second reservation memory number, normal design display device 207SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal design, normal design reservation display device 207SG025C capable of displaying normal design reservation memory number, round display device 207SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, high base state (time reduction) A game information display unit 207SG200 is provided in which a right hitting lamp 207SG132 that lights up in a game state in which a game ball is hit toward the right game area 207SG002R, such as a state) or a jackpot game state, a probability variable lamp 207SG133 that lights in a probability variable state, and a time reduction lamp 207SG134 that lights in a high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

As shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of an 8-segment LED. Further, in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination.

In the variable display of the first special symbol, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A can display the variable display result and derivation display with two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. In addition, when the variable display result becomes a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B can display the variable display result and derivation display with two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, but the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are at least partially overlapped. You may have

As shown in FIG. 9-5, each of the first suspension display 207SG025A and the second suspension display 207SG025B has four segments of LEDs arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. In the first suspension display 207SG025A and the second suspension display 207SG025B, if the number of suspension memories is one, only the LED at the left end lights up, and as the number of suspension memories increases, the second LED from the left, the third from the left, and the fourth LED from the left sequentially light up. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED of the reserve display corresponding to the variable display decreases (is consumed), and is turned off in a predetermined shift direction (toward the left in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment).

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, when both the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure reservation memory is preferentially executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-6, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 207SG025A is lit, and the left two LEDs of the second pending indicator 207SG25B are lit), after the second special figure pending memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory, Variable display based on 1 special figure reservation storage is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-6, the round indicator 207SG131 consists of five segments (LEDs). Incidentally, as the jackpot types in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, there are provided a total of three jackpot types: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, display control commands used to control image display operations in the image display device 5, audio control commands used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and LED control commands used to control lighting operations of the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs.

Note that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment includes a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322 that can move between their respective origin positions and effect positions during variable display, etc., an origin detection sensor 207SG331 that can detect that the first movable body 207SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321, and a second movable body 207. An origin detection sensor 207SG332 capable of detecting that the SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322 is connected.

FIG. 9-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 207SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 9-8(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a decorative pattern variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (B), different EXT data is set according to the determination result (predetermined result) as to whether the variable display result is "loss", "big hit", or "small hit", and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-8(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the second game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high base state, time reduction state) in which time reduction control is performed.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is possible to specify which error (abnormality) has occurred on the performance control board 12 side, and the occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing to be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. In the notification command during the opening of the large winning opening and the notification command after opening the large winning opening, different EXT data are set corresponding to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

Command B100H is a first starting winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is established based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) being generated. Command B200H is a second starting winning designation command for notifying that a second starting condition for executing a special figure game using a second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is established based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and starting winning (second starting winning) being generated.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved storage number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is established, for example. The second reserved storage number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second starting opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is established, for example. Also, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command may be transmitted corresponding to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is established (when the number of reserved memories is reduced).

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the judgment result of the big win type (probability variation, non-probability variation, and sudden probability) as a result of determination at the time of winning. Also, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "others" as a result of determination at the time of winning.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that a setting value change operation has started in the pachinko game machine 1 (that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started in the setting value change state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value change operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended. The command E105H is a setting value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the pachinko game machine 1 has started the setting value confirmation operation (the pachinko game machine 1 has been started in the setting value confirmation state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the confirmation operation of the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 for providing a work area for game control, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 for executing control operations by executing the game control program, and a random number circuit 10 for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the CPU 103. 4, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, a variable data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads out various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102, a receiving operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and the CPU 103 receives the I/O 1 05, a transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 is also performed.

FIG. 9-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-9, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, the random number MR4 for determining the normal figure display result, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the ranges shown in FIGS. 9-9, but the present invention is not limited to this.

Figures 9-10 show the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for each of the cases where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is 'non-reach' and 'reach' among the cases where the variable display result is 'loss', and also for the case where the variable display result is 'big win'. In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, . Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIGS. 9-10, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment is set shorter than the super reach α and super reach β which are the super reach fluctuation patterns. In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is performed in this embodiment, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is performed is set longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is performed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the degree of expectation for big win becomes higher as the variable display result becomes "big hit". Therefore, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, the longer the variation time, the higher the degree of expectation for big win.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined by first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Instead of deciding the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type, instead of deciding the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type, it is determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern. Then, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-10, the variation content (effect content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (effect content) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PA2-1 of losing the normal reach, when the set value is 1, the variation pattern is the loss of the normal reach, when the set value is 2, the variation pattern is the loss of the non-ready reach by executing the pseudo continuous performance twice, and when the set value is 3, the variation pattern is the loss of the super reach by performing the pseudo continuous performance three times, and so on.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, a variation pattern table storing a plurality of variation patterns as variation modes of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 9-11 (B), the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. The first special figure display result determination table (setting value 3) shown in FIG. 9-13 (B), the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 3) shown in FIG. 9-13 (B), the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) shown in FIG. ), the first special figure display result determination table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 9-16 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 9-16 (B), the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. A pattern determination table, a small hit variation pattern determination table, a losing variation pattern determination table, a normal diagram display result determination table (not illustrated), a normal diagram variation pattern determination table (not illustrated), etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value of 6, which is the largest value, is the most disadvantageous value for the game hall side, and the smaller values in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are more advantageous to the game hall side.

9-11(A) to 9-16(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (set value 1) used when the setting value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit". 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". In addition, when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (set value 1) used when the setting value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit". 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-12 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (set value 2) used when the setting value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit". 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". In addition, when the game state is the probability variable state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-12 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (set value 2) used when the setting value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "jackpot". 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is the probability variable state, among the above-described hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss".

As shown in FIG. 9-13 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (set value 3) used when the setting value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hit". 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". In addition, when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-13 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (set value 3) used when the setting value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hit". 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is the probability variable state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-14 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (set value 4) used when the setting value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit". 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". In addition, when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-14 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (set value 4) used when the setting value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit". 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is the probability variable state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-15 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (set value 4) used when the setting value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit". 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". In addition, when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-15 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (set value 5) used when the setting value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit". 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is the probability variable state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-16 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (set value 6) used when the setting value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit". 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". In addition, when the game state is the probability variable state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-16 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (set value 4) used when the setting value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit". 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is the probability variable state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the game state is the variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values than when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which variable probability control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability that the special figure display result is "jackpot" when it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) is determined to be controlled to the jackpot game state (in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, and the setting value is 4 In the case of 1/240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the probability that the special figure display result is "jackpot" and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher (in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, 1/160 when the set value is 3, and 4 when the set value is 4). 1/140 for , 1/120 for a set value of 5, and 1/100 for a set value of 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the variable probability state (high probability state), the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the big win game state so that the probability of determining to control to the big win game state is higher than when it is the normal state or the time saving state.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-16, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state varies depending on each setting value (for example, if the setting value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability-variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is 1.5 times. The magnification of the probability of winning is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the magnification of the probability of winning in the variable state is 1.625 times the probability of winning in the normal state or the short-time state)).

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the determination value is assigned so that the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as the ``small win'' has the same value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), FIG. 9-12 (A), FIG. 9-13 (A), FIG. 9-14 (A), FIG. 9-15 (A), and FIG. 9-16 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or the set value, the determination value is assigned so that the probability of determining the special figure display result as a ``small win'' and controlling it to the small win game state is the same value different from the first special figure display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (B), FIG. 9-12 (B), FIG. 9-13 (B), FIG. 9-14 (B), FIG. 9-15 (B), and FIG. 9-16 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" regardless of the setting value and is controlled to the small winning game state is the same probability. Furthermore, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" according to the variable special figure and is controlled to the small winning game state is exemplified.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to "big hit" or "small hit" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for the set value 6.

That is, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot". A number within the range plus the number range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Here, when the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value as described above, while the small hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346). Since it is set to the range of 33094, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-18, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for the set value 6.

That is, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, if the setting value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot". A number within the added range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 among the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value, as in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674). Since it is set to the range of 33094, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 9-19, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for the set value 6.

That is, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot". A number within the range plus the number range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Here, when the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value as described above, while the small hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346). Since it is set within the range of 33421, it is possible to prevent the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which varies according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-20, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for the set value 6.

That is, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the variable probability state, when the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot". A number within that range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 among the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value, as in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674). Since it is set within the range of 33421, it is possible to prevent the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which varies according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and setting value, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as a reference, and the determination value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range is set as the numerical range of the big hit determination value. The variable display result is determined with the determination value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, when the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the same). In addition, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the first special figure display result determination table is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is 655, which is about double). 2767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and is controlled to the big win game state is lowest, and the larger the value of the setting value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result is to be controlled to the "jackpot" and to the big win game state. Set value 2>Set value 1).

In other words, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 coincides with any hit determination value corresponding to the big hit, decides that the special symbol is a big win (big win A to big win C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-11(A) and 9-16(B) indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit and the probability (percentage) of a small hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to a big winning game state, but it also means determining whether or not to make the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B a big winning symbol. Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but it also means determining whether or not the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is to be a small winning symbol.

In this embodiment, a total of 6 set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

9-21(A) and 9-21(B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) stored in ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 9-21 (A) is a table for determining the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning hole (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). In addition, FIG. 9-21 (B) is a table for determining the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed).

The big win type determination table is a table referred to for determining the big win type to be one of big wins A to C based on a random number (MR2) for winning type determination when it is determined that a variable display result should be a big win pattern.

Here, the jackpot types in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-22. In the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as the jackpot type, a jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state is completed and shifts to a low-probability-high base state, and a jackpot B or a jackpot C (also referred to as a probability-variable jackpot) in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game is completed and shifts to a high-probability high base state are set.

The big win game state by 'big win A' is a normal open big win that is repeatedly executed five rounds (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player, and the big win game state by 'big win B' is a normal open big win that is repeatedly executed by 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Further, the jackpot game state by the "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big win game state by the ``jackpot A'' ends when the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment) or when the big win game state is entered before the special game is executed the predetermined number of times.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or the big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the big win game state ends. Therefore, when the big win generated again is the big win B or the big win C, the high-precision control and the time-saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called continuous game state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or less jackpot types or four or more jackpot types may be provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (A), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the big win B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the big win C. When the set value is '2', 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the big win A, 100 to 229 are assigned to the big win B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the big win C. When the set value is '3', 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the big win A, 100 to 209 are assigned to the big win B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the big win C. When the set value is '4', 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the big win A, 100 to 189 are assigned to the big win B, and 190 to 299 are assigned to the big win C. When the set value is '5', 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the big win A, 100 to 169 are assigned to the big win B, and 170 to 299 are assigned to the big win C. When the set value is '6', 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the big win A, 100 to 149 are assigned to the big win B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the big win C.

Thus, when a big win occurs in the special game of the first special pattern, the ratio of determining the big win A for which only the time reduction control is executed after the big win game is completed is the same, while the ratio for determining the big win C is lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1 among the big win B and the big win C where both the time reduction control and the probability variable control are executed after the big win game is completed. That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the payout rate is the highest when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and the payout rate becomes lower as the set value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", 0 to 99 are assigned to the big win A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the big win B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the big win C, out of the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2. When the set value is '2', 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the big win A, 100 to 179 are assigned to the big win B, and 180 to 299 are assigned to the big win C. When the set value is '3', 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the big win A, 100 to 159 are assigned to the big win B, and 160 to 299 are assigned to the big win C. When the set value is '4', 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the big win A, 100 to 139 are assigned to the big win B, and 140 to 299 are assigned to the big win C. When the set value is '5', 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the big win A, 100 to 119 are assigned to the big win B, and 120 to 299 are assigned to the big win C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big win A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big win C (no determination value is assigned to the big win B).

Thus, when a big win occurs in the special game of the second special pattern, while the ratio of determining the big win A for which only the time saving control is executed after the big winning game is finished is the same, the ratio of deciding the big winning C is lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1 among the big winning B and the big winning C for which both the time saving control and the probability variable control are executed after the big winning game is finished. That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the payout rate is the highest when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and the payout rate becomes lower as the set value becomes smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the form in which the big hit type is not determined to be the big hit B is exemplified. , and the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the case where the big win type is determined to be the big win B may be provided.

As described above, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, since the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is different according to the set value, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, the larger the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the higher the probability of the big win, the easier it is to determine the big win C as the type of big win, etc.).

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself does not change.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the variable probability state is 65% (so-called variable loop type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game balls pass through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the big win game. Based on this, the game state after the end of the big win game is controlled to a variable probability state, and the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big win game is changed according to the variable special figure (so-called V probability variable type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the big win probability is 1/320 and the small win probability is 1/50, and the game ball is a special variable winning ball device during high base (during time reduction control). It is good also as a game property (so-called 1 type 2 types mixed type) which controls to a jackpot game state based on passing the predetermined switch provided in 7. FIG. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but a setting may be provided in which the probability of a big win or a small win is higher than when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, while the number of winning balls obtainable during the big win game is small (for example, when the set value set to the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6).

Furthermore, in the case of changing the playability according to the setting value in this way, common switches may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used as an effect switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a variable state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is determined as one of the plurality of types described above according to the pre-determined result.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a big win variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variable display result "big win", a big win variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variable display result "small hit", and a loss variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variable display result "loss" are prepared in advance.

In the big-win variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to each of the variation patterns of the normal-reach big-hit variation pattern (PB1-1), the super-reach α-jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super-reach β-jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

As shown in FIGS. 9-23(A) and 9-23(B), as the jackpot variation pattern determination table, a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A and a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot types are for jackpot B and jackpot C are prepared in advance, and these jackpot variation pattern determination tables are prepared in advance. (for jackpot A) and for jackpot variation pattern determination tables (for jackpot B and jackpot C), each variation pattern of normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) is assigned a predetermined random value as a determination value within the range that random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

As shown in FIG. 9-23 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), when the setting value is "1", 1 to 400 in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1), and 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α big hit variation pattern (PB1-2). Up to 997 are assigned to super reach β jackpot variation patterns (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "2", 1 to 380 in the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1), 381 to 835 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "3", 1 to 360 in the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1), 361 to 820 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "4", 1 to 340 in the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1), 341 to 805 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "5", 1 to 320 in the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1), 321 to 790 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "6", 1 to 300 in the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1), 301 to 775 are assigned to the super reach α big hit variation pattern (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β big hit variation pattern (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-23 (B), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), when the setting value is "1", 1 to 200 in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1), and 201 to 550 are assigned to the super reach α big hit variation pattern (PB1-2), 551 to 997 are assigned to super reach β jackpot variation patterns (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "2", 1 to 180 in the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1), 181 to 510 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "3", 1 to 160 in the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1), 161 to 470 are assigned to the super reach α big hit variation pattern (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β big hit variation pattern (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "4", 1 to 140 in the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1), 141 to 430 are assigned to the super reach α big hit variation pattern (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β big hit variation pattern (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "5", 1 to 120 in the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1), 121 to 390 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "6", 1 to 100 in the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the super reach α big hit variation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β big hit variation pattern (PB1-3).

Thus, when the jackpot A is won in the special game, the ratio of determining the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is higher than the ratio of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot, and the setting values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1 are set to be lower in this order. In addition, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special game, the ratio of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot is higher than the ratio of determining the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and the set values are set to be lower in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1.

That is, in this embodiment, when the type of the big win is "big win B" or "big win C", the super reach β is easily determined, and when the type of the big win is "big win A", the super reach α is easily determined, so that when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player's expectation that "big win B" or "big win C" will be made can be enhanced.

Further, in the small-hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of the small-hit variation pattern (PC1-1), out of the possible range of the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is any of 1 to 6, out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). In this embodiment, only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns may be provided as the small hit variation pattern, and the set values 1 to 6 may determine the small hit variation pattern from the plurality of variation patterns at different ratios.

In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss includes a variation pattern determination table for loss A that is used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not implemented, a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the total number of pending memories is 2 to 4 in the low base state, a variation pattern determination table C for loss that is used when the total number of pending memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state, and a high base state in which the game state is a time saving control. A deviation pattern determination table D used in the case of is prepared in advance.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss A, a predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-24 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss A (for 1 or less total pending storage number in low base), when the setting value is "1", 1 to 450 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 Up to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the setting value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 431 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are super reach. β is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the setting value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 411 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are super reach. β is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 391 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are super reach. β is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the setting value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 371 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are super reach. β is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the setting value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 351 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are super reach. β is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3).

In addition, in the loss variation pattern determination table B, a predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value from the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4, the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-24 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending memories in low base), when the setting value is "1", 1 to 500 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach and 70. 1 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 481 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are super reach. β is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "3", out of the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 460 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 461 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are super reach. β is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 441 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are super reach. β is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 421 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are super reach. β is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 401 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are super reach. β is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3).

In addition, in the loss variation pattern determination table C, a predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value from the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8, the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-24 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for loss C (for 5 or more total pending memories in low base), when the setting value is “1”, 1 to 550 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 Up to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 531 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are super reach. β is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 511 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are super reach. β is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the setting value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 491 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are super reach. β is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the setting value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 471 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are super reach. β is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are super reach. β is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation D, a predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value from the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4) corresponding to the time reduction control, the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-24 (D), in the variation pattern determination table D for loss (for high base medium), when the setting value is "1", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to the variation pattern of non-reach loss (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super Lee. HI α is assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 531 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are super reach. β is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the setting value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 511 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are super reach. β is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the setting value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 491 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are super reach. β is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 471 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are super reach. β is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the setting value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are super reach. β is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3).

In this way, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of deciding the normal reach fluctuation pattern is set to decrease in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In addition, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables for loss A to D, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β, respectively. can be prevented from declining.

In the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the loss of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the loss of super reach β are completely the same among the set values as the variation pattern for loss. may be

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same regardless of the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this. Only the determination ratio of the variation pattern of may be the same.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, both the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the loss of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the loss of super reach β are the same regardless of the set values that are set. Either one of the pattern determination ratios may be the same regardless of the set value.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value, both the determining ratio of the variation pattern of losing super reach α and the determining percentage of the variation pattern of losing super reach β are the same regardless of the set values. may be the same regardless of the setting value to which is set.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is a failure, the determination ratio of the non-reach and normal reach variation patterns is different according to the set value. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value includes not determining any variation pattern (the determination ratio is 0%) and determining a specific variation pattern at a rate of 100%.

The variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the variation pattern (PA1-3) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-2) (see FIG. 9-10). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, a non-reach-loose variation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, making it easier to digest the reserved memories, and by starting winning when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit number of 4, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes in which no reserved memory is performed. It is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game due to non-execution of the display.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-24 (A) to 9-24 (C), the variation pattern is determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the total pending storage number. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pending storage number in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the number of suspended storage of the first special symbol, the number of second special symbols). When performing variable display, a variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol.

In addition, in each losing variation pattern determination table of the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the range of random numbers assigned to the super reach losing variation patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same regardless of whether the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 6. However, since the big hit probability and the probability of losing differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the variation pattern of losing the super reach (appearance rate of the variation pattern of losing the super reach) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, a mode is exemplified in which the rate at which the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of super reach is different according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and considering the jackpot probability and the probability of loss for each set value, the variable display may be executed in the variation pattern of super reach at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 9-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 207SG150 shown in FIG. The game control data holding area 207SG150 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 207SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 207SG152, a game control timer setting unit 207SG153, a game control counter setting unit 207SG154, and a game control buffer. and a setting unit 207SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A stores the reservation data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A) which has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) is generated. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the winning order (the detection order of the game ball) to the first start winning opening, and based on the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Data and the like are stored as pending data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 207SG151A in this manner indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and serves as suspension information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a big hit will be achieved based on the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B stores the reservation data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B) which has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the second start prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start prize (second start prize) is generated. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the winning order (the detection order of the game ball) to the second start winning opening, and the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Data and the like are stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage part 207SG151B in this manner indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and serves as suspension information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a big hit will be achieved based on the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game.

The holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the holding information (second holding information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening may be stored in association with the holding number in a common holding storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) may be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number.

The normal pattern pending storage unit 207SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 207SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate, and stores numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for general pattern display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball as reservation data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 207SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 207SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 207SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may update the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may update the random count value by subjecting all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104 to predetermined processing such as scrambling or arithmetic processing.

The game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, the RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a production control data holding area 207SG190 as shown in, for example, FIG. The effect control data holding area 207SG190 shown in FIG. 9-26(A) includes a effect control flag setting portion 207SG191, a effect control timer setting portion 207SG192, a effect control counter setting portion 207SG193, and a effect control buffer setting portion 207SG194.

The effect control flag setting unit 207SG191 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11. - 特許庁For example, the effect control flag setting unit 207SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 207SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 207SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 207SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 207SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 207SG194A as shown in FIG. The start winning reception command buffer 207SG194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory, and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure during the variable display. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 207SG194A, a storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total reserved storage number of the second special figure reserved storage (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure during variable display (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") are provided. When there is a start winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, four commands, a starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation memory in the reception command buffer 207SG194A at the time of start winning are secured with a storage area (entry) for storing separately the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory by associating these start entry winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, and reservation storage number notification command.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted upward one by one as will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started, and the memory contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved memory where the start condition is satisfied are cleared in the performance symbol variation stop processing executed when the variable display is terminated.

Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 207SG194A in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, a storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that a suspension display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the suspension storage display is set can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure suspension storage and the second special figure suspension storage.

If the execution of the pending display notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal reserved memory display is stored in the pending display flag, so that the normal display mode (for example, white circle) The reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5U. By setting "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the reserved memory display, the reserved memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 207SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 207SG005U, and in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display, the possibility of a big hit or the possibility of becoming a super reach is announced.

At the time of start winning to the first start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning reception command buffer 207SG194A. store it. At the time of starting winning, from the starting mouth winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command is sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning designation command, the pattern designation command, the variation category designation command, and the reservation storage number notification command are stored in the storage areas respectively corresponding to the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage or the second special figure reservation storage.

9-26(B), each time the variable display of effect symbols is started, the command stored in the entry (entry of buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display that was completed immediately before is deleted, and the command stored in the entry (entry corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started is deleted. The memory contents of the entries after the pending memory of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 9-26 (B), when the variable display of the effect symbols in the first special figure reserved storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in the buffer number "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1", and each command stored in the area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is It is shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is being variably displayed at that time.

In the pre-reading notice setting processing in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is an entry in which the pending display flag is not set, and if there is an entry in which the pending display flag is not set, based on the symbol designation command and the variation category command stored corresponding to the entry, determines whether or not to execute the pending display notice effect and the display mode (display pattern) of the pending memory display according to the presence or absence of the execution of the pending display notice effect. When the execution of the pending display advance notice performance is determined, the pending memory display mode is determined from squares (◇) and stars (☆), and when the non-execution of the pending display advance notice performance is determined, the display mode of the pending storage display is determined as white circle. Then, a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the reserved storage display is set to the reserved display flag.

After the pending display flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 executes the pending display update process (see FIG. 9-52) to display the pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 207SG005D and the second pending memory display area 207SG005U.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, a form in which a pending display notice effect can be executed as a prefetching notice effect that can be determined to be executed in the prefetching notice setting process is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this.

Next, the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 9-27(A), the display monitor 207SG029 includes a first display section 207SG029A, a second display section 207SG029B, a third display section 207SG029C, and a fourth display section 207SG029D. Each of the first display portion 207SG029A to the fifth display portion 207SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 207SG029A to fifth display section 207SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment is executed using the area outside the test object in the entire area of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 when the pachinko game machine 1 is tested.

As shown in FIGS. 9-27(B) and 9-27(C), the display monitor 207SG029 displays base L which is the base value (real-time value during measurement) calculated in the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 6000 outs in all game states, base 1 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 6000 first outs in all game states, and second outs in all game states. It is possible to display the base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability/low base state) for every 6000 balls and the base 3 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability/low base state) for every 3rd out 6000 balls in the whole game state. Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed in percentage on display monitor 207SG029.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 207SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display section 207SG029B in order to display "bL." It is displayed in G029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed in the first display section 207SG029A and "1." is displayed in the second display section 207SG029B to display the abbreviation "b1." 029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed in the first display section 207SG029A and "2." is displayed in the second display section 207SG029B to display the abbreviation "b2." 029D. Further, when the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed in the first display section 207SG029A and "3." is displayed in the second display section 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." 029D.

In the display monitor 207SG029 of this embodiment, the main substrate 11 (CPU 103) controls the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 to sequentially display them. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-29, the main substrate 11 performs control to switch the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The base values displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 are displayed in different colors according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-28, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", the display monitor 207 Each base value in SG029 is displayed in yellow, each base value in SG029 is displayed in green when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "4", each base value in SG029 is displayed in green, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "5", each base value in SG029 is displayed in red, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "6", the display monitor 207 Each base value in SG029 is displayed in purple. Therefore, the store clerk or the like of the game hall can identify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 207SG029 without executing the setting value change processing described later by the CPU 103 .

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment will be described. 9-30 is a flow chart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (207SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (207SGSa002). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), proceed to 207SGSa017. (207SGSa005).

If the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017. If the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; Y), the setting value being changed indicates that the setting value change processing described later was being executed before the power interruption (the power interruption occurred during the execution of the setting value change processing). It is determined whether or not the flag is set (207SGSa006). If the set value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), proceed to 207SGSa017. If the set value changing flag is not set, clear the RAM clear flag (207SGSa007) if the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is set, and check whether the clear switch is ON, that is, whether the pachinko game machine 1 has been started while the clear switch is being operated. It is determined whether or not (207SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010). If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa008; N), proceed to 207SGSa011 without executing 207SGSa010.

At 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). If the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch 207SG051 ON and the game machine frame 207SG003 opened (207SGSa012; Y), it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), set value change processing (207SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed to proceed to 207SGSa013d. Set value confirmation processing (207SGSa013c) is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d.

If the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (207SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

At 207SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is to be cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (207SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) is executed and then the process proceeds to 207SGSa014.

At 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines again whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), proceed to 207SGSa022, and if the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa014; N), restore processing is performed to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped (power outage) (207SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is recovered, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before the restoration by executing timer interrupt processing for game control to be described later. Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko game machine 1 has been restored (activated by hot start) in the state before the power failure, and transmits a restoration command including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028 (207SGSa016).

In addition, at 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, ie, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (207SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

If the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, if there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or the normal setting value is not set, but the pachinko game machine 1 is started according to the formal procedure by the operation of the game hall employee (game machine frame 207SG003 When the pachinko game machine 1 is started while operating the clear switch with the lock switch 207SG051 turned on, the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (207SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the processes 207SGSa009 to 207SGSa016 described above are executed.

When the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), when the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and when the open sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

In addition, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated by cold start (207SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer is set according to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGSa023), and as shown in FIG.

After executing 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (207SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (207SGSa026; N), the processes of 207SGSa025 and 207SGSa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026; Y), blinking of all segments on the display monitor 207SG029 is terminated (207SGSa027), and 207SGSa02 Go to 8.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. , at least a part of all segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be lit.

Then, in 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (207SGSa029), and permits the interrupt (207SGSa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, at 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormality error) and the recovery from the power interruption during the setting change described later, and the like, to the effect control board 12. Transmits an error designation command corresponding to the set value abnormality (207SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034). If the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (207SGSa034; N), the processes of 207SGSa033 and 207SGSa034 are repeatedly executed, and if the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034; Y), as shown in FIG. , the first display section 207SG029A, the second display section 207SG029B, the third display section 207SG029C, and the fourth display section 207SG029D constituting the display monitor 207SG029 display "E." (207SGSa035).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (B), the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and outputs a security signal to the management device such as the management computer of the game hall through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 to 207SGSa032. Proceed (207SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 207SGSa032 to 207SGSa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.), thereby causing an error caused by the display monitor 207SG029, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. to notify the occurrence of

In this way, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment executes the error occurrence notification by the display monitor 207SG029, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B when an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is restored, so that the game hall clerk etc. It is possible to recognize from both the front and rear sides that an error has occurred or that the power has been restored from a power outage while the settings are being changed. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, in the game control main process of the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-30, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) and after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed, but the present invention is limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clearing process may be executed when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014; Y), not when it is determined in 207SGSa008 that the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y) or after the set value changing flag is cleared in 207SGSa021.

FIG. 9-31(A) is a flow chart showing RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface processing. In the RAM clearing process, the CPU 103 first designates the second address from the top in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) in the specified address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address (FXXX to be described later) of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043). If the specified address is not the last address in RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), the next address in RAM 102 is specified (207SGSa044), and it is determined whether or not the specified address is the address (F002) storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa45).

If the designated address is not the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), proceed to 207SGSa042. If the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clear processing is terminated.

In the RAM 102 in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to each storage area as shown in FIG. 9-31(B). Among these storage areas, the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 stores the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 stores the provisional set value described later. Furthermore, a RAM clear flag is stored at the third address (F002). Other addresses (after F003) store special figure reservation memory, general figure reservation memory, values of various counters, various timers, various flags, game information including error information generated in the pachinko game machine 1, set values (determined used set values) read for setting the display result determination table when determining variable display results in the previous special symbol normal processing, and are stored. Backup data (including a backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among areas where other information is stored. In addition, a value (for example, set value “0”) indicating the factory shipment state is set at the top address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of shipment from the factory. When the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a state in which a value indicating the factory shipment state is set to the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change processing may be always executed, or the pachinko game machine 1 for executing the setting change processing may be urged to restart by a display or the like on the image display device 5.例文帳に追加

In other words, the RAM clear processing in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment is processing for clearing data other than the set values and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in addresses other than the set values.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG in this embodiment, the form of clearing data other than the set value in the RAM clear process is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, only the game information stored at a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 or later in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment) may be cleared.

In addition, in the feature part 207SG in this embodiment, the form of storing the RAM clear flag in the RAM102 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, the accumulator that is the center of the calculation, the flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or the general-purpose register). 3 may be reduced. When the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved more than when the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100, so that the RAM clear flag can be prevented from being overwritten by other information (data) by the processing of the CPU 103.

FIG. 9-32 is a flow chart showing the set value change process (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the setting value change process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting of all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), and starts blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first suspension display 207SG025A and the second suspension display 207SG025B (207S GSa052, see FIG. 9-37(A)). Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts lighting only one of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode according to the set value change process (a mode other than the jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C shown in FIG. 9-6) (207SGSa052a).

In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether any value of 1 to 6 is stored as a set value in the address F000 of the RAM 102 (207SGSa053a). If a setting value other than 1 to 6 is stored in RAM 102, or if no setting value is stored in RAM 102 (when the setting value is cleared in 207SGSa020), "1" is set as the setting value at address F000 in RAM 102 (the setting value is reset to "1"), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any value of 1̂& is stored in the RAM 102 as the setting value (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

In 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a power failure detection process execution wait timer for waiting until the power failure detection process is executed. Then, the value of the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process is decremented by 1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether or not the timer to wait for the start of power interruption detection process has timed out (207SGSa056). If the timer for waiting to start the execution of the power interruption detection process has not timed out (207SGSa056; N), the processes of 207SGSa055 and 207SGSa056 are repeatedly executed.

After executing the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the setting value stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and outputs a security signal to the management device such as the management computer of the game hall through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 (207SGSa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets a set value changing flag (207SGSa061), and determines whether or not the setting switch 207SG052 has been operated (207SGSa062). If the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is not operated (207SGSa062; N), the process advances to 207SGSa065. ).

Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "1", the set value "2" which is one step more advantageous for the player than "1" is stored as a temporary set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, and when the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "2", the set value which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "2" is set as the temporary set value "3". A value one larger than the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a borrowed setting. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a provisional set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the setting value (temporary setting value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new provisional set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and display the set value stored in the address F001 on the display monitor 207SG029.

In addition, when the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the set value changing flag (207SGSa066) and ends the display of the set value (or provisional set value) on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa067), and the first special symbol display device 207 All segments constituting SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned off (207SGSa067a). Furthermore, the CPU 103 terminates the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first suspension indicator 207SG025A and the second suspension indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments that constitute the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a provisional set value is stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). If the provisional setting value is not stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072. are different (207SGSa070).

If the setting value stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 and the provisional setting value stored at the address F001 are the same (207SGSa070; N), proceed to 207SGSa072. stores the provisional set value stored at address F001 in RAM 102 at address F000 (207SGSa071), and proceeds to 207SGSa072. In other words, in the processing of 207SGSa071, the provisional set values are updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual set values.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the set value change process.

FIG. 9-33 is a flow chart showing the set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting of all segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), and starts blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first suspension display 207SG025A and the second suspension display 207SG025B (207S GSa 102, see FIG. 9-37(A)). Further, the CPU 103 starts lighting only one of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value confirmation process (a mode other than the jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C shown in FIG. 9-6) (207SGSa103).

In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a set value check start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a power failure detection process execution waiting timer for waiting until the power failure detection process is executed (207SGSa105). Then, the value of the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process is decremented by 1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process has timed out (207SGSa107). If the timer for waiting to start the execution of the power interruption detection process has not timed out (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGSa106 and 207SGSa107 are repeatedly executed. This power-off detection process (207SGSa108) is the same as the power-off detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value change process described above.

After executing the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the setting value stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109), and outputs a security signal to the management device such as the management computer of the game hall through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 (207SGSa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of 207SGSa111. Also, when the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the setting value in the display monitor 207SG029 is terminated (207SGSa112), and all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned off (20 7SGSa112a). Furthermore, the CPU 103 terminates the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first suspension indicator 207SG025A and the second suspension indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa115), and ends the setting value confirmation process.

Thus, by starting the lighting of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207Sg004B and the round indicator 207SG131 from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, and the flashing of the first reservation display device 207SG025A, the second reservation display device 207Sg025B and the right hand lamp 207SG232, the player and the game A store clerk or the like at the place can recognize from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 that the pachinko game machine 1 is in the process of changing the setting value or confirming the setting value.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, as a mode corresponding to the set value change processing and the set value confirmation processing, at the start of the set value change processing and the set value confirmation processing, only one LED among the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 is lit. As long as it does not correspond to any of the hits C, the lighting mode is not particularly limited.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-37(A), the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment exemplifies a form in which the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 are lit in the same manner as a form corresponding to the setting value changing process or the setting value confirming process at the start of the setting value changing process or the setting value confirming process. It may be illuminated in a different manner from when the value confirmation process is started.

As described above, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is once turned OFF (power supply cutoff) and then restarted, the set value change process is executed by turning ON the lock switch 207SG051 and the clear switch while the frame 207SG003 for the game machine is open.

At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 9-35(A) to 9-35(E), by turning off the power of the pachinko game machine 1, the display using the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (the base value shown in FIG. 9-27 display) ends. In other words, the display monitor 207SG029 in this embodiment uses a different number of display units depending on whether the set value changing process is executed at startup or when the base value is displayed after startup.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the setting value changing process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 start to be displayed on the fourth display portion 207SG029D. When the setting switch 207SG052 is operated while the setting values are displayed on the fourth display section 207SG029D, the display on the fourth display section 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display section 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned off (power off), the set value confirmation process is executed by turning on the lock switch 207SG051 (clear switch is off) while the frame 207SG003 for the gaming machine is open.

At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 9-35 (A), 9-35 (B), and 9-35 (E), by turning off the power of the pachinko game machine 1, the display using the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D ( display of the base value shown in FIG. 9-27) ends. In other words, the display monitor 207SG029 in this embodiment uses a different number of displays depending on whether the set value confirmation process is executed at startup or when the base value is displayed after startup is completed.

Next, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted and the CPU 103 starts the setting value confirmation process, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are started to be displayed on the fourth display portion 207SG029D. The display of the set value on the fourth display section 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes ready for playing.

FIG. 9-34 is a flow chart showing power failure detection processing (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change processing and set value confirmation processing. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value (207SGS081). If there is no power-off signal input (207SGS081; N), the process is terminated, and if there is a power-off signal input (207SGS081; Y), backup data including set value information stored in RAM 122 is specified (207SGS082), and the specified backup data is stored in a backup data storage area provided in RAM 122 (207SGS083). Then, after creating check data to be used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), the system shifts to loop processing in which no processing is executed until the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off.

In addition, in the game control timer interrupt processing in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-38, the CPU 103 executes S21 to S27 (see FIG. 4) after executing the same power interruption detection processing (207SGS200) as 207SGSa057 and 207SGSa108 described above.

Next, the starting winning judgment processing of the characterizing section 207SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described based on FIG. 9-39. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first starting opening switch 22A is on based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A (207SGS501a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (207SGS501a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 207SG154, it should have specified the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. At 207SGS502, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (207SGS502; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" (207SGS503).

When the first starting opening switch 22A is off at 207SGS501a (207SGS501a; N), and when the number of first special figure reserved storage has reached the upper limit at 207SGS502 (207SGS502; Y), based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the second starting opening switch 2 2B is on (207SGS501b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (207SGS501b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, it is sufficient to be able to specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At 207SGS505, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit (207SGS505; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" (207SGS506).

After executing either of the processes of 207SGS503 and 207SGS506, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (207SGS507). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. Thus, the count value of the number of the first reserve memory is updated so as to be increased by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning hole and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to be increased by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning hole and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (207SGS508). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of 207SGS508, the CPU 103 extracts and specifies the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 (207SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (207SGS510). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A, while numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B when the starting opening buffer value is "2".

Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the kind of big hit are used for judging whether or not the result of variable display of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be ``big hit'', and to judge the kind of big hit when the result of variable display is ``big hit''. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the processing of 207SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time, and specifies them for determining the variable display result in the variable display result determination module (207SGS525) described later.

Following the processing of 207SGS510, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (207SGS511). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning designation command to the performance control board 12 is performed by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command to the performance control board 12 is performed by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is finished.

Following the process of 207SGS511, the winning random number determination process is executed (207SGS512). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (207SGS513). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG.

After executing the process of 207SGS513, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (207SGS514). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (207SGS514; Y), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (207SGS515), and then the processing of 207SGS504 is performed. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (207SGS514; N), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (207SGS516), the start winning process is terminated. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 9-40(A) is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in 207SGS 512 of FIG. 9-39 as the winning random number determination processing. In this characteristic part 207SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols) is determined as "big hit" by special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5, FIG. 9-41) to be described later. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random number determination process at the time of winning of 207SGS512, thereby determining whether or not it is determined to stop display the jackpot pattern or small winning pattern as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. . As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning opening, that is, before it is determined whether or not to be a big hit or a small hit at the start of the variable display, it is determined that the special symbol display result will be a "big hit" or a "minor hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc. Then, a pre-reading notice effect such as a pending display notice effect is executed.

In the random value determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. 9-40 (A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by checking the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152, for example (207SGS521). The CPU 103 may specify the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specify the time saving state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and specify the normal state when both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are off.

Following the processing of 207SGS521, the CPU 103 refers to the top address (see FIG. 9-31(B)) in the RAM 102 and identifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS522). Next, a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the current game state, start buffer value and setting value is selected and set (207SGS524). After that, in the variable display result determination module (207SGS525) shown in FIG. 9-42, the process of determining whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit" or "loss" is performed.

As shown in FIG. 9-42, in the variable display result determination module, the CPU 103 compares the numerical value range of the jackpot determination value in the set special figure display result determination table with the numerical data indicating the specified random number MR1 for special figure display result determination (207SGS571), and determines whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (207SGS572). At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined at 207SGS572 that it is within the jackpot determination range (207SGS572; Y), it is determined that it will be a big hit in the variable display (207SGS576). On the other hand, when 207SGS572 determines that it is not within the big hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not result in a big hit (207SGS572; N), the numeric range of the small hit determination value in the set special figure display result determination table is compared with the numerical data indicating the specified random number MR1 for special figure display result determination (207SGS573), and 207SGS509 of FIG. 9-39. It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted in 207SGS574 is within a predetermined small hit determination range.

When it is determined that the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (207SGS574; Y), it is determined that the variable display is a small hit (207SGS577). On the other hand, when 207SGS574 determines that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not result in a small hit (207SGS574; N), it is determined that a loss occurs in the variable display (207SGS575).

Returning to FIG. 9-40(A), it is confirmed at 207SGS575 whether or not it is determined to be a big hit in the variable display (207SGS526), and when it is determined not to be a big hit (207SGS526; N), it is confirmed at 207SGS525 whether or not it is determined to be a small hit in the variable display (207SGS527), and when it is determined not to be a small hit, that is, , When it is determined that the variable display is lost (207SGS526; N), the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "loss", is executed (207SGS527a), and it is determined whether the time saving flag is set, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (207SGS528).

When it is determined at 207SGS526 that the variable display will result in a big hit (207SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the big hit type determination random number MR2 and the big hit type determination table (207SGS533). At this time, a CPU 103 selects table data for big hit type determination from table data constituting a big hit type determination table according to a variable special figure (a ``first special figure'' corresponding to ``1'' or a ``second special figure'' corresponding to ``2'') specified corresponding to the start buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

In addition, the transmission setting of the symbol designating command corresponding to the judged jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designating command in the case of the jackpot A, the third design designating command in the case of the jackpot B, and the fourth design designating command in the case of the jackpot C is executed (207SGS534). 35), go to 207SGS536.

In addition, when it is determined at 207SGS527 that the variable display results in a small hit (207SGS527; Y), transmission setting of a sixth pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result becoming a ``small hit'', is executed (207SGS531), a variation pattern determination table for small win is selected and set (207SGS532), and the process proceeds to 207SGS536.

Also, when the time saving flag is not set at 207SGS528 (207SGS528; N), the variation pattern determination table A for loss is selected and set (207SGS529), and when the time saving flag is set (207SGS528; Y), the variation pattern determination table D for loss is selected and set (207SGS530). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In this characteristic unit 207SG, in addition to these variation pattern determination table A and variation pattern determination table D, a variation pattern determination table B for loss that is used when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4, and a variation pattern determination table C for loss that is used when the total pending storage number is 5 or more are prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. Among the possible ranges of the random number value MR3 for judgment, 1 to 450 are assigned when the setting value 1 is 1, 1 to 430 when the setting value is 2, 1 to 410 when the setting value is 3, 1 to 390 when the setting value is 4, 1 to 370 when the setting value is 5, and 1 to 350 when the setting value is 6.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, among the possible ranges of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern for the non-reach variation pattern, 1 to 500 when the setting value is 1, 1 to 480 when the setting value is 2, 1 to 460 when the setting value is 3, 1 to 440 when the setting value is 4, 1 to 420 when the setting value is 5, and 1 to 400 when the setting value is 6.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C and the variation pattern determination table for loss D, the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the non-reach variation pattern is 1 to 550 when the setting value is 1, 1 to 530 when the setting value is 2, 1 to 510 when the setting value is 3, 1 to 490 when the setting value is 4, 1 to 470 when the setting value is 5, and 1 to 45 when the setting value is 6. 0 is assigned to each.

On the other hand, in any of the losing variation pattern determination tables, 701 to 997 of the possible range of the dynamic pattern determination random number MR3 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern regardless of the set values.

Therefore, in 207SGS529, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always the variation pattern of non-reach or super reach even if the number of retained storage changes after the determination.

After executing any of the processes of 207SGS529, 207SGS530, 207SGS532, and 207SGS535, the fluctuation category according to the range of judgment values including the random number MR3 is judged using each fluctuation pattern judgment table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment (207SGS536). As shown in FIG. 9-40(B), at least when the variable display result is "losing", the variable category has a variable display mode of "non-reach" regardless of the total number of reserved memories, a variable category has a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "others" has a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach or small win). It is sufficient if it can be determined whether or not the category is determined.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 207SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (207SGS537), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

The symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

FIG. 9-41 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 9-41, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (207SGS541). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of 207SGS541, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting section 207SG154 and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure pending memory number is other than "0" in 207SGS541 (207SGS541; N), the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination are read and specified as the pending data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the second special figure pending storage unit 207SG151B (207 SGS542). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Following the processing of 207SGS542, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure pending storage number count value and the total pending storage number count value and updating it, the second special figure pending storage number and the total pending storage number are updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the data of the second special figure pending storage unit 207SG151B is updated. Specifically, the pending data indicating the random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the pending number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the pending numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure pending storage unit 207SG151B are shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS543).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (207SGS544), it moves to 207SGS549.

On the other hand, at 207SGS541, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" (207SGS541; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (207SGS545). The number of the first special figure reserved memory is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of 207SGS545, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". Thus, the process of 207SGS545 is executed when the second special figure pending storage number is determined to be "0" at 207SGS541, and determines whether or not the first special figure pending storage number is "0". As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

The special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. In this case, it is sufficient to provide a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which starting prizes are generated, and to determine which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is used to start execution of the special symbol game from the stored data.

When the first special figure reservation memory number is other than "0" in 207SGS545 (207SGS545; N), as the reservation data stored corresponding to the reservation number "1" in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read and specified (207SGS54 6). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Following the processing of 207SGS546, by subtracting 1 from the count value of the first special figure reserved memory and the count value of the total number of reserved memories and updating them, the first special figure reserved memory number and the total number of reserved memories are updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the data of the first special figure reservation memory unit 207SG151A is updated. Specifically, the pending data indicating the random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the pending number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the pending numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure pending storage unit 207SG151A are shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS547).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "1" (207SGS548), it moves to 207SGS549.

In 207SGS549, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified by checking the states of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 (207SGS549). The CPU 103 may specify the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specify the time saving state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and specify the normal state when both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are off.

Following the process of 207SGS549, the CPU 103 refers to the top address of the RAM 102 (see FIG. 9-31(B)) and identifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS550).

Next, the CPU 103 refers to the game information (see FIG. 9-31(B)) stored in the RAM 102, and determines whether or not there is a memory of the determined used set value (207SGS551). When it is determined that the determined used set value is stored (207SGS551: Y), the set value specified in 207SGS550 and the stored determined used set value are compared (207SGS552), and it is determined whether or not the specified set value and the stored determined used set value are the same (207SGS553).

In 207SGS553, when it is determined that the specified setting value and the stored judgment used setting value are not the same (207SGS553: N), along with setting for transmitting an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the setting value to the performance control board 12 (207SGS554), a security signal is output to the management device such as the management computer of the game hall through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 (20 7SGS555), a loop is entered. After that, the CPU 103 does not execute any other processing, so the loop processing puts the pachinko gaming machine in a game-disabled state (game-disabled state). The error designation command is transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment can recognize that the setting value currently stored at the head address of the RAM 102 is different from the set value (determined used set value) referred to when executing the previous variable display, and the setting value currently stored at the head address of the RAM 102, so that the security of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. .

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, the CPU 103 executes loop processing to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a non-playable state by not executing other processing. The dick gaming machine 1 may be controlled to be in a non-playable state.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of this characterizing part 207SG, it is assumed that the difference between the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 is abnormal, and the abnormal condition can be recognized by the management device of the game arcade. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The abnormality may be notified to the player or the store clerk at the amusement arcade by changing B into a display mode (lighting mode) as shown in FIG. 9-36(B) or FIG. 9-37(B).

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of this characterizing portion 207SG, when the set value stored in the head address of the current RAM 102 is different from the set value used for judgment, the transmission of the error designation command to the performance control board 12 and the output of the security signal toward the management device of the game hall are each executed only once. Good.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of the present characterizing portion 207SG, when the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the head address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 controls the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a non-playable state, but the present invention is not limited to this. You don't have to control it to be incapacitated.

Furthermore, if the CPU 103 does not control the pachinko game machine 1 to the non-playable state when the determined used set value is different from the set value currently stored at the head address of the RAM 102, for example, only a security signal may be output to the management device of the game hall, or the set value stored at the head address of the RAM 102 may be reset and specified. When resetting the set value stored at the head address of the RAM 102, for example, the determined used set value may be stored at the head address of the RAM 102, or by setting a value that is most unfavorable to the player (1 in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment), the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be prevented from being excessively advantageous to the player against the intention of the game hall.

When it is determined at 207SGS551 that the used setting value is not stored, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and the first variable display is executed (207SGS551: N), or when it is determined that the set value specified at 207SGS553 is the same as the stored determined used setting value (207SGS553: Y), the current game state, the start-up buffer value, and the setting value. Select and set the special figure display result determination table according to (207SGS556). After that, the same processing as the processing executed in the variable display result determination module in 207SGS525 shown in FIG. 9-40(A), that is, the processing of 207SGS571 to 207SGS577 shown in FIG. 9-42 is performed (207SGS557).

Subsequently, it is confirmed at 207SGS557 whether or not it is determined that the variable display will result in a big hit (207SGS558), and if it is determined that it will not result in a big hit (207SGS558; N), it is confirmed whether or not it is determined at the 207SGS557 that the variable display will result in a small hit (207SGS559).

When it is determined at 207SGS558 that the variable display will result in a big hit (207SGS558; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting section 207SG152 is set to the ON state (207SGS561). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIGS. 9-21 (A) and (B) is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (207SGS562). By referring to the thus set jackpot type determination table, it is determined which of a plurality of jackpot types should be selected according to which of the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 stored in the variable random number buffer and the determination value assigned to each jackpot type of ``jackpot A'', ``jackpot B'' and ``jackpot C'' in the jackpot type determination table matches (207SGS563).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of 207SGS563, it is decided before deriving fixed special symbols as a result of variable display whether to control the game state after the end of the jackpot game state to either the time-saving state or the probability variable state having a higher advantage for the player than the time-saving state. Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 (207SGS564), the determined jackpot type is stored. For example, if the jackpot type is "jackpot A", then "1", if "jackpot B", then "2", and if "jackpot C", then "3".

On the other hand, when it is determined at 207SGS559 that the variable display will result in a small hit (207SGS559; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS560, and the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is set to ON state (207SGS560).

On the other hand, if it is not determined at 207SGS559 that the variable display results in a small hit, that is, if the variable display results in a loss (207SGS559; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS565.

In 207SGS565, fixed special symbols are set in accordance with the result of pre-determination of whether to control to the big win game state (whether the big win flag is set), the result of pre-determination of whether to control to the small win game state (whether the big win flag is set), and the result of decision of the big win type in the case of the big win game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Further, when the special symbol display result is determined to be "big hit" at 207SGS558, when the big hit type at 207SGS563 is "big hit A", the special symbol showing the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the fixed special symbol. When the special figure display result is determined to be a ``small hit'' at 207SGS559 (when a small hit flag is set at 207SGS560), a special pattern indicating a symbol ``2'', which is a small hit pattern, is set as a fixed special pattern in correspondence with the pre-determination result to the effect that the special figure display result is a ``small hit''. Incidentally, these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of kinds of symbols may be set as the confirmed special symbols.

After the fixed special symbol is set at 207SGS565, the set value specified at 207SGS553 is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the determined used set value (207SGS566), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (207SGS567), and the special symbol normal process is terminated.

In addition, when the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" at 207SGS545 (207SGS545; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (207SGS568), the special symbol normal processing is terminated. In this demonstration display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5, for example, has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.例文帳に追加At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration specifying command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the command has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, since the used set value for determination is stored in the RAM 102 as one of the game information (see FIG. 9-31(B)), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the used set value for determination does not exist when executing the first variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. By storing, even when the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, the used set value and the set value stored at the head address of the RAM 102 (set value set in the pachinko game machine 1) can be compared when executing the first variable display.

As shown in FIGS. 9-40 and 9-41, the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment has exemplified the form of judging the variable display result using the variable display result judging module that executes common processing, but the present invention is not limited to this. GS551 to 207SGS553), and processing (207SGS554 to 207SGS555) for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a game stop state when the set value specified by the CPU 103 as a result of the processing does not match the determined used set value. By doing so, even when executing the random value determination process at the time of winning, the process of comparing the set value specified by the CPU 103 with the determined used set value and the process of controlling the pachinko game machine 1 to the game stop state when the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the determined used set value do not match as a result of the processing can be executed, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be further improved.

Next, processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 9-43 is a flow chart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the register of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the effect control board 12.

Also, the effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (207SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGS404), and it is determined whether or not the command reception wait timer has timed out (207SGS405). When the command reception wait timer times out (207SGS405; N), the processes of 207SGS404 and 207SGS405 are repeatedly executed and waits until the command reception wait timer times out.

When the command reception wait timer times out (207SGS405; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hot start notification command has been received (207SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from the power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 after receiving the input of the player information in the player information input process described later) is cleared (207SGS407), and the process proceeds to 207SGS427. .

When there is no reception of the hot start notification command (207SGS406; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is reception of the cold notification command (207SGS408). When the cold notification command is received (207SGS408; Y), the player information stored in the RAM 122 and the performance information (information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 since the previous pachinko game machine 1 was started) are cleared (207SGS409), the information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared, and the game stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. RAM clear notification processing for notifying that player information and performance information are cleared (executing RAM clear notification) is executed (207SGS410). In the RAM clear notification process, an image is displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-36A, a notification image 207SG005M1 for notifying that the player information and the performance information stored in the RAM 122 of the image display device 5 are cleared), the game effect lamp 9 emits light, and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It suffices if the store clerk or the like can be notified that the player information and performance information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. After the RAM clear notification process is executed, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

Moreover, when there is no reception of the cold start notification command (207SGS408; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). When the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, a setting value related notification process is executed to notify that the setting value is being changed (notification of setting value change) or that the setting value is being confirmed (notification of setting value confirmation) (207SGS412). .

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-50(B) and 9-50(C), the image display device 5 displays a notification image 207SG005M2 indicating that the setting value is being changed and a notification image 207SG005M3 indicating that the setting value is being confirmed, as the setting value changing notification and setting value checking notification. A state in which the game machine frame 207SG003 is opened and a game hall clerk or the like who changes or confirms the setting values is viewing the display monitor 207SG029 mounted on the main board 11. In other words, the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state are states in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by the game parlor clerk or the like who changes or confirms the setting value. Therefore, as the setting value changing notification and the setting value confirming notification, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and light emission of the game effect lamp 9 may be used to inform the game parlor clerk who changes or confirms the setting value that the pachinko game machine 1 is activated in the setting value changing state or the setting value confirming state.

The effect control CPU 120 also executes a first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) for checking the operation of the first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body initialization process (207SGS414) for checking the operation of the second movable body 207SG322. In addition, in the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is executed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed (see FIG. 9-49).

Here, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-47 and 9-48. FIG. 9-47 is a schematic explanatory diagram showing the operation modes of the non-detection time operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. FIG. 9-48, (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the non-detection time operation control.

The first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are provided so as to be capable of reciprocating motion between their origin position (first position) and effect position (second position), and forward motion from the origin position to the effect position (second position) and return motion from the effect position to the origin position are actual modes of operation of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 during variable display or the like.

If the detected parts of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 when the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed, the effect control CPU 120 detects that the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 have moved from the origin position for some reason (for example, during transportation or installation on the game island). In this case, if the origin could not be returned during the previous operation (for example, when the movable body 207SG321 or 207SG322 cannot be confirmed to return to the origin or cannot be moved due to motor step-out, failure, or catching during the execution of the performance, a movable body error (operation abnormality) occurs), or the game machine moves from the origin position due to vibration). (predetermined position between the origin position and the combined position), non-detection operation control for returning to the origin is executed. Since the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located away from the origin position when the non-detection operation control is executed, the only operation is to move the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 in the direction of the origin position.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes actual operation confirmation operation control when non-detection operation control is executed in the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process, or when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332. The motion control for confirming the actual motion is the same motion as the actual motion actually performed in the performance using the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 (for example, the motion of the movable body performed during the variable display).

Next, the control speed set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 9-48(A) and 9-48(B) are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 120 to operate the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and are different from the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322. That is, for example, when the predetermined movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated, even if the same control speed is set for one movement section and another movement section between the origin position and the effect position, if one movement section and another movement section differ in mode (for example, a section with and without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or even in the same movement section, the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG321 and 207SG3 move upward and downward. 22 may be different from the control speed. Even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, the actual movement speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not always the same if there are differences in the size, weight, operation mode, movement distance, drive mechanism, etc. of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322. When a plurality of movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated by stepping motors of the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322, if there are differences in the size, weight, operation mode, movement distance, drive mechanism, etc. of each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322, each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322 Actual operating speeds are not necessarily the same.

As shown in FIG. 9-48 (A), when executing the actual operation confirmation operation control, the effect control CPU 120 operates the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 based on the set control speed corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer in the set actual operation confirmation process data. Specifically, control is performed to accelerate from the origin position and then decelerate and stop at the performance position, and to accelerate from the performance position and then decelerate and stop at the origin position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 can operate normally, the control speed of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is changed in the order of low speed→high speed→low speed between the origin position and the effect position. In other words, when performing an effect using each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, the effect control CPU 120 controls the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 to operate at a speed within a range between the lowest speed (low speed) as the first speed and the highest speed (high speed) as the second speed higher than the lowest speed. Each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 is controlled to operate at a speed within a range between a speed (low speed) and a maximum speed (high speed) as a second speed higher than the minimum speed.

That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the control speed is set so as to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operating speed. In the following description, it is assumed that when the movable members 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the lowest control speed, they operate at the lowest speed, and when the movable members 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the highest control speed, they operate at the highest speed.

Here, the control speed is set so that the motion speed during acceleration and deceleration of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is the lowest speed in the motion control for actual motion confirmation. In addition, when returning to the origin position after moving to the performance position, the control is performed so that the minimum speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation is maintained for a longer time than when stopping at the performance position, so that the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are surely decelerated and then the detected parts are detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-48 (B), the effect control CPU 120, when executing the non-detection operation control, always controls to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the actual operation confirmation operation control during the period of movement from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. That is, the performance control CPU 120 always sets the lowest control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation confirmation operation control so that the maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control is the speed below the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the same speed as the actual operation confirmation operation control). controls the operation of

In this case, since it is unknown how far away the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are from the origin position, if the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are positioned near the origin position, if the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated at a control speed when accelerated in the operation control for actual operation confirmation, that is, at a high speed, the origin detection sensor 207S will be detected when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 return to the origin position. G331 and 207SG332 cannot reliably detect the parts to be detected, and there is a risk that the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, etc. may be damaged due to the impact when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 return to the origin position from a short distance and the movement is restricted.

Returning to FIG. 9-43, after executing the first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS413), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value early change end flag indicating that the setting value change or setting value confirmation is completed during the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is set (207SGS415). If the setting value early change end flag is not set (207SGS415; N), it is further determined whether or not a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). If the setting value change end notification command or setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; N), proceed to 207SGS412; If the setting value early change end flag is set (207SGS415; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS417 without executing the process of 207SGS416.

At 207SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed (207SGS417). If the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 has not ended (207SGS417; N), the set value early change end flag is set and the process proceeds to 207SG412 (207SGS418). (207SGS419). If the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 has not ended (207SGS419; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and if the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 has ended (207SGS419; Y), it is determined whether or not the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS420).

In 207SGS420, when the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS420; Y), the set value early change end flag is cleared (207SGS421), the first movable body initialization processing (207SGS422) which is the same processing as 207SGS413, and the second movable body initialization processing (207SGS4) which is the same processing as 207SGS414 23) to determine whether the initialization (operation check) of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed in the first movable body initialization processing (207SGS422), 207SGS414, and second movable body initialization processing (207SGS423) (207SGS424). If the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 has not been completed (207SGS424; N), proceed to 207SGS422.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 9-49A, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 9-49(A), starts setting value change notification and setting value checking notification from the time when the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, as well as the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization. Execute the process. As described above, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, the second movable body initialization processing is executed after the first movable body initialization processing is completed, that is, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is executed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-49(A), when the effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command in the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, that is, when the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are performed again. conversion processing is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-49(B), when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command at the timing when only the first movable body initialization processing has been completed out of the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing, that is, the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 has been completed, but the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 has not yet been completed. When the confirmation of the setting value is finished, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed again after the second movable body initialization process is finished.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9-49(C), if the effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command at a timing when the first movable body initialization processing has not yet ended, that is, if the setting value change or setting value confirmation is completed while the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed, only the first movable body initialization processing and second movable body initialization processing being executed are executed, and the first movable body initialization processing is executed again. The initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed.

In addition, when there is no reception of the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command at 207SGS411 (207SGS411; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error designation command is received (207SGS425). If an error designation command is received (207SGS425; Y), an error notification process (207SGS426) is executed to notify an error indicated by the error designation command.

As the error notification in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error specified by the error designation command may be displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9-50(D). By displaying the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error specified from the error designation command on the image display device 5 in this way, the player can understand that an incorrect value is set as the setting value from the notification image 207SG005M4, that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 was turned on again in a state where the power was cut off during the change of the setting value, and that the setting value (determined used setting value) referred to in the previous variable display is at the top address of the RAM 102. It is possible to recognize that the set value is different from the stored set value. In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, there are two error notification processes, an error notification process (207SGS426) that can be executed when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, and an error notification process (207SGS439) that can be executed after the pachinko game machine 1 is started.

Of these, for the error notification process (207SGS426) that can be executed when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the notification image 207SG005M4 is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the error that occurred when the pachinko game machine 1 was started (the CPU 103 receives an error designation command in the game control main process 207SGSa031 shown in FIG. 9-30), and the pachinko game machine 1 is started. Regarding the error notification process (207SGS439) that can be executed after completion, the notification image 207SG005M4 may be displayed on the image display device 5 based on the error that occurred after the startup of the pachinko game machine 1 was completed (the CPU 103 receives the error designation command sent in the special symbol normal process 207SGS554 shown in FIG. 9-41).

In this way, in the effect control main process in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-44, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the player information (the number of fluctuations after receiving the input of the player information, the number of big wins, the number of super reach, etc.) is cleared from the RAM 122, while the information for effect (the number of changes since the previous startup of the pachinko game machine 1, the number of big wins, the number of super reach, etc.) and the setting value Information (one of the numerical values “1” to “6” corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1) is not cleared from the RAM 122 . Also, when the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, the player information and performance information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. - 特許庁Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a setting value change state or a setting confirmation state, the player information and performance information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is overwritten (updated) on the setting value information already stored in the RAM 122.例文帳に追加

That is, in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in hot start, cold start, set value confirmation state, or set value change state.

Then, at 207SGS427, the effect control CPU 120 specifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command is received, and the image display device 5 starts displaying the initial pattern corresponding to the received command. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-45, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, when a new set value is not set in the pachinko game machine 1, the image display device 5 starts to display decorative patterns in a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as initial patterns. When the received command is a set value change end notification command, that is, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko game machine 1, the image display device 5 starts to display decorative patterns in a combination of ``4'', ``5'' and ``6'' from the left as initial patterns.

In the characterizing part 207SG in this embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko game machine 1, the image display device 5 is exemplified to display decorative patterns in a combination of "4", "5", and "6" from the left as initial patterns. For example, a combination of "4", "5" and "6" may be displayed as the initial pattern at a higher rate than when "1") is set. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko game machine 1 is set with setting values that are advantageous to the player, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In the characterizing part 207SG in this embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1, the image display device 5 is exemplified as a form in which decoration patterns are started to be displayed in a combination of "4", "5", and "6" from the left as initial patterns. For example, the initial pattern displayed on the image display device 5 may be different between when "1") is set. In addition, the volume of sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, etc. may be made different between when a set value (for example, "6") advantageous to the player is set and when a set value (for example, "1") which is disadvantageous to the player is set.

Then, returning to FIG. 9-43, the effect control CPU 120 sets "4" to the pre-reading regulation counter in order to regulate the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the first 4 fluctuations (207SGS428). After that, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in timer interrupt processing. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (207SGS430) and executes the following processes.

The effect control CPU 120 first executes start notification processing for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started (207SGS431). In the start notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interrupt is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . If it is the first interruption after starting the pachinko game machine 1, it specifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command is received, selects the process table for start notification corresponding to the received command, and starts the process timer for start notification corresponding to the received command. After starting the start-notifying process timer, start-notifying processing of the start-notifying process is executed in the next and subsequent interrupts, so that start-up notification of the pachinko game machine 1 can be executed based on the value of the start-notifying process timer and the start-notifying process table.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG in this embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 start notification mode differs depending on whether the command received at the start of the pachinko game machine 1 is one of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-46, when a hot start notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command is received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, that is, when a new set value is not set in the pachinko game machine 1, light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and output of the output sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds are executed. The 60-second emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 and the 30-second output start timing of the output sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the 60-second emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 and the 30-second output start timing of the output sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

When a cold start notification command is received when starting the pachinko game machine 1, that is, when a new setting value is not set in the pachinko game machine 1 and data in a RAM 102 is cleared, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the output sound B is output for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. The 60-second emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 and the 30-second output start timing of the output sound B from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the 60-second emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 and the 30-second output start timing of the output sound B from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

That is, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, the effect control CPU 120 causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit light for 60 seconds and the speaker 8L and 8R to output sound for 30 seconds. It includes both executing the output of B.

When a set value change end notification command or a set value change end notification command is received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, output of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and display of a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the change of the set value is completed) is executed on the image display device 5.例文帳に追加The 40-second emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9, the 20-second output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image in the image display device 5 are the same, but the 40-second emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9, the 20-second output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image in the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when a set value change end notification command is received when starting the pachinko game machine 1, unlike when a hot start notification command or a cold start notification command is received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, a message image is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the change of the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 is easily recognized.

In the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5 are used to perform the activation notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a signal that can specify that the pachinko game machine 1 has started may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment, the apparatus for executing the activation notification is partly common regardless of whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state (in any case, the game effect lamp 9 emits light and the speakers 8L and 8R output sound). (For example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, a message image is displayed on the image display device 5, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the setting changed, a signal is output from the external output terminal to the management device, etc.).

In addition, depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state, the notification mode in each device that executes start notification may be changed. Specifically, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, all the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 are lighted, while when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a setting change state, only a part of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 may be lighted.

Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a setting change state, the game machine frame 207SG003 is in an open state, so sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (when the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with three or more speakers, the sound is output only from some of the speakers), and when the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, the game machine frame 207SG003 is closed. Therefore, sound may be output from all speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a setting change state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as ``setting is being changed'', while when the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, the image display device 5 may display a message image indicating that the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 are cleared, such as ``RAM has been cleared.''

Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a plurality of external output terminals, the terminal for outputting a signal to the management device may be changed according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a setting change state, a signal is output from a terminal corresponding to the setting change to the management device as a setting value changing notification during a period until the setting value change is completed (a period until a setting value change end notification command or a setting value designation command is received), and after the setting value change is completed, a signal is output from a terminal corresponding to an error or RAM clear to the management device as a RAM clear notification. When the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, it is only necessary to output a signal from a terminal corresponding to an error or RAM clear to the management device as RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is commonly used for each notification, the timing of outputting the signal to the management device may be varied according to each notification.

As described above, in the activation notification process, the form in which the activation notification mode of the pachinko game machine 1 differs according to the received command is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the activation notification of the pachinko game machine 1 may be executed in one notification mode regardless of the command received. Further, the start notification of the pachinko game machine 1 is executed when any of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the setting value change end notification command is received, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG in this embodiment, as an initialization effect in the present invention, a mode is exemplified in which activation notification of different modes is executed according to the command received when the pachinko game machine 1 is activated, or different combinations of decoration patterns are displayed on the image display device 5 according to the command received when the pachinko game machine 1 is activated. , all may be different according to the command received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, or only some of them may be the same.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG in this embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, when it is started with a cold start, when it is started with a setting change state, and when it is started with a setting confirmation state, the start notification is executed.

Returning to FIG. 9-43, the effect control CPU 120 then executes a power-off detection process (207SGS432). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIG. 9-51, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value is input (207SGS441). If there is no power-off signal input (207SGS441; N), the process is terminated, and if there is a power-off signal input (207SGS441; Y), backup data including set value information and player information stored in RAM 122 is specified (207SGS442), and the specified backup data is stored in a backup data storage area provided in RAM 122 (207SGS443). Then, after creating check data to be used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS444), the system shifts to loop processing in which no processing is executed until the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off.

Returning to FIG. 9-43, the effect control CPU 120 then analyzes the received effect control command and performs processing such as setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 207SGS433). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by interrupt processing based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122 . In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 9-8) is the effect control command saved in the buffer area.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (207SGS434). In the effect control process processing, the display control of the image display device 5 is executed by selecting the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) among the processes corresponding to the control state.

Next, random number update processing (207SGS435) for updating the count value of the counter for generating random numbers for performance such as random numbers for judging the jackpot pattern, player information input processing (207SGS436) for accepting input of player information, player information output processing (207SGS437) for outputting player information, performance information aggregation processing (207SGS438) for aggregating performance information, and error information. Execute the knowledge processing (207SGS439). After that, the process proceeds to S52.

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 accepts the input of a password (a password generated by an external server in which the game information of the player is stored in advance. The player can receive the generated password by accessing the server using a communication terminal such as a smartphone) by the player's operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big wins, the number of super reach, etc. as the player information stored each time the variable display, the big win game, and the super reach are executed.

In the player information output process, the performance control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by the player's operation of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and displays the two-dimensional code on the image display device 5. After displaying the two-dimensional code, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a portable terminal such as a smart phone, and transmits the player information collected in the current game to an external server, so that the accumulated player information in the pachinko game machine 1 can be stored in the server.

In performance information totaling processing, a performance control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big wins, the number of super reach, etc. stored in a RAM 122 as performance information each time a variable display, a big win game, and a super reach are executed.

In the error notification process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error designation command is received from the CPU 103 . If the error designation command is received, the error notification corresponding to the received error designation command is executed.

Next, the effect control process processing in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-52, in the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prefetch regulation counter is "0" (207SGS451). If the value of the prefetching regulation counter is "0" (207SGS451; Y), after executing the prefetching advance notice setting process (S161), the display mode of the reserved memory display number and the reserved memory display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 207SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 207SG005U is changed according to the reserved memory number and the reserved display flag value stored in the start winning command buffer 207SG194A. Hold display update processing (207SGS454) to be updated is executed, and one of the processing of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed according to the effect control process flag.

Also, if the value of the prefetch regulation counter is one of "1" to "4" (207SGS451; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452). If the value of the production control process flag is one of "0", "2" to "7" (207SGS452; N), the pending display update process (207SGS454) is executed and one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed according to the production control process flag. The value is decremented by 1 (207SGS453), and the pending display update process (207SGS454) is executed, and one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed according to the effect control process flag. By executing the processing of 207SGS451 to 207SGS453 as described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 immediately after starting, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

In the characteristic part 207SG in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the start of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect over four variable displays. However, the present invention is not limited to this. By not doing so, the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect may be restricted over the four variable displays.

As described above, the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment exemplifies the form of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect over four variable displays based on the pachinko gaming machine 1 being ready for a game. may be set to the factory default state.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, a form in which the holding display notice effect can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, in the display result determination table, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), the range from 1238 to the value corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the hit determination value 1020 is set as the jackpot reference value, and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are set to be continuous numerical ranges. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not there is, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.

Especially in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, since the numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to one place with 1020 as a reference value within the range of 0 to 65535, it is not necessary to perform the determination multiple times whether the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range of the big hit determination value (whether to control to the big hit game state) as compared with the case where multiple numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value are provided. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the time-saving state, or the variable probability state, the hit determination value 1020 is set as the jackpot reference value, and the common value range and the non-common value range of the jackpot determination value are set to be continuous numerical ranges. Whether or not it is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range according to the variable probability state. Therefore, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load of determining whether to control to the big hit game state.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, in the display result determination table, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table for the first special figure is 328, whereas the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table for the second special figure is 65. It is about 2 times as 5 pieces) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set with 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small winning game state, it is possible to determine whether the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small winning determination value according to the variable special figure.

As shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the big hit determination value when the set value set to the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, regardless of the set value set to the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, it is controlled to the big win game state. When determining whether or not, it may be determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each setting value, and when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small hit game state, it may be determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. Therefore, the CPU 103 controls the big hit game state. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to perform the determination and the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small hit game state.

Also, the RAM 102 in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment can store the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-41, the CPU 103 in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment reads the set values stored in the RAM 102 each time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined), sets the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit determination values corresponding to the read set values (sets the display result determination table according to the set values), and determines whether or not to control the big hit game state. do In other words, the CPU 103 reads the setting value from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and sets the display result determination table according to the read setting value, so that it is possible to prevent the inappropriate variable display result from being determined due to the reading of the inappropriate setting value.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the setting value is read from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and the display result determination table is set according to the read setting value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value read from the RAM 102 is set when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, all the variable display results can be determined using the set display result determination table during the period until the power failure occurs in the pachinko game machine 1.

Further, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the RAM 102 each time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined), compares the read set value with the set value read out from the RAM 102 for judging the previous variable display result (determined used set value), and if the set value read from the RAM 102 this time and the determined used set value do not match as a result of the comparison, an error notification is executed by an image displayed on the image display device 5. (Refer to FIG. 9-50) Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined due to reading of an inappropriate setting value. Furthermore, it is possible to more accurately specify that an inappropriate setting value is set in the RAM 102, and to make the surroundings of the game machine recognize that the setting value set in the RAM 102 is abnormal, so that the store clerk of the game parlor or the like can quickly deal with the abnormal setting value.

In the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is compared with the determined used setting value each time the variable display is performed.

In addition, the CPU 103 compares the set value read from the RAM 102 with the previously used set value, and if the set value read from the RAM 102 this time and the determined used set value do not match as a result of the comparison, an error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 displays a notification image 207SG005M4 on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the error designation command from the CPU 103, so that appropriate settings are made. It is possible to more reliably prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined by reading the value.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-40 to 9-42, the CPU 103 determines the variable display result using a variable display result determination module that is common when executing the random number value determination at the time of winning and when performing the special symbol normal processing, so that a part of the processing can be shared between the time of executing the random value determination at the time of winning and the time of executing the special symbol normal processing, and the processing load of the CPU 103 can be suppressed.

In addition, in the characteristics of this embodiment, 207SG, as shown in FIG. 9-17 to 9-20, the number of small hit judgment values is the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine if the special map is the same, but the CPU103 reads from RAM102 when performing variable display. Set the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the set value (set a display result judgment table according to the set value read from the RAM102), so that the processing load to determine whether the CPU 103 controls it into a small hit gaming state, it is also a feature of this embodiment 207SG. When setting the numerical scope range of the jackpot judgment value according to the set value read from the AM102 and the numerical range of the small hit determination value, the process of setting the display result determination table corresponding to the set value read from the RAM102 can be the same, so the capacity of the processing program can also be reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, when 1 (the set value with the lowest jackpot probability) is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the big hit game state.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, the form in which the jackpot reference value is set to the lowest value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot reference value may be set to the maximum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. That is, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination values is set so as to be continuous from the maximum value of the common numerical range of the big hit determination values, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the non-common numerical range of the big win determination values may be set so as to be continuous from the minimum value of the common numerical range of the big win determination values.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, the small hit reference value is set to the lowest value of the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit reference value may be set to the maximum value of the common numerical range of the small hit determination value.

This embodiment also includes invention 207SG described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting value changing function, for example, disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, since the setting state is notified only on the liquid crystal screen, there is a problem that the setting state cannot be properly notified. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the game machine according to the means 1 of Invention 207SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values);
A game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
with
An information display unit (e.g., game information display unit 207SG200) including a variable display unit (e.g., first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) that is controlled by the game control means and can perform at least variable display,
When a specific condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-30, when the clear switch, lock switch 207SG051, and open sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko game machine 1 is started), the setting means shifts to a setting state (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32),
When it is in the setting state, the information display unit displays a recognizable setting state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (A), when the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process, the part that lights up all the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, the setting state is notified in the information display unit that executes variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, so that suitable notification can be performed.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine according to means 2 of invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values);
A game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
with
An information display unit (e.g., game information display unit 207SG200) including a variable display unit (e.g., first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) that is controlled by the game control means and can perform at least variable display,
When the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the clear switch is OFF, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON), the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, the CPU 103 is executing the setting value confirmation process shown in FIG. 9-33).
When it is in the confirmation state, a display that can be recognized as the confirmation state is performed in the information display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (A), when the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation process, the part that lights up all the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, the confirmation state is notified in the information display section where the variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, is executed, so that suitable notification can be performed.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 3 of Invention 207SG,
The display that allows recognition of the setting state or the confirmation state is a display different from the display displayed on the information display unit during the game (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-37, the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result, and the display mode when the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state are different parts)
According to this feature, it is possible to accurately recognize the setting state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine according to means 4 of invention 207SG,
When it is the setting state or the confirmation state, a display that can be recognized as the setting state or the confirmation state is performed in the variable display section (for example, a part that lights up all the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B).
According to this feature, a suitable notification can be made in the variable display section.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to means 5 of invention 207SG,
The variable display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be lit independently (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of eight segments),
As a display capable of recognizing that it is the setting state or the confirmation state, all of the small display portions are displayed in a lighting state (for example, a portion that lights up all the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B).
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize the setting state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 6 of Invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a game by shooting game media into game areas (e.g., left game area 207SG002L and right game area 207SG002R),
The information display unit includes a shooting direction reporting unit (for example, a right-handed lamp 207SG132) that reports the shooting direction of the game medium in the game area,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display that allows recognition of the setting state or the confirmation state is performed in the firing direction notification unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (A), the part that blinks the right-hand lamp 207SG132 in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state)
According to this feature, a suitable notification can be made in the shooting direction notification unit.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to means 7 of invention 207SG,
Equipped with a pending storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process shown in FIG. 5) capable of storing information related to variable display as pending information,
The information display unit includes a hold display unit (for example, a first hold display 207SG025A and a second hold display 207SG025B) capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display that allows recognition of the setting state or the confirmation state is performed in the suspension display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (A), in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, all the segments that make up the first suspension display 207SG025A and the second suspension display 207SG025B blink).
According to this feature, a suitable notification can be made in the hold display section.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine according to means 8 of invention 207SG,
a special variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which game media can enter and a second state in which game media are less likely to enter than the first state in the advantageous state;
The information display unit includes a number of times notification unit (for example, a round indicator 207SG131) that notifies the number of times the special variable device becomes the first state in the advantageous state,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, the number-of-times notification unit displays a display that enables recognition of the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-37(A), only one segment of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 is lit in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state).
According to the game machine characterized by the following, according to this characteristic, it is possible to perform suitable notification in the number of times notification unit.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 8 of invention 207SG,
game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing at least game information for the game control means to control the progress of the game;
A detection means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on;
State information storage means (for example, the area of address F002 of RAM 102) capable of storing state information (for example, a RAM clear flag) capable of specifying the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection means when the power is turned on;
with
The game control means is
When a first condition (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) including that the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) is established, an initialization process (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the RAM clearing process shown in FIG. 9-31 (A)) for initializing the game information storage means accompanied by erasure of the game information can be executed.
When a second condition (e.g., the clear switch is ON and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON) is satisfied including that the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means is a special state (e.g., a state in which the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON) is satisfied, the setting change processing for changing the set value can be executed, and the initialization processing common to the initialization processing executed when the first condition is satisfied is performed. can be executed based on the state information stored in the state information storage means (for example, a portion capable of executing RAM clear processing and set value change processing);
The state information is not erased regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied (for example, the portion where the RAM clear flag is not cleared in the RAM clear process, as shown in FIG. 9-31(A)).
According to this feature, the initialization processing can be made common between when the first condition is established and when the second condition is established, so that the initialization processing based on the state information can be accurately executed while preventing the memory capacity of the processing program for the initialization processing from increasing.

This embodiment also includes invention 208SG described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting value changing function, for example, disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the occurrence of a predetermined error in the setting state cannot be appropriately ignored. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the game machine according to the means 1 of Invention 208SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values);
A game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
with
An information display unit (e.g., game information display unit 207SG200) including a variable display unit (e.g., first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) that is controlled by the game control means and can perform at least variable display,
When a specific condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-30, when the clear switch, lock switch 207SG051, and open sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko game machine 1 is started), the setting means shifts to a setting state (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32),
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display that can specify that the predetermined error has occurred is performed in the variable display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (B), when an error occurs above a set value, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B).
According to this feature, in the variable display area where the variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, is executed, even if the specific condition is established, the occurrence of the predetermined error is notified by the display.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 2 of Invention 208SG,
The game machine is characterized in that the predetermined error is an error related to at least a storage area in which the set value is stored (for example, an error greater than or equal to the set value). According to this feature, it is possible to suitably notify that an error related to the storage area in which the set value is stored and that the set value needs to be reset.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 3 of invention 208SG,
If a power failure occurs before the new setting value changed in the setting state is determined, even if an error related to the storage area where the setting value is stored does not occur at the time of recovery from the power failure, a display that can identify the occurrence of the error is performed in the variable display area (For example, even when the power failure during setting change as shown in FIG. Part that blinks all segments that make up G004B)
According to the game machine, it is possible to suitably notify that the setting value needs to be reset due to the occurrence of power failure before the setting value is determined, without providing a new error.

This embodiment also includes invention 209SG described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting value changing function, for example, disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent No. 6209653, for example, discloses a pachinko game machine having information display means capable of displaying predetermined information relating to the game value to be awarded. However, when applying the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653 to the pachinko game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the cost of the game machine cannot be reduced if the display unit for checking the set value and the information display means are provided separately. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the game machine according to the means 1 of Invention 209SG for solving the problem,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media and being controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values);
A game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
A game value imparting means for imparting a game value based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area (for example, a portion where a prize ball is paid out when a game ball enters a first start prize mouth, a second start prize mouth, a general prize mouth 10, a big prize mouth, etc.);
an information display means (for example, a display monitor 207SG029) having a plurality of display parts (for example, a first display part 207SG029A to a fourth display part 207SG029D) and capable of displaying predetermined information (for example, the base value shown in FIG. 9-27(C)) regarding the game value given by the game value giving means;
with
The information display means can display setting value information that can specify the setting value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-35, when the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the setting value can be displayed in the setting value confirmation state),
The number of the display units used differs depending on whether the predetermined information is displayed or the set value information is displayed (for example, when the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 as shown in FIG. 07SG029, only the fourth display section 207SG029D is used)
According to this feature, since the set value information is also displayed on the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information on the game value, there is no need to separately provide the display means for displaying the set value information, and the cost of the game machine can be reduced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine according to means 2 of invention 209SG,
The information display means can display at least error information that can identify the occurrence of an error related to the storage area storing the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-36(B), when a set value abnormal error occurs, the portion where "E." ),
When the predetermined information is displayed and when the error information is displayed, the number of the display units used is the same (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-35(A) and 9-36(B), when the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 and when the abnormal error is displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, and the third display unit 207SG are displayed. 029C, a portion using the fourth display unit 207SG029D). According to this feature, it is possible to notify that an error has occurred in the storage area in which the setting value is stored, and to easily recognize that the error information is different from the setting value information.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of invention 209SG,
The display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be lit independently (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are each composed of eight segments),
Equipped with detection means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
When the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection means at the time of power-on satisfies the initialization condition (for example, the clear switch is ON), the information display means enters an all-lighting display state in which all of the small display portions constituting each display portion are lit (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-36(A), the first display portion 207SG029A, the second display portion 207SG029B, the third display portion 207SG029C, the fourth display portion 2 07SG029D part that repeats all lighting and all extinguishing of all segments (blinking))
According to this feature, it is possible to confirm whether or not all of the small display portions are normal.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 4 of invention 209SG,
Equipped with detection means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
When the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detecting means satisfies the predetermined condition, the information display means displays the set value information without entering the all lighting display state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-32, when the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process, 207SGSa28 to 207SGSa030 are executed and displayed after 207SGSa015 and 207SGSa016 are executed. The part where the base value is displayed on the monitor 207SG029)
According to this feature, the setting value can be confirmed quickly.

In addition, this embodiment also includes invention 210SG described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine that executes a movable body confirmation operation based on a setting value change operation, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189349. However, in the pachinko game machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-189349, if the confirming operation of the movable body is executed while the set value is being changed, the operator may miss the confirming operation. Therefore, it is conceivable to perform the confirmation operation again after the setting value change operation is completed, but in this case, if the setting value change operation is completed during the first confirmation operation of the movable body, a new movable body confirmation operation is started at the timing when the change operation is completed, and there is a possibility that the movable body may perform an unintended operation. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the game machine according to the means 1 of the invention 210SG for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
operably provided movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322);
Control means for controlling the motion of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process);
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values);
A game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
with
When a specific condition is satisfied, the setting means shifts to a setting state in which setting values can be set (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-30, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing),
The control means is
Confirmation operation control (for example, actual operation confirmation operation control) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally can be executed when the setting state is changed and when the setting state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. and a portion that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing including actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing of receiving the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command),
If the setting state ends while the movable body is performing a confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when shifting to the setting state, the confirmation operation control due to the completion of the setting state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. is received, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command (Part that does not execute)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended action.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of invention 210SG,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
operably provided movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322);
Control means for controlling the motion of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process);
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values);
A game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
with
When the confirmation condition is established, the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-30, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the clear switch is OFF, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON, the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation process),
The control means is
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization processing and second movable body initialization processing) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally can be executed when the confirmation state is entered and when the confirmation state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. A portion that sequentially executes the body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing, and a portion that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing including actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing of receiving the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command),
If the confirmation state ends while the movable body is performing a confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when shifting to the confirmation state, the confirmation operation control due to the end of the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. is received, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command (Part that does not execute)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended action.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 3 of invention 210SG,
The control means is
When the movable body is not positioned at the predetermined origin position, return operation control (for example, non-detection operation control) for performing a return operation for positioning the movable body at the origin position can be executed before executing the confirmation operation control, and when the setting state or the confirmation state is completed during the return operation, the confirmation operation control is executed after the return operation is completed (for example, after the non-detection automatic operation control is completed in the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process. Part that executes actual operation confirmation operation control)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended action.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 4 of invention 210SG,
The control means is
If the setting state or the confirmation state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation, if the operation status of the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition, the confirmation operation control due to the completion of the setting state or the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. If so, the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not newly executed after the second movable body initialization processing is executed) On the other hand, if the operation status of the confirmation operation does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the confirmation operation control is executed according to the end of the setting state or the confirmation state (For example, as shown in FIG. is completed, and when a set value change notification command or a set value confirmation notification command is received during execution of the second movable body initialization processing, the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are newly executed in order after the second movable body initialization processing is completed)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the fifth aspect of invention 210SG,
comprising a plurality of said movable bodies,
The control means is
It is possible to sequentially execute the confirmation operation control for each of the movable bodies (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 sequentially executes the first facial initialization process and the second movable body initialization process),
If the setting state or the confirmation state ends when the confirmation operation is not completed for all of the movable bodies, if the number of movable bodies that have completed the confirmation operation meets a predetermined condition, the confirmation operation control due to the completion of the setting state or the confirmation state is not executed. If the value confirmation end notification command is received, the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process is not newly executed after the second movable body initialization process is executed) On the other hand, if the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation is completed does not satisfy a predetermined condition, the confirmation operation control due to the completion of the setting state or the confirmation state is executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, as shown in FIG. When the first movable body initialization process based on the reception of the command is finished, and the setting value change notification command or the setting value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the second movable body initialization process, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are newly executed in order after the second movable body initialization process is finished)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

The characteristic portion 207SG in this embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not deviate from the gist of this invention are included in this invention.

For example, in the characterizing part 207SG of the above embodiment, the game information display part 207SG200 is replaced with the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reservation display device 207SG025A, the second reservation display device 207SG025B, the normal design display device 207SG020, and the normal design reservation display device 207SG025. C, round indicator 207SG131, right-handed lamp 207SG132, variable probability lamp 207SG133, time saving lamp 207SG134 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, the game information display unit 207SG200 includes even if it does not include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. All you have to do is

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit in the same manner when the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process (set value change state) and when the set value confirmation process is being executed (set value confirmation state). The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be lit or blinked in different modes depending on whether the processing is in progress or in the setting value confirmation process. By doing so, it is possible to easily inform whether the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state by the lighting mode or the blinking mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B.

Further, in the characterizing part 207SG of the embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, by lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the display mode (lighting mode) of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is changed to the first special symbol display device 207. Although SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B have exemplified a form different from the display mode when the variable display result is derived and displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode (lighting mode) of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state is the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. If the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is different from the display mode when the variable display result is derived and displayed, it is not necessary to light up some of the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, lighting of one segment constituting all the segments and the round indicator 207SG131 that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first suspension display device 207SG025A and the second suspension display device 207S However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, lighting of one segment that constitutes the round indicator 207SG131, blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and blinking of all segments that constitute the first suspension indicator 207SG025A and the second suspension indicator 207SG025B are not executed or only partly executed. You may

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, only one segment among the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In addition, the characteristics of the above -described embodiment 207SG shows the form of executing the configuration value errors using the first special design display device 207SG00G004a and the second special design display device 207SG004B, but this invention is not limited to this, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 errors. It may be notified that a set value error has occurred by providing an LED individually and lighting or flashing the LED.

Further, in the characterizing part 207SG of the above embodiment, the display monitor 207SG029 for displaying the base value on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be provided with the display monitor 207SG029. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 207SG029 as described above, a display means for displaying the setting values (or provisional setting values) in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state may be newly provided.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, when the change of the setting value and the confirmation of the setting value are completed during the execution of the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing, it is determined whether or not to execute the new first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing according to whether the first movable body initialization processing is being executed, that is, whether the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed. is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process may be determined according to the operation distance of each movable body, the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body, etc.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reservation display device 207SG025A, the second reservation display device 207SG025B, the round display device 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, etc., which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, are displayed. , By setting it to a mode different from during a game, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified to notify that it is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, but the present invention is not limited to this. SG025B, round indicator 207SG0131, right-handed lamp 207SG132, etc. may be displayed (lighted up or blinked) during the game if it is possible to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reservation display device 207SG025A, the second reservation display device 207SG025B, the round display device 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, etc., which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, are displayed. Although the mode of notifying that the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state by setting it to a mode different from that during a game, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ``mode different from that during a game'' may include a different flashing cycle, a different brightness, a different light emission color of each segment, and the like.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, from the point in time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command, as the first movable body initialization processing or the second movable body initialization processing, the operation control when each movable body is not detected and the actual operation confirmation operation control are exemplified. The operation control when the movable body is not detected may be executed, and the actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body may be executed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first suspension display device 207SG025A, the second suspension display device 207SG025B, the round display device 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, are turned on or Although the form in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 notifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state by blinking has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. 25B, the round indicator 207SG131, and the right strike lamp 207SG132 may be provided at a predetermined location of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a location near the game information display section 207SG200) to explain that lighting or blinking is performed. By doing so, a game hall clerk or the like who is not familiar with the pachinko game machine 1 can light or flash the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reservation display device 207SG025A, the second reservation display device 207SG025B, the round display device 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132. It is possible to prevent the game machine 1 from being erroneously recognized as a failure or the like.

In addition, in the game control main process of the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-30, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) and after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed, but the present invention is limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clearing process may be executed when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014; Y), not when it is determined in 207SGSa008 that the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y) or after the set value changing flag is cleared in 207SGSa021.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, regardless of the game state or setting value, the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) is provided in a different range that is not continuous with the numerical range of the big hit determination value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification, as shown in FIGS. Regardless, the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be continuously provided.

In this way, when the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) are continuously provided, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be changed while maintaining the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value by shifting the reference value of the small hit determination value according to the increase in the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (A), when the setting value is 1, the common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to 1020 to 1237, and the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is set to 1238 to 1565 (1238 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. When the set value is 2, the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to 1238 to 1253 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) of the big hit determination value, and the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is set to 1254 to 1581 (1254 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous to the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value. When the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to 1238 to 1272 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) of the big hit determination value, and the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is set to 1273 to 1600 (1273 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous to the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value. Henceforth, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be similarly set.

When the game state is a probability variable state, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (B), when the set value is 1, the common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to 1020 to 1346, and the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is shifted by the amount increased from the normal state or the short time state, and 1347 to 1674 (1347) so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. is set to the reference value of the small hit judgment value). When the set value is 2, the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to 1347 to 1383 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit determination value, and the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is set to 1384 to 1711 (1384 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous to the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value. When the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to 1347 to 1429 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit determination value, and the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is set to 1430 to 1757 (1430 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous to the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value. Henceforth, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be similarly set.

In addition, as a form of setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous in this way, as shown in FIG. 4990 to 65207) may be set. Furthermore, in this case, a non-common numerical value range of the big-hit determination value is set so as to be continuous with the common numerical value range of the big-hit determination value, and the minimum value of the non-common numerical value range of the big-hit determination value is varied according to the set value, thereby making the big win probability different according to the set value.

When setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value as shown in FIG. When it is determined that the value of R1 is equal to or higher than the minimum value of the big hit determination value, it is determined whether the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit by determining whether or not the random number MR1 is equal to or greater than 65208 which is the reference value of the small hit determination value. By judging the variable display in this way, the variable display result can be judged without executing both the judgment whether the variable display result is a big hit or the judgment whether the variable display result is a small hit or not, so that the processing load of the CPU 103 for the judgment of the variable display result can be reduced.

As described above, in FIGS. 9-53 and 9-54, the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (if 1 is set as the setting value in pachinko machine 1, the common numerical range of the big hit determination value and the common numerical range of the small hit determination value, and if 2 to 6 are set as the set value in pachinko game machine 1, the common numerical range of the big hit determination value, the non-common numerical range, and the common numerical range of the small hit determination value) are the big hits. It is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 which is the reference value of the judgment value, and the numerical range of the small winning judgment value is set so as to include the same number of judgment values in the continuous range from the numerical range of the big winning judgment value regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control to the big win game state or the small win game state by judging whether or not the random number MR1 is within the range between 1020 and the maximum value of the numerical range of the small win determination value according to the set value. Furthermore, when it is determined to control to the big winning game state or the small winning game state, it is possible to determine whether to control to the big winning game state or the small winning game state by determining whether the random number MR1 is equal to or more than the minimum value of the numerical range of the small winning determination value according to the set value. can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-53, when the game state is controlled to the variable probability state by the CPU 103, the big hit determination value increases as a continuous numerical range from 1020 which is the big hit reference value, and the numerical range of the small hit determination value shifts according to the increased numerical range of the big hit determination value. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not to control to the game state, the processing load of determining whether to control to the big win game state and the processing load of determining whether to control to the small win game state by the CPU 103 can be reduced.

9-53 and 9-54, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is not set, so the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control to the big hit game state by targeting only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. I can.

In the form shown in FIGS. 9-53 and 9-54, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set so as to be continuous with the maximum value of the numerical range of the big hit determination value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous with the minimum value of the numerical range of the big hit determination value.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values are continuously set has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS.

In addition, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value are set to different numerical ranges in this way, as shown in FIGS. In the range, a continuous numerical range from the reference value of the small hit determination value (32767 to 33094 in FIG. 9-55, 32767 to 33421 in FIG. 9-56, in any case the reference value of the small hit determination value is 32767).

In the form shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is different while the reference value of the small hit judgment value is common according to the variation special figure. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reference value of the small hit judgment value and the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value may be the same regardless of the variation special figure.

As described above, in the forms shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1020 to 1237 with 1020 as the reference value regardless of the set value. In addition, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2 to 6, in the numerical range different from the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value), the range corresponding to the set value with 60000 as the reference value (60000 to 60016 for the set value 2, 60000 to 60035 for the set value 3 ... 60000 to 60109 for the set value 6) ) is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Therefore, in the development environment of the pachinko game machine 1, the big win probability can be changed only by changing the non-common numerical range of the big win judgment value according to the change of the set value, so that the development load of the pachinko game machine regarding the set value can be reduced. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not to control to the big hit game state by the CPU 103 and to determine whether or not to control to the small hit game state.

In particular, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control to the big win game state by using 60000, which is the same value regardless of the setting value, as the reference value for the non-common numerical range of the big win determination value, so that the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control to the big win game state can be reduced.

9-55 and 9-56, similarly to the characteristic portion 207SG described above, when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is not set. The processing load for determination can be reduced.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) is set to be a continuous numerical range (32767 to 33094) with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) in a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value. That is, since the numerical range of the small winning determination value includes the same number of setting values regardless of the setting value, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control to the small winning game state with the same value of 32767 as the small winning reference value regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, so that the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control to the small winning game state can be reduced.

In the forms shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. On the other hand, when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, no non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set, and when a value of 2 or more is set in the pachinko game machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set according to each setting value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set. Even when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, when setting a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, for example, the range from 1238, which is the reference value, to a value corresponding to each set value as in FIGS. Then, the non-common numerical range of the big win determination value when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is set to be the smallest, and the non-common numerical range of the big win determination value is expanded as the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 increases, so that the probability of being controlled to the big win game state can be varied according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

Further, in the form shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set as a continuous numerical range based on the same value although the number of judgment values included in accordance with the variable special figure is different, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control to the small hit game state using 32767, which is the same value in the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure and the second special figure, as the reference value. can be reduced.

In the forms shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set as the lowest value of the non-common numerical range. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set as the maximum value of the non-common numerical range.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control to the big hit game state based on whether the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is within the common numerical range of the big hit determination value or within the non-common numerical range, and based on whether the value of the random number MR1 is within the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 may determine whether to control to the big hit game state or whether to control to the small hit game state by a method other than the method shown in the characteristic part 207SG. For example, a calculation may be performed on the value of the random number MR1, and it may be determined whether or not to control to the big win game state or the small win game state based on the value of the calculation result. Furthermore, it may be determined whether or not to control to a big win game state or a small win game state based on whether or not the value of the calculation result exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 65535, which is the maximum value of the hit determination value).

(Description on Characteristic Portion 10F)
Next, the characteristic portion 10F will be described. The characteristic part 10F is characterized in that a game stop start process and a game stop end process are added to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process described above.

FIG. 10-1 is a flow chart showing setting value change processing in the feature part 10F. In FIG. 10-1, the same processing as in FIG. 9-32 is denoted by the same reference numeral, and the description thereof is omitted. In the set value change process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). Details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. 10-3. After the game stop start process, lighting of all segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is started (207SGSa051). Thereafter, processing similar to that shown in FIG. 9-32 is performed.

In addition, the CPU 103 executes the game stop end process (10FS002) after executing the process of clearing the set value changing flag (207SGSa066). Details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. 10-4. After the game stop end process, the display of the setting value (or temporary setting value) on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa067). Thereafter, processing similar to that shown in FIG. 9-32 is performed.

FIG. 10-2 is a flow chart showing setting value confirmation processing in the feature part 10F. In FIG. 10-2, the same processing as in FIG. 9-33 is given the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). Details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. 10-3. This game stop start process is a process common to the game stop start process of FIG. 10-1. After the game stop start process, lighting of all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is started (207SGSa101). Thereafter, processing similar to that shown in FIG. 9-33 is performed.

Further, when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off at 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the CPU 103 executes game stop end processing (10FS002). Details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. 10-4. This game stop end process is a process common to the game stop end process of FIG. 10-1. After the game stop end process, the display of the set values on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa112). Thereafter, processing similar to that shown in FIG. 9-33 is performed.

(Regarding various timers)
Next, game stop start processing will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers measure the time and period of the game. When the game is stopped, the CPU 103 stops clocking by these timers. These timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning ball device 7 having the big winning hole. The CPU 103 uses an attacker opening time timer to measure the time from when the big winning door is opened to when it is closed. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for timing the interval period between rounds during the jackpot gaming state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the end of a round to the start of the next round by using the inter-round interval period timer.

The V lid opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the V lid which is provided in front of a predetermined switch (sensor for detecting V probability variation) and which is controlled between an open state and a closed state in a V probability variable game machine that controls the game state after the end of a big win game to a variable probability state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. In the V probability variable gaming machine, the V cover is in an open state in a predetermined round among a plurality of rounds. Such a region where the V lid is open is called a V winning region. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the V lid is opened to when it is closed by using the V lid open time timer. The V passage waiting time timer is a timer for measuring the time of V winning to determine that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. A CPU 103 determines that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch with a delay even after the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from an open state to a closed state (a game ball winning a prize in a large winning opening just before the closing of the large winning opening door and passing through a predetermined switch) is also determined as V winning within the effective period. The CPU 103 counts the validity period of the V prize during which the V prize is determined to be valid by the V pass waiting time timer.

The electric chew opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time when the electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, which is the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory), is controlled in the open state. The variable winning ball device 6B changes between the closed state and the open state, but the CPU 103 measures the time from the open state to the closed state by the electric chew opening time timer.

The special figure fluctuation time timer is a timer for timing the execution time of variable display of special symbols. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol variation time timer. The normal pattern fluctuation time timer is a timer for timing the execution time of the variable display of normal patterns. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols to the end of the variable display of the normal symbols by the normal fluctuation time timer.

The fanfare time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which a fanfare effect is executed, which is a period for notifying that a big win is controlled at the start of a big win. The fanfare period is a period in which a fanfare effect is executed as an effect operation for announcing the start of the big win game state after the big win symbols are stopped and displayed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect by the fanfare time timer.

The ending time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which an ending effect is executed, which is a period for reporting the end of the big win when the big win ends. The ending period is a period during which the jackpot end process is executed, and is a period during which the ending effect as a effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

The CPU 103 has a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a normal figure fluctuation stop period timer, etc. as timers other than the timers described above. The special symbol fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed until the next variable display of the special symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next special symbol is started by the special symbol variation stop period timer. The normal pattern fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from when the variable display of the normal pattern is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next normal pattern is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the normal symbol is derived and displayed until the next variable display of the normal symbol is started by the normal symbol fluctuation stop period timer.

(Game stop start process)
Next, the game stop start processing in the characteristic portion 10F will be described. FIG. 10-3 is a flow chart showing the game stop start process in the feature part 10F. First, in the game stop start process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is in operation (10FS010). At 10FS010, if the attacker release time timer is operating (10FS010; Y), the operating attacker release time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the attacker release time timer is not operating (10FS010; N), it is determined whether or not the inter-round interval period timer is operating (10FS011). At 10FS011, if the inter-round interval period timer is in operation (10FS011; Y), the inter-round interval period timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not operating (10FS011; N), it is determined whether or not the V lid open time timer is operating (10FS012). At 10FS012, if the V lid opening time timer is in operation (10FS012; Y), the V lid opening time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the processing is terminated. If the V lid open time timer is not operating (10FS012; N), it is determined whether or not the V passage waiting time timer is operating (10FS013). At 10FS013, if the V passage waiting time timer is in operation (10FS013; Y), the V passage waiting time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the processing ends.

If the V passage waiting time timer is not operating (10FS013; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew opening time timer is operating (10FS014). At 10FS014, if the electric chew opening time timer is in operation (10FS014; Y), the electric chew opening time timer that is in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the processing ends. If the electric chew opening time timer is not in operation (10FS014; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS015). In 10FS015, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS015; Y), the special figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not in operation (10FS015; N), it is determined whether the normal figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS016). At 10FS016, if the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS016; Y), the normal pattern fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is not in operation (10FS016; N), it is determined whether or not the fanfare time timer is in operation (10FS017). At 10FS017, if the fanfare time timer is in operation (10FS017; Y), the fanfare time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not operating (10FS017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is operating (10FS018). At 10FS018, if the ending time timer is in operation (10FS018; Y), the ending time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the processing ends. If the ending time timer is not in operation (10FS018; N), it is determined whether a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is in operation (10FS019). At 10FS019, if other timers are in operation (10FS019; Y), the other timers in operation are stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If other timers are not operating (10FS019; N), other processing (10FS021) is executed, and then the processing ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS021) includes the following processing. For example, it includes a process of invalidating the shooting of the hitting ball operation handle 30, a process of invalidating various sensors provided in the starting port, the general prize winning port 10, the out port, and the passage gate 41, a process of invalidating the detection of various errors, and a process of invalidating the payout of prize balls. Other processes (10FS021) invalidate various processes and the game is not normally executed.

(Game stop end processing)
Next, the game stop end processing in the characteristic portion 10F will be described. FIG. 10-4 is a flow chart showing the game stop end processing in the characterizing portion 10F. First, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is stopped in the game stop end process (10FS030). At 10FS030, if the attacker release time timer is stopped (10FS030; Y), the stopped attacker release time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the attacker release time timer is not stopped (10FS030; N), it is determined whether or not the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031). At 10FS031, if the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval period timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (10FS031; N), it is determined whether or not the V lid open time timer is stopped (10FS032). At 10FS032, if the V lid open time timer is stopped (10FS032; Y), the stopped V lid open time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the V lid open time timer is not stopped (10FS032; N), it is determined whether or not the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033). At 10FS033, if the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033; Y), the stopped V passing waiting time timer is activated (10FS040), and the processing is terminated.

If the V passage waiting time timer is not stopped (10FS033; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew open time timer is stopped (10FS034). At 10FS034, if the electric chew opening time timer is stopped (10FS034; Y), the electric chew opening time timer that is in operation is activated (10FS040), and the processing ends. If the electric chew open time timer is not stopped (10FS034; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035). In 10FS035, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035; Y), the special figure fluctuation time timer being stopped is operated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS035; N), it is determined whether the normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036). At 10FS036, if the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036; Y), the stopped normal pattern fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS036; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037). At 10FS037, if the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (10FS037; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038). At 10FS038, if the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not stopped (10FS038; N), it is determined whether a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped (10FS039). At 10FS039, if other timers are stopped (10FS039; Y), the other stopped timers are activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If other timers are not stopped (10FS039; N), other processing (10FS041) is executed, and then the processing ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS041) includes the following processing. For example, it includes a process of validating the firing of the hitting ball operation handle 30, a process of validating various sensors provided at the start port, the general prize-winning port 10, an out port, and the passage gate 41, a process of validating the detection of various errors, and a process of validating the payout of prize balls. Various processes are validated by the other process (10FS041), and the game is normally executed.

(Regarding the effect of the characteristic part)
As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the period of the attacker opening time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state, and restarts the timing of the period of the attacker opening time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged by the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the interval period between rounds, and restarts timing of the period of the interval period timer between rounds based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged by the progress of the game due to the reduction of the inter-round interval period in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state during the effective period of the V prize, and resumes timing of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged by the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the effective period of the V winning prize in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 stops measuring the effective period of the electronic chew opening time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, and restarts the timing of the effective period of the electronic chew opening time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting confirmation can be immediately performed, and the game can be prevented from being disadvantageous due to the progress of the game when the variable winning ball device 6B is in a state in which the variable winning ball device 6B can enter in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 stops the counting of the valid period of the special figure variable time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and restarts the counting of the valid period of the special figure variable time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged by the execution of the variable display of the special pattern in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal pattern is executed, and restarts the measurement of the effective period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged by the execution of the variable display of normal symbols in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 stops the effective period of the fanfare time timer on the basis of control to the setting confirmation state during execution of the fanfare performance, and restarts the measurement of the effective period of the fanfare time timer on the basis of the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the progress of the game due to the execution of the fanfare effect in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, a CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the ending time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state while the ending performance is being executed, and restarts the clocking of the effective period of the ending time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the execution of the ending effect and the progress of the game in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. Stops the timing of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer, and restarts the timing of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged by the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the period for starting the next variable display after the variable display of the special pattern is stopped in the setting confirmation state.

(Regarding modified examples of characteristic parts)
The characteristic portion 10F has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Modifications of the characteristic portion 10F will be described below.

A game machine that shifts to a big win game state based on the variable display result of special symbols and decorative patterns (so-called type 1 game machine) has been described, but a game machine that shifts to a big win game state based on a game ball winning (V prize) in a special winning opening (V winning opening) in a special variable winning ball device (so-called accessory) provided in the game area (so-called type 2 gaming machine), or a game that combines the first type and the second type. It may be applied to a technical machine (one type and two type mixing machine). When the starting winning to the second starting winning opening is detected, big winning judgment is executed, and when the judgment result of the big winning is obtained, the variation display of the second special figure is executed to give the big winning displaying result, and the same game control as the big winning based on the starting winning to the first starting winning opening is executed, such as controlling to the big winning game state. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big win, the small win determination is executed, and when the determination result is a small win, the variable display of the second special figure is executed to result in the small win display result, and the game is controlled to a small win game state, and the special variable winning ball device for the small win is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When a game ball is received by a special variable winning ball device for small winning in a small winning game state, and the game ball enters a special winning opening (V area) and is detected by a predetermined switch, a CPU 103 of a game control microcomputer 100 executes a second type big winning game control in which the variable winning ball device for big winning is opened for a predetermined number of rounds to create a big winning game state.

In such a one-two-kind mixing machine, a small winning time timer may be provided for measuring the effective period for determining that the game ball that has entered the special winning opening (V area) is valid. The CPU 103 determines that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch with a delay even after the special variable winning ball device is changed from the open state to the closed state by the small winning time timer is a winning within the effective period. The CPU 103 measures the period during which the winning to the special winning opening is effectively determined by the small winning time timer. Then, the CPU 103 may stop the counting of the effective period of the small winning time timer on the basis of control to the setting confirmation state in the small winning game state, and restart the clocking of the effective period of the small winning time timer on the basis of the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the control in the small win game state in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, various controls are executed in the setting confirmation state, but as shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, similar control may be executed in the setting change state. For example, the CPU 103 may stop timing of various timers based on control to the setting change state when the state is advantageous to the player, and restart timing of various timers based on termination of the setting change state.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special symbols results in a big win display result or a loss display result. Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol results in a big hit display, the timing of the special figure variation time timer is stopped based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state, the timing of the special figure variation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state, and when the variable display of the special symbol is a deviation display result, the timing of the special figure variation time timer may not be stopped even if it is controlled to the setting confirmation state. In this way, the timer is stopped in order to give a disadvantage to the player with respect to the big win display result which is in an advantageous state for the player, but the timer is not stopped in order not to be disadvantageous to the player with respect to the loss display result. As a control method, it may be determined whether the current game state is a big win display result or a losing display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. Then, when the setting confirmation is executed during the execution of the variable display of the loss display result, the timer of the special figure fluctuation time period is not stopped during the execution of the variable display of the loss, and the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped when the pattern stop period comes.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the set value is advantageous to the player or the set value is disadvantageous to the player. For example, various timers may be stopped when the setting confirmation state occurs when the set value is advantageous to the player, but the various timers may not be stopped when the setting confirmation state occurs when the set value is disadvantageous to the player.

(Description of the Invention Regarding Characteristic Portion 10F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 10F includes the following inventions related to the characteristic portion 10F described above. Conventionally, there has been a pachinko game machine which can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of set values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state for a player based on the set set values. In such a pachinko game machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value, it was possible to move to the next process only when all the main processes being executed were completed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902).

However, in the case of the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work cannot be preferably performed. In order to solve such problems, the characteristic portion 10F is configured as follows.

(1) A game machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting value change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player according to the setting change operation;
A state control means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting variable value confirmation process) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to confirm which setting value is set;
a variable winning device (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (e.g., open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (e.g., closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game executing means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., round) a plurality of times to change the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
Variable winning timing means (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an attacker open time timer) for timing the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state,
The variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the control to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and restarts timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the attacker opening time timer based on the setting confirmation state being controlled when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state, and opens the attacker based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. restart the timing of the period of the time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state in the setting confirmation state.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above,
Predetermined game timing means for timing the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (e.g., inter-round interval period) (e.g., CPU 103 that measures by an inter-round interval period timer),
The predetermined game timing means stops timing of the period based on the control to the setting confirmation state in the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, restarts timing of the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the interval period between rounds, and restarts timing of the period of the interval interval timer based on the termination of the setting confirmation state during the interval period between rounds. restart).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged by the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above,
a specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which game media can enter;
Special state control means (e.g., CPU 103) that controls to a special state (e.g., probability variable state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area;
specific timing means (e.g., a CPU 103 that counts the time with a V passage waiting time timer) for timing the valid period (e.g., valid period of V winning) for determining validity of a game medium that has entered the specific area after a predetermined condition is satisfied (e.g., valid period of V winning);
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period based on control to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and restarts timing of the effective period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the effective period of the V prize, and restarts timing of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the termination of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged by the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
Normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and derives and displays display results based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41);
normal variable winning means (e.g., variable winning ball device 6B) in which a game medium can enter a state (e.g., open state) for a predetermined period when the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (e.g., normal game win);
A normal variable winning timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by an electric chew opening time timer) for timing a period in which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state;
The normal variable prize winning timing means stops timing of the period when the normal variable prize winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and restarts timing of the period when the setting confirmation state ends (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the electric chew opening time timer when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state and is controlled to the setting confirmation state, and restarts the electric chew opening time timer when the setting confirmation state ends. restart the clocking of the validity period).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game when the normal variable prize winning means is in a state in which the normal variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed, and when the specific display result (for example, the big win display result) is derived, the advantageous state (for example, the big win game state) is controlled,
Variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of identification information (for example, CPU103 clocked by special figure fluctuation time timer),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and restarts timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the valid period of the special figure variable time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being performed, and restarts timing of the valid period of the special figure variable time timer based on the completion of the setting confirmation state). .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the execution of the variable display of the identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and derives a display result based on the passage of the game medium through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41);
Ordinary variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of ordinary identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a normal figure fluctuation time timer),
The normal variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal identification information is being executed, and restarts timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the normal diagram fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, and restarts timing of the effective period of the normal diagram fluctuation time timer based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. cause).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the normal identification information and the progress of the game in the setting confirmation state.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
A start notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the start notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a fanfare time timer),
The start notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and restarts timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and restarts timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state while the fanfare effect is being executed. restart).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the start notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) for notifying the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period;
End notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the end notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an ending time timer),
The end notification effect timing means stops time measurement of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and restarts time measurement of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops time measurement of the effective period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the ending effect is being executed, and restarts time measurement of the effective period of the ending time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state). .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the execution of the end notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the fact that the variable display result has become a special display result (for example, a small hit display result);
a special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows game media to enter in the special state;
A special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which game media can enter,
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
A special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by a small hit time timer) for timing a valid period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid,
The special timing means stops timing of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts timing of the effective period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the small winning time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while in the small winning game state, and restarts timing of the effective period of the small winning time timer based on the termination of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the progress of the game due to the execution of the control in the special state in the setting confirmation state.

(Description of the Invention Regarding Characteristic Portion 11F)
The characteristic portion 11F may include the following inventions. Conventionally, there has been a pachinko game machine which can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of set values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state for a player based on the set set values. In such a pachinko game machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value, it was possible to move to the next process only when all the main processes being executed were completed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902).

However, in the case of the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work cannot be preferably performed. In order to solve such problems, the characteristic portion 11F is configured as follows.

(1) A game machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting value change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player according to the setting change operation;
A state control means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting variable value confirmation process) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to confirm which setting value is set;
Normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and derives and displays display results based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41);
normal variable winning means (e.g., variable winning ball device 6B) in which a game medium can enter a state (e.g., open state) for a predetermined period when the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (e.g., normal game win);
A normal variable winning timing means (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an electric chew open time timer) for timing a period in which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state;
The normal variable prize winning timing means stops timing of the period when the normal variable prize winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and restarts timing of the period when the setting confirmation state ends (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the electric chew opening time timer when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state and is controlled to the setting confirmation state, and restarts the electric chew opening time timer when the setting confirmation state ends. restart the clocking of the validity period).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game when the normal variable prize winning means is in a state in which the normal variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above,
a variable winning device (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (e.g., open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (e.g., closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., round) a plurality of times to change the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
Variable winning timing means for timing the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an attacker open time timer),
The variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the control to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and restarts timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the attacker opening time timer based on the setting confirmation state being controlled while the special variable winning ball device 7 is changing to the open state, and opens the attacker based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. restart the timing of the period of the time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state in the setting confirmation state.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Predetermined game timing means for timing the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (e.g., inter-round interval period) (e.g., CPU 103 that measures by an inter-round interval period timer),
The predetermined game timing means stops timing of the period based on the control to the setting confirmation state in the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, restarts timing of the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the interval period between rounds, and restarts timing of the period of the interval interval timer based on the termination of the setting confirmation state during the interval period between rounds. restart).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged by the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) or (3) above,
a specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which game media can enter;
Special state control means (e.g., CPU 103) that controls to a special state (e.g., probability variable state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area;
specific timing means (e.g., a CPU 103 that counts the time with a V passage waiting time timer) for timing an effective period (e.g., an effective period of a V winning) for determining validity of a game medium that has entered the specific area after a predetermined condition is satisfied (e.g., the effective period of a V winning);
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period based on control to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and restarts timing of the effective period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the effective period of the V prize, and restarts timing of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the termination of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged by the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed, and when the specific display result (for example, the big win display result) is derived, the advantageous state (for example, the big win game state) is controlled,
Variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by special figure fluctuation time timer),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and restarts timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the valid period of the special figure variable time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being performed, and restarts timing of the valid period of the special figure variable time timer based on the completion of the setting confirmation state). .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the execution of the variable display of the identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
Normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and derives a display result based on the passage of the game medium through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41);
Ordinary variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of ordinary identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a normal figure fluctuation time timer),
The normal variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal identification information is being executed, and restarts timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the normal diagram fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed, and resumes timing of the effective period of the normal diagram fluctuation time timer based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. cause).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the normal identification information and the progress of the game in the setting confirmation state.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
A start notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the start notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a fanfare time timer),
The start notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and restarts timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and restarts timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state while the fanfare effect is being executed. restart).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the start notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) for notifying the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period;
End notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the end notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an ending time timer),
The end notification effect timing means stops time measurement of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and restarts time measurement of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops time measurement of the effective period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the ending effect is being executed, and restarts time measurement of the effective period of the ending time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state). .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the execution of the end notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, small hit game state) based on the fact that the variable display result has become a special display result (for example, small hit display result);
a special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows game media to enter in the special state;
A special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which game media can enter,
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
A special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by a small hit time timer) for timing a valid period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid,
The special timing means stops timing of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts timing of the effective period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the small winning time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while in the small winning game state, and restarts timing of the effective period of the small winning time timer based on the termination of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the progress of the game due to the execution of the control in the special state in the setting confirmation state.

(Description of the Invention Regarding Characteristic Portion 12F)
The characteristic portion 12F may include the following inventions. Conventionally, there has been a pachinko game machine which can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of set values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state for a player based on the set set values. In such a pachinko game machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value, it was possible to move to the next process only when all the main processes being executed were completed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902).

However, in the case of the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work cannot be preferably performed. In order to solve such problems, the characteristic portion 12F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when a specific display is derived as a result,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting value change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player according to the setting change operation;
A state control means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting variable value confirmation process) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to confirm which setting value is set;
Identification information (e.g., special design) variable display timing means for timing the execution period of the variable display (e.g., CPU103 timed by special figure fluctuation time timer),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and restarts timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the valid period of the special figure variable time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being performed, and restarts timing of the valid period of the special figure variable time timer based on the completion of the setting confirmation state). .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the execution of the variable display of the identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above,
a variable winning device (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (e.g., open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (e.g., closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., round) a plurality of times to change the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
Variable winning timing means for timing the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an attacker open time timer),
The variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the control to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and restarts timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the attacker opening time timer based on the setting confirmation state being controlled while the special variable winning ball device 7 is changing to the open state, and opens the attacker based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. restart the timing of the period of the time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state in the setting confirmation state.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above,
Stop timing means for timing the period from the time the variable display of the identification information stops until the next variable display starts (for example, the CPU 103 clocked by the special figure fluctuation stop period timer),
The stop timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the identification information is stopped and before the next variable display is started, and restarts timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state from after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped to the start of the next variable display, and when the setting confirmation state is finished. Based on this, the timing of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the period for starting the next variable display after the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Predetermined game timing means for timing the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (e.g., inter-round interval period) (e.g., CPU 103 that measures by an inter-round interval period timer),
The predetermined game timing means stops timing of the period based on the control to the setting confirmation state in the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, restarts timing of the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the interval period between rounds, and restarts timing of the period of the interval interval timer based on the termination of the setting confirmation state during the interval period between rounds. restart).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged by the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (2) to (4) above,
a specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which game media can enter;
Special state control means (e.g., CPU 103) that controls to a special state (e.g., probability variable state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area;
specific timing means (e.g., a CPU 103 that counts the time with a V passage waiting time timer) for timing the valid period (e.g., valid period of V winning) for determining validity of a game medium that has entered the specific area after a predetermined condition is satisfied (e.g., valid period of V winning);
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period based on control to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and restarts timing of the effective period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the effective period of the V prize, and restarts timing of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the termination of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged by the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
Normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and derives and displays display results based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41);
normal variable winning means (e.g., variable winning ball device 6B) in which a game medium can enter a state (e.g., open state) for a predetermined period when the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (e.g., normal game win);
A normal variable winning timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by an electric chew opening time timer) for timing a period in which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state;
The normal variable prize winning timing means stops timing of the period when the normal variable prize winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and restarts timing of the period when the setting confirmation state ends (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the electric chew opening time timer when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state and is controlled to the setting confirmation state, and restarts the electric chew opening time timer when the setting confirmation state ends. restart the clocking of the validity period).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game when the normal variable prize winning means is in a state in which the normal variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
Normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and derives a display result based on the passage of the game medium through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41);
Ordinary variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of ordinary identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a normal figure fluctuation time timer),
The normal variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal identification information is being executed, and restarts timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the normal diagram fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed, and resumes timing of the effective period of the normal diagram fluctuation time timer based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. cause).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the normal identification information and the progress of the game in the setting confirmation state.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
A start notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the start notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a fanfare time timer),
The start notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and restarts timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare effect is being executed, and restarts timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state while the fanfare effect is being executed. restart).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the start notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) for notifying the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period;
End notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the end notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an ending time timer),
The end notification effect timing means stops time measurement of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and restarts time measurement of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops time measurement of the effective period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the ending effect is being executed, and restarts time measurement of the effective period of the ending time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state). .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the execution of the end notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game.

(10) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (9) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the fact that the variable display result has become a special display result (for example, a small hit display result);
a special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows game media to enter in the special state;
A special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which game media can enter,
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
A special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by a small hit time timer) for timing a valid period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid,
The special timing means stops timing of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts timing of the effective period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the small winning time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while in the small winning game state, and restarts timing of the effective period of the small winning time timer based on the termination of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the progress of the game due to the execution of the control in the special state in the setting confirmation state.

(Description of the Invention Regarding Characteristic Portion 13F)
The characteristic portion 13F may include the following inventions. Conventionally, there has been a pachinko game machine which can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of set values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state for a player based on the set set values. In such a pachinko game machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value, it was possible to move to the next process only when all the main processes being executed were completed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902).

However, in the case of the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work cannot be preferably performed. In order to solve such problems, the characteristic portion 13F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when a specific display result is derived,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting value change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player according to the setting change operation;
A state control means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting variable value confirmation process) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to confirm which setting value is set;
Normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and derives a display result based on the passage of the game medium through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41);
Ordinary variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of ordinary identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a normal figure fluctuation time timer),
The normal variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal identification information is being executed, and restarts timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the normal diagram fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed, and resumes timing of the effective period of the normal diagram fluctuation time timer based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. cause).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the normal identification information and the progress of the game in the setting confirmation state.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
a variable winning device (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (e.g., open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (e.g., closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game executing means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., round) a plurality of times to change the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
variable winning timing means (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an attacker release time timer) for timing the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state;
The variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the control to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and restarts timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the attacker opening time timer based on the setting confirmation state being controlled when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state, and opens the attacker based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. restart the timing of the period of the time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state in the setting confirmation state.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above,
Stop timing means for timing the period from after the variable display of the identification information is stopped until the next variable display is started (for example, CPU 103 clocked by the special figure fluctuation stop period timer),
The stop timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the identification information is stopped and before the next variable display is started, and restarts timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state from after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped to the start of the next variable display, and when the setting confirmation state is finished. Based on this, the timing of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the period for starting the next variable display after the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Predetermined game timing means for timing the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (e.g., inter-round interval period) (e.g., CPU 103 that measures by an inter-round interval period timer),
The predetermined game timing means stops timing of the period based on the control to the setting confirmation state in the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, restarts timing of the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the interval period between rounds, and restarts timing of the period of the interval interval timer based on the termination of the setting confirmation state during the interval period between rounds. restart).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged by the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (2) to (4) above,
a specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which game media can enter;
Special state control means (e.g., CPU 103) that controls to a special state (e.g., probability variable state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area;
specific timing means (e.g., a CPU 103 that counts the time with a V passage waiting time timer) for timing the valid period (e.g., valid period of V winning) for determining validity of a game medium that has entered the specific area after a predetermined condition is satisfied (e.g., valid period of V winning);
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period based on control to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and restarts timing of the effective period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the effective period of the V prize, and restarts timing of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the termination of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged by the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
Normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and derives and displays display results based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41);
normal variable winning means (e.g., variable winning ball device 6B) in which a game medium can enter a state (e.g., open state) for a predetermined period when the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (e.g., normal game win);
A normal variable winning timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by an electric chew opening time timer) for timing a period in which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state;
The normal variable prize winning timing means stops timing of the period when the normal variable prize winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and restarts timing of the period when the setting confirmation state ends (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the electric chew opening time timer when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state and is controlled to the setting confirmation state, and restarts the electric chew opening time timer when the setting confirmation state ends. restart the clocking of the validity period).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game when the normal variable prize winning means is in a state in which the normal variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
The identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed, and when the specific display result (for example, the big win display result) is derived, the advantageous state (for example, the big win game state) is controlled,
Variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of identification information (for example, CPU103 clocked by special figure fluctuation time timer),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and restarts timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the valid period of the special figure variable time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being performed, and restarts timing of the valid period of the special figure variable time timer based on the completion of the setting confirmation state). .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the execution of the variable display of the identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
A start notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the start notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a fanfare time timer),
The start notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and restarts timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare effect is being executed, and restarts timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state while the fanfare effect is being executed. restart).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the start notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) for notifying the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period;
End notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the end notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an ending time timer),
The end notification effect timing means stops time measurement of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and restarts time measurement of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops time measurement of the effective period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the ending effect is being executed, and restarts time measurement of the effective period of the ending time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state). .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the execution of the end notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game.

(10) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (9) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the fact that the variable display result has become a special display result (for example, a small hit display result);
a special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows game media to enter in the special state;
A special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which game media can enter,
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
A special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by a small hit time timer) for timing a valid period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid,
The special timing means stops timing of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts timing of the effective period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the small winning time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while in the small winning game state, and restarts timing of the effective period of the small winning time timer based on the termination of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the progress of the game due to the execution of the control in the special state in the setting confirmation state.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 40F)
Next, the characteristic portion 40F will be described. Characteristic part 40F has a characteristic about the processing of the production control command during the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. Noise caused by static electricity or the like may occur during the setting change state or setting confirmation state. In such a case, an effect control command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 unintentionally. Processing when such an irregular command is received will be described below.
FIG. 11-1 is a diagram illustrating the effect control commands in the characteristic portion 40F in this embodiment. In FIG. 11-1, some effect control commands are added to the list of effect control commands shown in FIG. 9-8(A). The added commands are command F1XXH and command F2XXH. These commands are effect control commands that indicate the contents of winning determination results such as jackpot type determination and variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Among them, the command F1XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big win will be made and the result of judging the type of the big win among the winning determination results. Also, the command F2XXH is a variation type command indicating the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) as to which range of determination values the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within the winning determination result.

Various production control commands shown in FIG. 11-1 are transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 at a predetermined timing by the CPU 103 . By receiving various production control commands, the production control CPU 120 executes various processes. A part of the various processes executed by the production control CPU 120 based on the production control command will be explained.

(Regarding processing based on the variation pattern specification command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command, thereby performing the variation display of the decorative pattern to be displayed. In addition, in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbols, the image display device 5 may be provided with a regular small pattern in which the decoration pattern is reduced. In such a case, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command, thereby always performing the variation display of the small symbols to be displayed.

(Regarding processing based on the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command)
As patterns to be displayed in a variable manner, a decorative pattern, a special pattern, and a fourth pattern may be provided as the fourth pattern next to the normal pattern. The fourth pattern, as a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first and second special patterns) are fluctuating, is variably displayed by a constant operation in a manner always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. - 特許庁By variably displaying the fourth pattern, it is possible to recognize whether or not the decorative pattern is currently being variably displayed even if the decorative pattern is difficult to recognize, such as a performance that the performance content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or a performance that the movable body shields the whole or part of the screen of the image display device 5 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first variation start command, thereby performing the variation display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variation start command.

(Regarding the processing based on the specified command during the opening of the big prize mouth)
During the jackpot game, a round game for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to an open state (first state) advantageous to the player is executed, for example, 15 times. During the round game, the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the closed state (second state), making it difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning hole. The effect control CPU 120 controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to be in an open state based on the reception of the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of rounds during the jackpot game state by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening.

(Regarding processing based on the first start winning designation command and the second starting winning designation command)
A performance control CPU 120 operates an image display device 5 based on the reception of the first starting opening winning designation command, thereby displaying a suspension display corresponding to first suspension information stored in a performance control command receiving buffer provided in a RAM 122.例文帳に追加In addition, the performance control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second starting opening winning designation command, thereby displaying the suspension display corresponding to the second suspension information stored in the performance control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122.例文帳に追加

(Regarding processing based on symbol designation command and variation type designation command)
The effect control CPU 120 performs a win-time flash effect and a win-time pending change effect based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type designation command. The win-time flash effect is a effect in which the lamps provided around the first start opening are illuminated when a start-up win occurs. A performance control CPU 120 draws a lottery for flash performance at the time of winning on the basis of the degree of expectation for a big hit based on hold information by a symbol designating command or a variation type designating command. Then, when the player wins the lottery, the lamp emits light in a different mode depending on the degree of expectation. Concretely, the CPU 120 for performance control performs control such that red light is emitted when the degree of expectation for the big win is high, white light is emitted when the degree of expectation is not so high, and lamps are not emitted when the lottery is lost or when the winning variation is not accompanied by reach. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a flash effect at the time of winning and a sound corresponding to the degree of expectation. It should be noted that control may be performed so that only light is emitted and sound is not output.

The pending change effect at the time of winning is an effect of changing the display mode of the pending display that is displayed when the initial winning occurs to a mode different from the usual mode. A performance control CPU 120 draws a lottery for a winning pending change performance on the basis of the degree of expectation for a big hit based on the pending information by the symbol designation command and the variation type designation command. Then, when the lottery is won, the pending display at the time of winning is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. Specifically, red, green, and blue are displayed in descending order of the degree of expectation for a big hit, and when the player loses the lottery or loses without reach, the reserve display is displayed in white in a normal mode. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound corresponding to the degree of expectation along with the winning pending change effect. It should be noted that control may be performed so that only the hold change does not output the sound.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a win-time flash effect by controlling the light emission of the lamp based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type designation command. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes a win-time pending change effect by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type designation command. It should be noted that only one of the winning-time flash effect and the winning-time pending change effect may be executed. Also, when a prize is won, an effect indicating the degree of expectation may be executed only by outputting sound.

Next, the production control main processing executed in the characteristic portion 40F will be described. FIG. 11-2 is a flow chart showing the effect control main processing in the characterizing section 40F. In FIG. 11-2, the same processing as in FIG. 9-43 is assigned the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is partially omitted. In FIG. 11-2, the processes related to 207SGS413-207SGS415 and 207SGS417-207SGS424 in FIG. 9-43 are deleted, and the sub-side game stop process is added after 207SGS412.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a set value change start notification command or a set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). When the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, a setting value related notification process is executed to notify that the setting value is being changed (notification during setting value change) or that the setting value is being confirmed (notification during setting value confirmation) (207SGS412). . In the setting value related notification process, a notification image indicating that the setting change value is being changed and a notification image indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed.

After executing the set value related notification process in 207SGS412, the sub-side game stop process is executed (40FS001). In the sub-side game stop processing, when a performance control command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the performance control CPU 120 executes processing for stopping the game. Details of the sub-side game stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3.

After the sub-side game stop processing is executed in 40FS001, it is determined whether or not a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). If the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is not received (207SGS416; N), proceed to 207SGS412;

FIG. 11-3 is a flow chart showing sub-side game stop processing in the characteristic part 40F executed in 40FS001. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122 . Then, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command stored in the effect control command receiving buffer.

In the sub-side game stop processing, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first variation start command is received (40FS010). If it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS011. When it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). A performance control CPU 120 cancels the first variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby preventing execution of control for performing variable display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the first special pattern by operating the image display device 5.例文帳に追加After that, the process ends.

At 40FS011, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the second variation start command is received. If it is determined that the second fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS012. When it is determined that the second fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). A performance control CPU 120 cancels the second variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so as not to execute the control for performing the variable display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern by operating the image display device 5.例文帳に追加After that, the process ends.

At 40FS012, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received. If it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS013. When it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). A performance control CPU 120 cancels the variation pattern designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so as not to execute the control for the variable display of decorative patterns and the constant variable display of small patterns by operating the image display device 5.例文帳に追加After that, the process ends.

At 40FS013, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer, and determines whether or not the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening is received. When it is determined that the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening is not received, the process proceeds to 40FS014. When it is determined that the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening is received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). A CPU 120 for performance control can prevent execution of updating the display of the number of rounds during the big winning game state by operating the image display device 5 by canceling the designation command during opening of the big prize winning opening during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS014, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first start winning hole designation command is received. When it is determined that the first starting winning hole designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS015. When it is determined that the first starting winning hole designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). A performance control CPU 120 cancels the first start prize winning opening designation command during a setting change state or a setting confirmation state so as not to display the pending display of the first pending information by operating the image display device 5.例文帳に追加After that, the process ends.

At 40FS015, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the second start winning hole designation command is received. If it is determined that the command for specifying the second start winning opening has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the second starting winning hole designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). A performance control CPU 120 cancels the second start prize winning opening designation command during a setting change state or a setting confirmation state so as not to display the pending display of the second pending information by operating the image display device 5.例文帳に追加After that, the process ends.

At 40FS016, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the symbol designation command is received. If it is determined that the design designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the design designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 cancels the symbol designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so as not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning by controlling the light emission of the lamp. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 cancels the symbol designating command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so as not to execute the pending change performance at the time of winning by operating the image display device 5.例文帳に追加After that, the process ends.

At 40FS017, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the variation type designation command is received. If it is determined that the variation type designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS018. When it is determined that the variation type designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 cancels the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so as not to execute the win-time flash effect by controlling the light emission of the lamp. Further, the performance control CPU 120 cancels the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so as not to execute the winning pending change performance by operating the image display device 5.例文帳に追加After that, the process ends.

At 40FS018, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the test command is received. Here, the test command is a command sent directly to the effect control board 12 from a command sending device for checking the state of the screen and the state of the character provided in the game machine at the time of factory shipment. When transmitting test commands, various test commands are transmitted in a state in which a transmission device dedicated to test command transmission is connected to the effect control board 12.例文帳に追加

If it is determined in 40FS018 that the test command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS019. If it is determined that the test command has been received, control according to the test command is executed even during the setting change state or setting confirmation state (40FS020). For example, the performance control CPU 120 displays a predetermined check screen by operating the image display device 5 on the basis of receiving a test command for checking the liquid crystal of the image display device 5 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In this manner, processing based on the reception of the test command is executed even during the setting change state or setting confirmation state. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS019, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not a command other than the setting change end notification command or the setting confirmation end notification command has been received (40FS019). These commands are, for example, commands as shown in FIG. 11-1. If it is determined that these commands have not been received, the processing ends. If it is determined that these commands have been received, the received commands are discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from executing the effect by discarding these commands during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. After that, the process ends.

(Regarding the effect of the characteristic part)
As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command even if it receives the variation pattern designation command when it is controlled in the setting change state. Control based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern specification command even if it receives the variation pattern specification command when it is controlled in the setting confirmation state. Control based on the reception of the variation pattern specification command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variation start command and the second variation start command when the setting change state is controlled. In order to discard the first variation start command and the second variation start command, the control based on the reception of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variation start command and the second variation start command while being controlled in the setting confirmation state. In order to discard the first variation start command and the second variation start command, the control based on the reception of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening open specification command even if it receives the special winning opening open specification command when it is controlled in the setting change state, so it does not execute the control based on the reception of the special winning opening open specification command. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening open specification command even if it receives the special winning opening open specification command when it is controlled in the setting confirmation state, so it does not execute the control based on the reception of the special winning opening open specification command. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start winning hole designation command and the second start winning hole designation command while being controlled in the setting change state, the first start winning hole designation command and the second start winning hole designation command are discarded, so the control based on the reception of the first start winning hole designation command and the second start winning hole designation command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start winning hole designation command and the second start winning hole designation command while being controlled in the setting confirmation state, the first start winning hole designation command and the second start winning hole designation command are discarded, so the control based on the reception of the first start winning hole designation command and the second start winning hole designation command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designation command and the variation type command when being controlled in the setting change state, so control based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent malfunction of predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 .

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designation command and the variation type command when it is controlled in the setting confirmation state, so control based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent malfunction of predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 .

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command from the CPU 103, but then discards the received command like 40FS021. In this way, even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning. Further, since information is not left by discarding the received command, even if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is terminated, no erroneous command remains and no malfunction is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, setting is made to display an image informing the setting change state based on the reception of the setting value change start notification command, and setting is made to display an image informing the setting confirmation state based on the reception of the setting value confirmation start notification command. In this way, it is possible to indicate that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is being controlled, and to prevent malfunction of a predetermined presentation means such as the image display device 5 even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

As indicated by 40FS020 in FIG. 11-3, even when being controlled in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, control according to the test command is executed. In this way, the operation of the predetermined rendering means such as the image display device 5 based on the test command can be executed even when the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

(Regarding modified examples of characteristic parts)
The characteristic portion 40F has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Modifications of the characteristic portion 40F will be described below.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the effect control command receiving buffer for each command transmitted while being controlled in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, instead of sequentially analyzing the commands and discarding them one by one, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded when a predetermined condition is established. For example, an initialization command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 based on the end of the setting change state. Then, based on the reception of the initialization command, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded. Further, even in the setting confirmation state, all the commands stored in the effect control command reception buffer may be discarded based on the reception of the predetermined command.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the processing based on the performance control command is not executed even if the performance control command other than the command related to the setting change or the setting confirmation is received while being controlled in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state has been explained. However, the processing based on the fact that the production control command is received while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be internally executed. Even in such a case, since the control executed when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled has a higher priority than the control based on the reception of the other performance control command, the image in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is visually displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加As for the sound, during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the channel other than the channel for outputting the notification sound during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be muted.

In the above-described embodiment, the process of analyzing the received command is executed while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, when it is controlled in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, even if a command is received, it may not be analyzed.

In the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 and the winning lamp have been described as predetermined effect means operated by the effect control CPU 120 when the effect control command is received. However, the predetermined effect means may be anything as long as the effect control means 120 executes it based on the reception of the command. For example, an operation means operated by a player or a movable member provided in a game machine may be used as the predetermined presentation means. In such a case, when the operation means vibrates or the movable member moves due to the reception of a predetermined command, even if a command for executing these operations is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, control for discarding the command may be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, control may be performed so as not to receive any command other than the command for ending the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, such as the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command.

In the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 may be controlled to operate, a lamp provided in the game machine may emit light, or a sound may be output from a speaker. In such a case, when a command related to the lamp or speaker is received, the command may be discarded so that these effect means do not operate during the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the advance notice effect is executed based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command has been described. However, the notice performance to be executed may be executed by receiving either one of the commands, or when a command related to the variation pattern command is transmitted due to the occurrence of the starting prize, the notice performance may be executed based on the command related to the variation pattern. In such a case, even if a command related to the variation pattern is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the command should be discarded.

In the above-described embodiment, based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the advance notice lottery to be executed may be executed. Then, various advance notices may not be executed by judging that the advance notice is not executable at the timing of actually judging whether or not the advance notice can be executed. In addition, when executing a look-ahead foretelling effect in continuous variable display other than when winning a prize, lottery for foretelling may be executed based on the reception of a pattern designation command or a variation type command during a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and an advance notice based on the received command may be executed when the setting change state or setting confirmation state is finished at the timing of actually starting the notice.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the command received in the processing of 40FS021 in 40FS001 is discarded has been described. However, the timing of discarding the received command may be the timing after it is determined that the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command has been received (207SGS416; Y). In this way, when a plurality of irregular commands are received, the commands can be discarded at once.

In the above-described embodiment, once an irregular command is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, it may be restricted so that no other irregular command is received thereafter.

(Explanation relating to association of characteristic portions)
Each configuration relating to a characteristic portion may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration relating to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be described. In the present embodiment, as described in the above (description of the characteristic part 207SG), in a game machine in which the setting value can be changed, the ratio of the selected variation pattern differs according to the number of times of variation display executed after being controlled to a predetermined game state (for example, a high base state).

(Display result judgment)
FIG. 12-1 is a diagram showing an example of the display result determination table referred to in the low probability state. As shown in FIGS. 12-1 (A) to (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each setting value (1 to 6) is provided, and the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination by referring to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value (any of 1 to 6).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6. 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is in stages.

The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1, which is a random number for special figure display result determination, is set. In each display result determination table, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second), that is, the second special symbol is subject to variable display.

As shown in FIG. 12-1 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 at the time of low probability, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, if the first special symbol is subject to variable display, the probability (1/199.8) that the setting value is "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6" is low. In addition, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/199.8) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 at the time of non-variable probability, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". In addition, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big win is set to the same determination value as in the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/188.3) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 at the time of low probability, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", "2". In addition, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big win is set to the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/178.1) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4 at the time of low probability, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", "2", It is designed to win a big hit with a higher probability (1/164.7) than when it is "3". In addition, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is set to the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/164.7) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 at the time of low probability, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", "2", "3", "4". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big win, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/149.3) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 6 at the time of low probability, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", "2", "3", "4", and "5". In addition, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big win is set to the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/134.0) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at the time when the variable display is started in the low probability state, and determines that the special symbol is a big hit when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in FIGS. That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 12-1(A) to 12-1(F) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit. Determining whether or not to make a big win means to decide whether to control to a big win game state or not, but it also means to decide whether to make a stop pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B a big win pattern.

FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of the display result determination table referred to in the high probability state. As shown in FIGS. 12-2 (A) to (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each setting value (1 to 6) is provided, and the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination by referring to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value (any of 1 to 6).

As shown in FIG. 12-2 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of high probability, when the variable special symbol designating buffer is the first, that is, when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, the probability of winning a big hit is lower (1/50) than when the set value is "2", "3", "4", "5", "6". When the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big win, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/50) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 at the time of high probability, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big win, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/47.1) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 at the time of high probability, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", "2". In addition, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big win is set to the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/44.5) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4 at the time of high probability, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", "2", It is designed to win a big hit with a higher probability (1/41.2) than when it is "3". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big win, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/41.2) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 at the time of high probability, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", "2", "3", "4". In addition, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is set to the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/37.3) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 6 at the time of high probability, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1", "2", "3", "4", "5" with a higher probability (1/33.5) to win a big hit. In addition, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big win is set to the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/33.5) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at the time when the variable display is started in the high-probability state, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in FIGS. That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIGS. 14-2(A) to 14-2(F) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit.

In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 12-1 and 12-2 to determine whether or not to make a big hit, but the big hit determination table may be provided separately, and the determination of the big hit may be performed using a common table for the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer.

In this embodiment, a total of 6 set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Judgement of jackpot type)
FIG. 12-3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) stored in ROM 101, and FIG. 12-3(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) stored in ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 12-3 (A) uses the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) It is a table for determining the jackpot type. In addition, FIG. 12-3 (B) is a table for determining the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning hole (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed).

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result should be a jackpot pattern, the types of jackpots are set to "3R normal jackpot [50 times]", "3R normal jackpot [100 times]", "5R normal jackpot [50 times]", "5R normal jackpot [100 times]", and "10R normal jackpot [50 times]" based on the random number (MR2) for winning type determination. , "10R normal jackpot [100 times]", "3R probability variable jackpot [next time]", "5R probability variable jackpot [next time]", and "10R probability variable jackpot [next time]".

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing part 21TM of this embodiment will be described. In the characteristic part 21TM of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, "normal jackpot" (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and shifts to a low-probability/high-base state, and "probability-variable jackpot" in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game ends and shifts to a high-probability/high base state are set.

The big win game state by the ``3R big win'' is a normal open big win in which three rounds (so-called 3 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated, and the big win game state by the ``5R big win'' is a normal open big win in which 5 rounds (so-called 5 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly performed. Furthermore, the big win game state by the "10R big win" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "normal jackpot [50 times]" ends when the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example) or the jackpot game state is entered before the predetermined number of special games are executed. or the big win game state is reached before the special game is executed for the predetermined number of times.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of "variable probability big win [next time]" are continuously executed until another big win occurs after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is one of the types of ``3R probability variable big win [next time]'', ``5R probability variable big win [next time]'', and ``10R probability variable big win [next time]'', the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state continuously occurs without going through the normal state, so-called continuous state.

For example, the jackpot game state by the "3R normal jackpot [50 times]" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed with three rounds (so-called three rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. This is a jackpot type that ends when a jackpot game state is entered before the game is executed. The jackpot game state by ``10R probability variable jackpot [next time]'' is a normal open jackpot that is repeated 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and after the jackpot game state ends, the state shifts to a high-probability/high-base state, and the high-probability control and time-saving control that are executed thereafter continue until the big win occurs again after the jackpot game state ends. It is a jackpot type to be executed.

In addition, in the characterizing part 21TM of this embodiment, the form in which 9 types are provided as the jackpot types is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot types may be set to 8 types or less, or 10 types or more.

As shown in FIG. 12-3 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", 0 to 176 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to "3R normal jackpot [50 times]", 177 to 179 are assigned to "5R normal jackpot [50 times]", and 180 to 290 are assigned to "3R normal jackpot [50 times]". 291 to 293 are assigned to "5R probability variable jackpot [next time]", and 294 to 299 are assigned to "10R probability variable jackpot [next time]". Also, when the set value is "2" to "6", the same determination value as when the set value is "1" is assigned within the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", 0 to 134 in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to "3R normal jackpot [100 times]", 135 to 164 are assigned to "5R normal jackpot [100 times]", and 165 to 179. is assigned to "10R normal jackpot [100 times]", 180 to 203 are assigned to "3R probability variable jackpot [next time]", 204 to 263 are assigned to "5R probability variable jackpot [next time]", and 294 to 299 are assigned to "10R probability variable jackpot [next time]". Also, when the set value is "2" to "6", the same determination value as when the set value is "1" is assigned within the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when a big win occurs in the special game with the first special symbol, a common determination value is assigned in the big win type determination table regardless of which setting value is set. Similarly, when a big win occurs in the special game with the second special symbol, a common determination value is assigned in the big win type determination table regardless of which setting value is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game state may be controlled to a low probability state and a low base state (low probability / low base state: normal state), a low probability state and a high base state (low probability / high base state: time saving state), and a high probability state and a high base state (high probability / high base state: variable probability state).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big win game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, the rate of occurrence of the next big win within 50 variations (first period) after the end of the big win game when the set value is high is higher than the rate of occurrence of the next big win within 50 variations (first period) after the end of the big win game when the set value is low. In addition, when the big win game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, the ratio of entering after the 51st variation (second period) without causing the next big win after finishing the big winning game when the set value is high is lower than the ratio of entering after the 51st variation (second period) without generating the next big win after finishing the big winning game when the setting value is low.

Further, in this embodiment, when the big win game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, the rate of occurrence of the next big win within 100 variations (first period) after the end of the big win game when the set value is high is higher than the rate of occurrence of the next big win within 100 variations (first period) after the end of the big win game when the set value is low. In addition, when the game is controlled to a big win game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, the ratio of entering after 101 fluctuation (second period) without occurrence of the next big win after finishing the big win game when the setting value is high is lower than the ratio of entering after 101 fluctuation (second period) without generating the next big win after finishing the big win game when the setting value is low.

(Relationship between game state and effect symbols and effect mode)
First, the relationship between each game state (low-probability/low-base state: normal state, low-probability/high-base state: short-time state, high-probability/high-base state: probability-variable state), each performance pattern (decorative pattern, first small pattern, second small pattern), and each performance mode (normal mode, chance time, FEVERZONE) will be described in detail. In this embodiment, a pattern which is smaller than the decorative pattern and which is displayed on the upper right and upper left parts of the image display device 5 and which indicates whether or not the special pattern is variably displayed and the display result of the special pattern is called a small pattern. The variable display of the small symbols can be performed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbols, and the stop display of the small symbols can also be performed in parallel with the stop display of the special symbols. The upper left area of the screen of the image display device 5 in which the first small pattern corresponding to the first special symbol is variably displayed and statically displayed is defined as a first small pattern display area 5l1, a first small pattern display area 5c1, and a first small pattern display area 5r1 from the left, and the areas in the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 in which the second small pattern corresponding to the second special symbol is variably displayed and statically displayed are a second small pattern display area 5l2 and a second small symbol display area 5 from the left. c2, and a second small pattern display area 5r2.

The first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1 and 5r1 are smaller in display area than the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2 and 5r2 are smaller in display area than the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the first small pattern is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern, and the visibility of the second small pattern is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 12-4 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of decorative symbols, small symbols, and background images corresponding to game states. In this embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, there are a case where the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern and a case where the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern, and which of the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern is executed for the variable display of the decorative pattern differs depending on the game state.

As the game state in this embodiment, as described above, there is a low probability / low base state (sometimes referred to as a normal state), a low probability / high base state (sometimes called a time saving state), and a high probability / high base state (sometimes referred to as a variable probability state). And, when the game state is controlled to (i) low probability/low base state (normal state), the decoration design corresponds to the first special design. On the other hand, when the game state is controlled to (ii) a low-probability/high-base state (time-saving state) or (iii) a high-probability/high-base state (variable probability state), the decoration pattern corresponds to the second special pattern in either case.

That is, in the case of (i), the decorative design and the first small design are information corresponding to the variable display of the first special design, and the second small design is information corresponding to the variable display of the second special design. In the following description, "Special Figure 1" in the figure indicates the first special symbol, and "Special Figure 2" in the figure indicates the second special symbol.

FIG. 12-4(A) shows an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when the gaming state is the low probability/low base state (normal state), the decoration pattern and the first small pattern correspond to the first special pattern, and the second small pattern corresponds to the second special pattern. In addition, FIG. 12-1 (B) shows an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when the gaming state is the low probability/high base state (time saving state), the decoration pattern and the second small pattern correspond to the second special pattern, and the first small pattern corresponds to the first special pattern. Also, FIGS. 12-4 (C1) and (C2) respectively show the gaming state in the high probability/high base state (probability variable state), the decoration pattern and the second small pattern corresponding to the second special design, and the first small design corresponding to the first special design.

As shown in FIG. 12-4, at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, there is provided a first reserved display area 21TM011 that displays the first reserved memory number (0 to 4 first reserved displays 21TM010).At the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, a second reserved display area 21TM021 that displays the second reserved memory number (0 to 4 second reserved displays 21TM020) is provided. In addition, an active display area 21TM031 for displaying an active display 21TM030, which is information corresponding to the variable display of the decoration pattern being executed and the information corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern being executed, is provided at the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, a first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 that displays the first reserved memory number is provided on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 (above the first reserved display area 21TM011), and a second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025 that displays the second reserved memory number is provided on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5 (above the second reserved memory number 21TM021). As described above, the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1 and 5r1 for displaying the first small patterns corresponding to the first special symbols, and the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2 and 5r2 for displaying the second small patterns corresponding to the second special symbols.

Here, in the first reserved display area 21TM011, the number of objects (round images) corresponding to the first reserved storage number is displayed, and in the second reserved display area 21TM021, the number of objects (round images) corresponding to the second reserved storage number are displayed. On the other hand, the first reserved memory number is displayed numerically in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015, and the second reserved memory number is displayed numerically in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025. The display range of the object in the first reserved display area 21TM011 is wider than the numerical display range in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015, and the first reserved memory number is displayed in the first reserved display area 21TM011 with higher visibility than the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015. Further, the display range of the object in the second reserved display area 21TM021 is wider than the numerical display range in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025, and the second reserved memory number is displayed in the second reserved display area 21TM021 with higher visibility than the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025.

In addition, in the first reserved display area 21TM011, when the gaming state is (i) low probability/low base state (normal state), the number of objects corresponding to the first reserved memory number is displayed, but when the gaming state is (ii) low probability/high base state (time saving state) or (iii) high probability/high base state (variable probability state), the objects themselves are not displayed. Thus, objects corresponding to the first reserved memory number are displayed in the first reserved display area 21TM011 according to the game state. On the other hand, the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 displays the first reserved memory number regardless of the game state (even when the game state is any one of (ii) to (iii)). Therefore, even when the player is in a game state (any of (ii) to (iii)) in which no object is displayed in the first reserved display area 21TM011, the player can grasp the first reserved memory number by confirming the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015.

In addition, in the second reserved display area 21TM021, when the game state is (ii) low probability/high base state (time saving state) or (iii) high probability/high base state (variable probability state), the number of objects corresponding to the number of second reserved memories is displayed, but when the game state is (i) low probability/low base state (normal state), the objects themselves are not displayed. Thus, objects corresponding to the second reserved memory number are displayed in the second reserved display area 21TM021 according to the game state. On the other hand, the second reserved memory count special display area 21TM025 displays the second reserved memory count regardless of the game state (even when the game state is (i)). Therefore, even in the game state (i) in which no object is displayed in the second reserved display area 21TM021, the player can grasp the second reserved memory number by confirming the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025.

Also, in the active display area 21TM031, an object corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol among the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed regardless of the game state.

The example shown in FIG. 12-4(A) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state). When the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the production mode is the normal mode, a "daytime image" representing a daytime landscape including the sun and mountains is displayed as the background image of the decorative design.

In this example, when the first reserved memory number is 3 and the second reserved memory number is 0, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. In addition, "3" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015, "0" is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025, and three first reserved displays 21TM010 are displayed in the first reserved display area 21TM011. Also, in the active display area 21TM031, an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of the first special symbol) is displayed. In addition, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is performed, in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1 and 5r1 the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is performed, and in response to the fact that the result of the variable display of the previously executed (most recently executed) second special symbol was "missing", the second small symbol display area 5l. In 2, 5c2, and 5r2, the combination (in this example, "245") of the second small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbols) indicating that the variable display result is "miss" is continuously displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 12-4(B) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (time saving state). When the game state is controlled to the low probability/high base state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode of "chance time". When the performance mode is ``chance time'', an ``evening image'' representing an evening landscape including the evening sky and mountains is displayed as a background image of the decoration pattern, and the characters ``chance time'' are displayed on the upper part of the screen.

In this example, when the first reserved memory number is 0 and the second reserved memory number is 3, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015, "3" is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025, and three second reserved displays 21TM020 are displayed in the second reserved display area 21TM021. Also, in the active display area 21TM031, an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of the second special symbol) is displayed. Also, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is performed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol, which is a sub-symbol) is performed. In the pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1, the combination ("134" in this example) of the first small symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol) indicating that the variation display result is "loss" is continuously displayed, and the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is displayed in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2.

FIGS. 12-4 (C1) and (C2) are diagrams showing screens of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/high base state (variable probability state), respectively. As shown in FIG. 12-4 (C1), when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/high base state, after the gaming state shifts to the high probability/high base state, until the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times or 100 times), or until the jackpot game state is reached before the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed, the production mode is "chance" in the same manner as when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (time saving state). controlled by time. As described above, when the production mode is ``chance time'', the ``evening image'' representing the evening scenery including the evening sky and mountains is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the characters ``chance time'' are displayed at the top of the screen.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (C2), after the game state shifts to the high accuracy/high base state, when the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example) without entering the jackpot game state, the effect mode "FEVERZONE" is controlled. When the performance mode is ``FEVERZONE'', a ``typhoon image'' showing a typhoon landscape including clouds, wind and rain is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the characters ``FEVERZONE'' are displayed in the center of the screen.

In the present embodiment, a period from when the gaming state shifts to a high probability/high base state (probability variable state) until a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example), or until a big hit gaming state occurs before the special game is executed a predetermined number of times, is referred to as a first period. In addition, the period (51 times or later or 101 times or later in this example) after the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example) without entering the jackpot game state after the game state shifts to the high probability/high base state is referred to as a second period.

In addition, after the game state shifts to the low-probability/high-base state (time-saving state), the period until the special-games are executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example), or until the big-hit game state is reached before the special-games are executed for the predetermined number of times, is referred to as the first period, as in the case of the high-probability/high-base state. On the other hand, after the game state shifts to the low probability/high base state (time saving state), the period after the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example) without becoming a big hit game state (In this example, the period after 51 times or after 101 times, and the period after the transition to the low probability/low base state (normal state)) is not referred to as the second period.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-4 (C1), when the first reserved memory number is 0 and the second reserved memory number is 3, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015, "3" is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025, and three second reserved displays 21TM020 are displayed in the second reserved display area 21TM021. Also, in the active display area 21TM031, an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of the second special symbol) is displayed. Also, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is performed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol, which is a sub-symbol) is performed. In the pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1, the combination ("134" in this example) of the first small symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol) indicating that the variation display result is "loss" is continuously displayed, and the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is displayed in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-4 (C2), when the first reserved memory number is 0 and the second reserved memory number is 3, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Also, "0" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015, and "3" is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025. Also, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is performed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol, which is a sub-symbol) is performed. In the pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1, the combination ("134" in this example) of the first small symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol) indicating that the variation display result is "loss" is continuously displayed, and the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is displayed in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2.

In this embodiment, during the period (second period) during which the effect mode is controlled to "FEVERZONE", the second pending display 21TM020 is not displayed in the second pending display area 21TM021 even when the number of second pending memories is 1 or more. Further, even when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern (variable display of the second special pattern) is not displayed in the active display area 21TM031, and the square object itself indicating the active display area 21TM031 is not displayed.

This is because, in the second period, the variation display (high-speed variation) with an extremely short variation display period is continuously performed until the variation display (variation display according to the variation pattern of the direct jackpot) is performed in which the display result is "big win". When such high-speed fluctuations are continuously executed, it is necessary to pay attention to the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R where the variable display of decorative patterns (information corresponding to the second special pattern) is executed in order to make the player recognize the display result of each variable display (high-speed fluctuation). Therefore, in the second period, the pending display and the active display are not displayed, and the player's attention is directed to the display result of the currently executed variable display (high-speed fluctuation).

It should be noted that, without being limited to such a form, when the production mode is "chance time" (in the first period), the pending display and the active display are not displayed, and when the production mode is "FEVERZONE" (in the second period), the pending display and the active display may be displayed.

(Game flow)
FIG. 12-5 is an explanatory diagram showing the game flow of this embodiment. As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of production modes (normal mode, chance time, FEVERZONE) corresponding to the game state are provided, and the production control CPU 120 can control the plurality of production modes.

When the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state) and the performance mode is controlled to the normal mode, the variable display is started, and when the display result of the variable display becomes any one of ``3R normal big win'', ``5R normal big win'', ``10R normal big win'', ``3R probability variable big win'', ``5R probability variable big win'' and ``10R probability variable big win'', the game is controlled to the big win game state. When the result of the variable display is any one of ``3R normal big win'', ``5R normal big win'' and ``10R normal big win'', the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time reduction state) after the big win game state is finished, and the performance mode is controlled to ``chance time''. When the result of the variable display is any one of ``3R probability variable big win'', ``5R probability variable big win'' and ``10R probability variable big win'', the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state) after the big win game state is finished, and the performance mode is controlled to ``chance time''.

When the game state is controlled to the low-probability/high-base state (time-saving state) and the performance mode is controlled to the ``chance time'', the variable display is started, and when the display result of the variable display becomes any one of ``3R normal jackpot'', ``5R normal jackpot'', ``10R normal jackpot'', ``3R probability variable jackpot'', ``5R probability variable jackpot'', and ``10R probability variable jackpot'', the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. be done. When the result of the variable display is any one of ``3R normal big win'', ``5R normal big win'' and ``10R normal big win'', the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time reduction state) after the big win game state is finished, and the performance mode is controlled to ``chance time''. When the result of the variable display is any one of ``3R probability variable big win'', ``5R probability variable big win'' and ``10R probability variable big win'', the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state) after the big win game state is finished, and the performance mode is controlled to ``chance time''.

When the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability variable state) and the performance mode is controlled to ``chance time'', the variable display is started, and when the display result of the variable display becomes any one of ``3R normal big win'', ``5R normal big win'', ``10R normal big win'', ``3R probability variable big win'', ``5R probability variable big win'', and ``10R probability variable big win'', control is made to the big win game state. be done. When the result of the variable display is any one of ``3R normal big win'', ``5R normal big win'' and ``10R normal big win'', the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time reduction state) after the big win game state is finished, and the performance mode is controlled to ``chance time''. When the result of the variable display is any one of ``3R probability variable big win'', ``5R probability variable big win'' and ``10R probability variable big win'', the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state) after the big win game state is finished, and the performance mode is controlled to ``chance time''.

When a game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time saving state) and a performance mode is controlled to a ``chance time'' and a big win does not occur until a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example) of variable display is executed, the game state is shifted from a low probability/high base state (time saving state) to a low probability/low base state (normal state), and the performance mode is shifted from chance time to a normal mode.

Specifically, after the game state is controlled to a low probability / high base state (time saving state) (after the production mode is controlled to "chance time") before the variable display of the special symbol for a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) is completed, the variable display result of the special symbol is "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", "10R normal jackpot", "3R variable jackpot", "5R variable jackpot", and "10R. When none of the display results of "probability variable big win" is obtained, a suggestion performance (in this example, a continuous challenge performance of a failure mode) suggesting that the game state shifts to a low probability/low base state (or that the game state is a high probability/high base state and the high probability/high base state is maintained) is executed in response to the variable display of the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th time). Then, at the timing when the variable display of a predetermined number of times (50th or 100th time) is completed, the game state falls from the low probability/high base state (time saving state) to the low probability/low base state (normal state), and the performance mode changes to the normal mode from the next variable display.

When a game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability variable state) and a performance mode is controlled to a ``chance time'' and a big win does not occur until a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example) variable display is executed, the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) is continued and the performance mode is shifted from ``chance time'' to ``FEVERZONE''.

Specifically, after the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability variable state) (after the production mode is controlled to "chance time") before the variable display of the special symbol is completed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times), the variable display result of the special symbol is "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", "10R normal jackpot", "3R probability variable jackpot", "5R probability variable jackpot", and "10R. When none of the display results of "probability variable jackpot" is obtained, a suggestive performance (in this example, a continuous challenge performance of a success mode) suggesting that the game state is a high probability/high base state and the high probability/high base state is maintained (or that the game state shifts to a low probability/low base state) is executed in response to the variable display of the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th time). Even after the variable display of the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th time) ends, the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) continues, and the production mode becomes "FEVERZONE" from the next variable display.

In this way, after the game state is controlled to the low-probability/high-base state (time-saving state), the performance mode is controlled to "chance time" until the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example), or until the big win game state is reached before the special game is executed the predetermined number of times. In addition, after the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability variable state), the performance mode is controlled to ``chance time'' until the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example), or until the jackpot game state is reached before the special game is executed the predetermined number of times.

That is, when the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (time-saving state) and when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state) after the end of the jackpot game, the performance mode is controlled to ``chance time'' in either game state, so that the common ``evening image'' is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the common characters ``chance time'' are displayed on the upper part of the screen. According to such a configuration, it is possible to share the performance of the first period in the case where the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (time saving state) and the case where the game state is controlled to the high probability/high base state (variable probability state), and it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the currently controlled game state. In addition, even when the game state is controlled to the low-probability/low-base state (time-saving state), by giving the player an expectation that the game state is the high-probability/high-base state (variable-probability state), the amusement of the game when the game state is the low-probability/low-base state (time-saving state) can be improved.

(Variation pattern determination)
In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is determined as one of the plurality of types described above according to the pre-determined result.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a winning variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result is ``loss'' and a big win variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result is ``big hit'' are prepared in advance.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table referred to when the game state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (time saving state) and the variation pattern determination table referred to when the game state is controlled to the high probability/high base state (variation probability state) will be described. For each game state, a winning variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result is ``loss'' and a big win variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result is ``big win'' are prepared in advance.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss, a predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value to each of the fluctuation patterns of "non-reach loss (high-speed fluctuation)", "non-reach loss (shortening fluctuation)", "normal reach loss", and "super reach loss".

In the present embodiment, the variation display period is 1 second when the variation pattern is determined to be "no reach (high-speed variation)", the variation display period is 5 seconds when the variation pattern is determined to be "no reach (shortening variation)", the variation display period is 30 seconds when the variation pattern is determined to be "normal reach", and the variation display period is 60 seconds when the variation pattern is determined to be "super reach".

The variation pattern of ``non-reach failure (high-speed variation)'' and the variation pattern of ``non-reach failure (shortening variation)'' are variation patterns in which a combination of ornamental patterns indicating that the variable display result is ``loss'' after variable display is started is stopped and displayed. Here, the fluctuation display period when it is determined as a fluctuation pattern of "non -reaching (shortening)" is 5 seconds, while the fluctuation display period when it is determined as a "non -reached (high -speed fluctuation)" fluctuation pattern is 1 second, so if there is a storage memory, the fluctuation pattern and judgment of "non -reached (high -speed fluctuation)". When it is determined, it is possible to digest the hold memory at a shorter interval than when it is determined as a fluctuation pattern of "non -reaching (shortening fluctuation)".

In the variation pattern determination table for big win, a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each of the variation patterns of the ``direct big win'', the ``normal reach big win'' variation pattern and the ``super reach big win'' variation pattern.

In this embodiment, the variation display period is 10 seconds when the variation pattern is determined to be a "direct hit", the variation display period is 30 seconds when the variation pattern is determined to be a "normal reach jackpot", and the variation display period is 60 seconds when the variation pattern is determined to be a "super reach jackpot".

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of ``direct jackpot'' is a variation pattern in which a combination of decorative symbols showing that the result of variation display is ``jackpot'' is displayed in a stopped state without going through establishment of ready-to-win after the start of variation display. Since the performance for realizing the ready-to-win is not executed, the variable display period when it is determined as the variation pattern of the "direct big win" is shorter than the variable display period for the other variation patterns ("normal-to-win big win", "super ready-to-win big win") for executing the performance for establishing the ready-to-win when the variable display result is the "big win".

In the present embodiment, in the variation patterns associated with normal reach (“normal reach loss” and “normal reach jackpot”), after the reach state is established, the final display result is fixed and stopped without executing a super reach effect (battle effect) to be described later.

In the present embodiment, in the variation patterns accompanied by super reach ("super reach failure" and "super reach big win"), after the reach state is established, as a super reach performance, a battle performance is executed to inform whether or not a big win is won by a battle between an ally character and an enemy character. When the final display result is ``big hit'' (when the big winning pattern is fixed and stopped), a performance is performed in which the ally character wins over the enemy character, and when the final display result is ``losing'' (when the winning pattern is fixed and stopped), a presentation is performed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character.

FIG. 12-6(A) is a fluctuation pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final fluctuation]. This first period [excluding the final variation] refers to the first period (the period of 50 special games after the variation display result of the first special symbol is "big hit", or the period of 100 special games after the variation display result of the second special symbol is "big hit") to the final variation of the first period (in this example, the 50th special game after the variation display result of the first special symbol is "big hit", or the second special The period excluding the 100th special game after the variable display result of the symbol is a "big hit" (that is, the period of 49 special symbol games after the variable display result of the first special symbol is a "big hit", or the period of 99 special symbol games after the variable display result of the second special symbol is a "big hit"). Here, in FIG. 12-6 (A), FIG. 12-6 (A1) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for losing, and FIG. 12-6 (A2) is a diagram showing an example of a big hit variation pattern determination table.

That is, in the first period [excluding the final variation] when the gaming state is the low probability / high base state (time saving state), and in the first period [excluding the final variation] when the gaming state is the high probability / high base state (variable probability state), when the determination result at the start of variation is determined to be "loss", the variation pattern is determined based on the common [loss] variation pattern determination table (Fig. 12-6 (A1)) in any gaming state. In addition, when the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] when the game status is low accuracy / high -base state (time -saving state), and the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] when the gaming status is highly accurate / high -base state (probable state). The fluctuation pattern will be determined based on the fluctuation pattern judgment table (Fig. 12-6 (A2)).

As shown in FIG. 12-6 (A1), in the variation pattern determination table for loss, when the setting value is "1", 1 to 750 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the "non-reach loss (shortening fluctuation)" variation pattern, 751 to 900 are assigned to the "normal reach loss" variation pattern, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach loss" variation pattern. assigned. In addition, when the set value is any of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", as in the case where the set value is "1", 1 to 750 out of the range 1 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value are assigned to the "non-reach deviation (shortening fluctuation)" variation pattern, 751 to 900 are assigned to the "normal reach deviation" variation pattern, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the "super It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "reach out of reach". In this way, in the first period excluding the final variation, when the display result is "no", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of variation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 12-6 (A2), in the big hit variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is "1", 1 to 20 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the "direct jackpot" variation pattern, 21 to 50 are assigned to the "normal reach jackpot" variation pattern, and 51 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach jackpot" variation pattern. In addition, when the set value is any of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", similarly to the case where the set value is "1", 1 to 20 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the "direct hit" variation pattern, 21 to 50 are assigned to the "normal reach jackpot" variation pattern, and 51 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach jackpot" variation. assigned to the pattern. In this way, in the first period excluding the final variation, when the display result is "big hit", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of variation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

FIG. 12-6(B) is a variation pattern determination table for the first period [final variation]. This first period [final variation] is the final variation of the above-described first period (in this example, the 50th special symbol game after the variation display result of the first special symbol is "big hit", or the 100th special symbol game after the variation display result of the second special symbol is "big hit"). Here, in FIG. 12-6 (B), FIG. 12-6 (B1) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for losing, and FIG. 12-6 (B2) is a diagram showing an example of a big hit variation pattern determination table.

In other words, when the final variation in the first period when the gaming state is the low probability / high base state (time saving state) and the final variation in the first period when the gaming state is the high probability / high base state (variable probability state), when the determination result at the start of the fluctuation is determined to be “missing”, the variation pattern is determined based on the common [for losing] variation pattern determination table (FIG. 12-6 (B1)) in any gaming state. In addition, when the final variation in the first period when the gaming state is the low probability/high base state (time saving state) and the final variation in the first period when the gaming state is the high probability/high base state (variable probability state), when the determination result at the start of the variation is determined to be "big win", the variation pattern is determined based on the common [for big win] variation pattern determination table (Fig. 12-6 (B2)) in any gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 12-6 (B1), in the variation pattern determination table for loss, when the set value is "1", 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of "suggestive effect (loss)" described later. Also, in any of the set values "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", as in the case of the set value "1", 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the "suggestive effect (missing)" variation pattern. In this way, when the display result is "mismatch" in the final variation of the first period, a common variation pattern is selected regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 12-6 (B2), in the big hit variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is "1", 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of "suggestive effect (big hit)". Also, in any of the set values ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'' and ``6'', as in the case of the set value ``1'', 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of ``suggestive performance (big hit)''. In this way, when the display result is "big hit" in the final variation of the first period, a common variation pattern is selected regardless of the set value.

The suggestive performance is a performance suggesting a transition from the first period to the second period (continuing the high base state of the game state), and is an effect notifying whether or not to shift from the first period to the second period (whether the high base state of the game state continues). In this embodiment, as shown in later-described FIGS. 12-13, a continuous challenge effect is executed as a suggestive effect.

In the continuous challenge effect, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 to be described later, the characters "continuous challenge" and an operation prompting display 21TM150 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character 21TM300 is displayed in the lower right part of the screen. The operation prompting display 21TM150 includes an image simulating the push button 31B and a downward arrow displayed above the image simulating the push button 31B, and is a display prompting the user to press the push button 31B.

When the currently controlled game state is a low-probability/high-base state (time-saving state), in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is being displayed, a continuous challenge performance in a failure mode is executed, characters "failure" and an object "?" The characters ``failure'' and an object indicating ``?'' suggesting that the continuous challenge performance has failed are displayed on the image display device 5, thereby informing the player that the game state is shifted to a low-probability/low-base state (normal state).

When the currently controlled game state is a high-probability/high-base state (probability-variable state), in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is being displayed, a continuous challenge performance of a success mode is executed, the characters "success" and the object "○" are displayed in the center part of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character 21TM300B is displayed in the lower right part of the screen. The character "success" and the object indicating "○" indicating the success of the continuous challenge performance are displayed on the image display device 5, thereby informing the player that the continuous challenge performance is successful and the game state continues with the high probability/high base state (probability variable state).

FIG. 12-6(C) is a variation pattern determination table for the second period. As described above, the second period is a period (51st or 101st in this example) after the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 in this example) without entering the jackpot game state after the game state shifts to the high probability/high base state. Here, in FIG. 12-6 (C), FIG. 12-6 (C1) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for losing, and FIG. 12-6 (C2) is a diagram showing an example of a big hit variation pattern determination table.

That is, in the second period when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (probability variable state), when the determination result at the start of variation is determined to be "loss", the variation pattern is determined based on the [loss] variation pattern determination table (Fig. 12-6 (C1)). Further, in the second period when the game state is the high probability/high base state (probability variable state), when the determination result at the start of variation is determined to be "big win", the variation pattern is determined based on the [for big win] variation pattern determination table (Fig. 12-6 (C2)). On the other hand, if the gaming state is low probability / high base state (time saving state), the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the second period (FIGS. 12-6 (C1), (C2)).

As shown in FIG. 12-6 (C1), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss, when the setting value is "1", 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach loss (high-speed fluctuation)". Also, when the set value is any of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", similarly to the case where the set value is "1", 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach deviation (high speed fluctuation)". As described above, when the display result is "mismatch" in the second period, a common variation pattern is selected regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 12-6 (C2), in the big hit variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is "1", 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the "direct jackpot" variation pattern. Also, in any of the set values ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'' and ``6'', in the same way as when the set value is ``1'', 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of ``direct jackpot''. Thus, in the second period, when the display result is "big hit", a common variation pattern is selected regardless of the set value.

(Variation pattern determination table referenced after special figure 1 jackpot)
FIG. 12-7 (A1) is a time chart showing the relationship between the variation pattern determination table referred to when the variation display result of the first special symbol is one of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", and the game state shifts to a low probability/high base state (time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the execution timing of each effect. FIG. 12-7 (A2) is a time chart showing the relationship between the variation pattern determination table referred to when the variation display result of the first special symbol is any of "3R probability variable big hit", "5R probability variable big hit", and "10R probability variable big hit", and the game state shifts to a high probability / high base state (variable probability state) after the end of the big win game, and the execution timing of each effect.

As shown in FIG. 12-7 (A1), when the variable display result of the first special symbol is any one of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", after the jackpot game ends, the game state shifts to a low probability/high base state (time saving state).

The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol executed when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (time saving state) in the period of 49 times of the special symbol game after the variation display result of the first special symbol becomes "big hit" is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final variation] shown in FIG. 12-6 (A).

Next, in the 50th special symbol game after the variation display result of the first special symbol is "big hit", the variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol executed when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / high base state (time saving state) is determined based on the variation pattern determination table of the first period [final variation] shown in FIG. 12-6 (B). At this time, the production control CPU 120 executes a continuous challenge production in a failure mode. After the variable display ends, the game state shifts to a low-probability/low-base state (normal state).

Next, in the 51st and later special symbol games after the result of the variation display of the first special symbol is "big win", the variation pattern of the variation display of the first special symbol executed when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state) is determined based on the variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 9-23 and 9-24.

As shown in FIG. 12-7 (A2), when the variable display result of the first special symbol is any one of "3R probability variable big hit", "5R probability variable big hit", and "10R probability variable big hit", the game state shifts to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state) after the end of the big hit game.

The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol executed when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/high base state (probability variation state) in the period of 49 times of the special symbol game after the variation display result of the first special symbol becomes "big hit" is determined based on the variation pattern determination table of the first period [excluding the final variation] shown in FIG. 12-6 (A).

Next, in the 50th special symbol game after the variation display result of the second special symbol is "big hit", the variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol executed when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / high base state (probability variation state) is determined based on the variation pattern determination table of the first period [final variation] shown in FIG. 12-6 (B). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the continuous challenge effect of the success mode. Then, even after the variable display ends, the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) is continued.

Next, in the 51st special symbol game after the result of the variation display of the first special symbol is "big hit", the variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol executed when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state) is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the second period shown in FIG. 12-6 (C).

(Variation pattern determination table referenced after special figure 2 jackpot)
FIG. 12-8 (B1) is a time chart showing the relationship between the variation pattern determination table referred to when the variation display result of the second special symbol is one of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", and the game state shifts to a low probability/high base state (time reduction state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the execution timing of each effect. FIG. 12-8 (B2) is a time chart showing the relationship between the variation pattern determination table referred to when the variation display result of the second special symbol is any of "3R probability variable big hit", "5R probability variable big hit", and "10R probability variable big hit", and the game state shifts to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state) after the end of the big win game, and the execution timing of each effect.

As shown in FIG. 12-8 (B1), when the variation display result of the second special symbol is any one of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", after the jackpot game ends, the game state shifts to a low probability/high base state (time saving state).

The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol executed when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (time saving state) in the period of 99 times of the special symbol game after the variation display result of the second special symbol becomes "big hit" is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final variation] shown in FIG. 12-6 (A).

Next, in the 100th special symbol game after the variation display result of the second special symbol is "big hit", the variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol executed when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / high base state (time saving state) is determined based on the variation pattern determination table of the first period [final variation] shown in FIG. 12-6 (B). At this time, the production control CPU 120 executes a continuous challenge production in a failure mode. After the variable display ends, the game state shifts to a low-probability/low-base state (normal state).

Next, in the 101st and later special symbol games after the result of the variation display of the second special symbol is "big hit", the variation pattern of the variation display of the first special symbol executed when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state) is determined based on the variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 9-23 and 9-24.

As shown in FIG. 12-8 (B2), when the variable display result of the second special symbol is any one of "3R probability variable big hit", "5R probability variable big hit", and "10R probability variable big hit", the game state shifts to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state) after the end of the big win game.

The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol executed when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/high base state (probability variation state) in the period of 99 times of the special symbol game after the variation display result of the second special symbol becomes "big hit" is determined based on the variation pattern determination table of the first period [excluding the final variation] shown in FIG. 12-6 (A).

Next, in the 100th special symbol game after the result of the variation display of the second special symbol is "big hit", the variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol executed when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/high base state (probability variation state) is determined based on the variation pattern determination table of the first period [final variation] shown in FIG. 12-6 (B). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the continuous challenge effect of the success mode. Then, even after the variable display ends, the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) is continued.

Next, in the 101st and later special symbol games after the result of the variation display of the second special symbol is "big hit", the variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol executed when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state) is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the second period shown in FIG. 12-6 (C).

As shown in FIG. 12-6, the deviation pattern determination table for each period (first period [excluding final fluctuation], first period [final fluctuation], and second period) is common regardless of set values.

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "loss", the fluctuation pattern "non-reach failure (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds), which is a longer variation display period than "normal reach failure" (fluctuation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach failure" (fluctuation display period is 60 seconds) is selected. can be calculated by

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "loss", the percentage of selecting "normal reach failure" (variation display period is 30 seconds) as the variation pattern is [{(900−751+1)/997}×100=15%] because 751 to 900 out of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "normal reach failure".

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variable display result is "loss", the percentage of selecting "super reach failure" (variation display period is 60 seconds) as the variation pattern is [{(997−901+1)/997}×100=10%], since 901 to 997 out of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach failure".

Therefore, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the variable display result is "loss", the rate of selecting "normal reach failure" (variation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach failure" (variation display period is 60 seconds), which is a longer variation display period than "non-reach failure (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds), is [15+10=25%].

Further, in the second period, when the variable display result is "loss", the rate of selection of "normal reach failure" (variation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach failure" (variation display period is 60 seconds), which is a variable display period longer than "non-reach failure (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds) as the variation pattern, can be calculated based on the second period failure variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 12-6 (C1)).

In the second period, when the variable display result is "loss", the rate at which "normal reach failure" (variation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach failure" (variation display period is 60 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern is [(0/997) x 100 = 0%] because none of the determination values in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 is assigned.

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the variable display result is "loss", the rate of selecting "normal reach failure" (fluctuation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach failure" (fluctuation display period is 60 seconds), which is a variable display period longer than "non-reach failure (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds), is [15 + 10 = 25%]. , the rate of selecting "normal reach loss" (variation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach loss" (variation display period is 60 seconds), which is longer than "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds), is [(0/997)×100=0%]. In this way, in the first period, the rate of selecting "normal reach failure" (variation display period of 30 seconds) or "super reach failure" (variation display period of 60 seconds), which is a longer variable display period than "non-reach failure (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period of 5 seconds), is higher than in the second period.

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "loss", the fluctuation display period shorter than the "non-reach failure (shortened variation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds) as the variation pattern.

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "loss", the ratio of selecting "non-reach loss (high-speed fluctuation)" (variation display period is 1 second) as the fluctuation pattern is [(0/997) x 100 = 0%] because no judgment value is assigned from the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the second period, the rate of selection of "non-reach failure (short fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds), which is a variable display period shorter than "non-reach failure (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds), can be calculated based on the second period failure variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 12-6 (C1)).

In the second period, when the variable display result is "loss", the ratio of selecting "non-reach failure (high-speed fluctuation)" (variation display period is 1 second) as the variation pattern is [{(997−1+1)/997}×100=100%], since 1 to 997 out of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the "non-reach failure (high-speed fluctuation)" variation pattern.

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "loss", the rate of selecting "non-reach failure (fast fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 1 second), which is a shorter variation display period than "non-reach failure (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds), is [0%]. Seconds), the rate of selecting “non-reach out (fast fluctuation)” (with a fluctuation display period of 1 second) is [100%]. Thus, in the second period, the rate of selecting the "non-reach out (fast fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period of 1 second), which is a shorter fluctuation display period than the "non-reach out of reach (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period of 5 seconds), is higher than in the first period.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 12-6, the big hit variation pattern determination table for each period (first period [excluding final variation], first period [final variation], and second period) is common regardless of the set value.

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "big hit", the variation pattern "super reach big hit" (variation display period is 30 seconds), which is a longer variation display period than the "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds).

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is a "big hit", the percentage of selection of the variation pattern "super reach jackpot" (variation display period is 60 seconds) is [{(997-51+1)/997} x 100 = 95%] because 51 to 997 out of the MR3 judgment value range of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach jackpot".

Also, in the second period, when the variation display result is "big hit", the variation pattern "super reach big hit" (variation display period is 30 seconds), which is a longer variation display period than "normal reach big hit" (variation display period is 30 seconds), is selected.

In the second period, when the variation display result is "big hit", the ratio of selecting "super reach big win" (variation display period is 60 seconds) as the variation pattern is [(0/997) x 100 = 0%] because none of the determination values in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 is assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach big win".

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "big hit", the rate of selecting "super reach jackpot" (variation display period is 60 seconds), which is a variation display period longer than "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds), is [95%]. The rate of selecting the longest “super reach jackpot” (with a variable display period of 60 seconds) is [0%]. Thus, in the first period, the rate of selecting the "super reach jackpot" (variation display period of 60 seconds), which is a longer fluctuation display period than the "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period of 30 seconds), is higher than in the second period.

Also, in the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "jackpot", the variation display period shorter than the "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds) as the variation pattern "direct jackpot" (variation display period is 10 seconds) is selected.

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is a "jackpot", the percentage of selection of the variation pattern "direct jackpot" (variation display period is 10 seconds) is [{(20−1+1)/997}×100=2%] because 1 to 20 out of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the "direct jackpot" variation pattern.

Also, in the second period, when the variation display result is a "big hit", the variation pattern "direct jackpot" (variation display period is 10 seconds), which is a variation display period shorter than the "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds), is selected.

In the second period, when the variation display result is a "big hit", the ratio of selecting the "direct jackpot" (variation display period of 10 seconds) as the variation pattern is [{(997-1+1)/997}×100=100%] because none of the determination values in the range 1 to 997 of the MR3 determination value is assigned to the "direct jackpot" variation pattern.

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "big win", the rate of selecting "direct jackpot" (variation display period is 10 seconds), which is a variation display period shorter than "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds), is [2%]. The rate at which "Direct Jackpot" (variation display period is 10 seconds) is selected is [100%]. In this way, in the second period, the rate of selection of the ``direct jackpot'' (variation display period of 10 seconds), which is a variation display period shorter than the ``normal reach jackpot'' (variation display period of 30 seconds), is higher than in the first period.

Thus, in the first period [excluding the final variation], the rate of selection of variation patterns with a variation display period longer than a predetermined variation display period is higher than in the second period, and in the second period, the rate of selection of variation patterns with a variation display period shorter than the predetermined variation display period is higher than in the first period [excluding the final variation].

In addition, in the gaming machine in which the setting can be changed in the present embodiment, when the game state is the high probability/high base state, if a high set value (for example, the set value is "4" to "6") is set, the probability of winning a big hit is higher (1/41.2 to 1/33.5) than when the set value is set to a low set value (for example, "1" to "3"). Therefore, when a high set value is set, the number of fluctuations required until winning the next big win is less than when a low set value is set, and the next big win is won at short time intervals. As a result, the probability that the interval between occurrences of big wins will be excessively shortened increases, so that the gambling nature becomes excessively high, and a problem arises in that a sound gaming nature cannot be realized.

However, in this embodiment, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the ratio of selecting a variation pattern having a variation display period longer than a predetermined variation display period is higher than in the second period. Thus, even when a high set value (for example, the set value is set to ``4'' to ``6''), when the game state is a high probability/high base state, the time interval for winning a big win can be relatively lengthened (prevented from being excessively shortened), gambling property is prevented from becoming excessively high, and sound game performance can be realized.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the high probability/high base state, if the set value is set to a low value (for example, the set value is "1" to "3"), the probability of winning the jackpot is lower (1/50 to 1/44.5) than if the set value is set to a high set value (for example, "4" to "6"). Therefore, when the set value is set to a low value, the number of fluctuations required until winning the next big win is greater than when the set value is set to a high value, and the big win is won at long time intervals, resulting in a problem of reduced interest.

However, in this embodiment, in the second period, the ratio of selecting a variation pattern having a shorter variation display period than the predetermined variation display period is higher than in the first period [excluding the final variation]. As a result, even when a low set value (for example, a set value of ``1'' to ``3'') is set, when the game state is in a high-probability/high-base state, the time interval for winning a big win can be relatively shortened (prevented from becoming excessively long), and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes a battle effect for informing whether or not a big win is won by a battle between a ally character and an enemy character after a ready-to-win state is established in a variation pattern involving super-reach (“loss in super-reach” and “big win in super-reach”).

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "missing", the ratio of selecting "super reach missing" as the variation pattern can be calculated based on the losing variation pattern determination table (see Fig. 12-6 (A1)) for the first period [excluding the final variation].

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "loss", the ratio of selecting "super reach failure" as the variation pattern is [{(997−901+1)/997}×100=10%] since 901 to 997 out of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach failure".

In the second period, when the variation display result is "loss", the rate at which "super reach failure" is selected as the variation pattern can be calculated based on the variation pattern determination table for failure of the second period (see FIG. 12-6 (C1)).

In the second period, when the variation display result is "loss", the rate at which "super reach failure" is selected as the variation pattern is [(0/997) x 100 = 0%] because none of the determination values in the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach failure" variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 12-6(A1), when the variation display result is “loss” in the first period [excluding the final variation], the percentage of selection of “super reach failure” as the variation pattern is [10%]. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. In this way, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the ratio of selecting the "super reach out" variation pattern is higher than the ratio of selecting the "super reach out" variation pattern in the second period. That is, the ratio of execution of the battle effect in the first period [excluding the final variation] is higher than the ratio of execution of the battle effect in the second period.

Similarly, in the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "big hit", the ratio of selecting the "super reach jackpot" as the variation pattern can be calculated based on the big winning variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 12-6 (A2)) in the first period [excluding the final variation].

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is a "big hit", the percentage of selection of the variation pattern "super reach jackpot" is [{(997-51+1)/997} x 100 = 95%] because 51 to 997 out of the MR3 judgment value range of 1 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach jackpot" variation pattern.

In the second period, when the variation display result is "big hit", the ratio of selecting "super reach big hit" as the variation pattern can be calculated based on the big hit variation pattern determination table for the second period (see FIG. 12-6 (C2)).

In the second period, when the variation display result is "big hit", the ratio of selecting "super reach big hit" as the variation pattern is [(0/997)×100=0%] because none of the determination values in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 is assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach miss".

As shown in FIG. 12-6 (A2), when the variation display result is "big hit" in the first period [excluding the final variation], the rate of selecting "super reach jackpot" as the variation pattern is [95%]. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. In this way, the rate of selecting the "super reach big win" variation pattern in the first period [excluding the final change] is higher than the rate of selecting the "super reach big win" variation pattern in the second period. That is, the ratio of execution of the battle effect in the first period [excluding the final variation] is higher than the ratio of execution of the battle effect in the second period.

Thus, the execution ratio of the battle effect in the first period is higher than the execution ratio of the battle effect in the second period. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game within a predetermined period (first period) from the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, in a second period after a predetermined period (first period) has passed since the end of the big win game state, the execution ratio of the battle performance is reduced and the variable display period is shortened, thereby suppressing the decline in interest caused by the next big win not occurring despite being controlled to the high probability/high base state (variable probability state).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is the high probability/high base state, if the set value is set to a high value (for example, the set value is "4" to "6"), the probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/41.2 to 1/33.5) than when the set value is set to a low set value (for example, "1" to "3"). Therefore, when a high set value is set, the number of fluctuations required until winning the next big win is less than when a low set value is set, and the next big win is won at short time intervals. As a result, the probability that the interval between occurrences of big wins will be excessively shortened increases, so that the gambling nature becomes excessively high, and a problem arises in that a sound gaming nature cannot be realized.

However, in the present embodiment, the execution ratio of the battle effect during the first period [excluding the final variation] is higher than the execution ratio of the battle effect during the second period. Thus, even when the set value is set to a high value (for example, the set value is "4" to "6"), when the game state is in the high accuracy/high base state, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the variation pattern with super reach having a longer variation display period than the second period is selected at a higher rate. Playability can be realized.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the high-probability/high-base state, if the set value is set to a low value (for example, the set value is "1" to "3"), the probability of winning the jackpot is lower (1/50 to 1/44.5) than when the set value is set to a high set value (for example, "4" to "6"). Therefore, when the set value is set to a low value, the number of fluctuations required until winning the next big win is greater than when the set value is set to a high value, and the big win is won at long time intervals, resulting in a problem of reduced interest.

However, in the present embodiment, the execution ratio of the battle effect during the first period [excluding the final variation] is higher than the execution ratio of the battle effect during the second period. Thus, even when a low set value (for example, a set value of ``1'' to ``3'') is set, when the game state is in the high-probability/high-base state, in the second period, the rate of selection of a variation pattern with a super reach having a longer variation display period is lower than in the first period [excluding the final variation], so that the time interval between winning a big win can be relatively shortened (prevented from becoming excessively long), and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Cut-in notice production)
Next, an example of executing a notice effect for notifying the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state will be described. In this example, a cut-in notice effect can be executed as the notice effect. The cut-in notice effect is a notice effect for notifying the degree of expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state. As shown in FIGS. 12-12 (2), (3) and (4), which will be described later, when reach is established in the image display device 5, an operation promotion display 21TM150 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. A cut-in notice performance is executed in response to the operation of a push button 31B by a player while an operation prompting display 21TM150 is being displayed, and a cut-in image (cut-in image 21TM200A, cut-in image 21TM200B) displaying characters of "chance" is displayed on an image display device 5 in a display mode having a higher priority than other performances being executed.

In this example, the character displayed in the cut-in image is the character "chance", and the ratio of whether or not to execute is selected depends on the display result (see FIG. 12-10(B)).

From the player's point of view, when an image relating to another performance (ready-to-win performance, etc.) is displayed, a cut-in image of a display mode having a higher priority than the image relating to the other performance, etc. (a display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front of the image relating to the other performance, etc.) is suddenly displayed, so that the player is attracted to the screen change at the time of execution of the cut-in notice performance. In addition, in the case of a configuration capable of executing a plurality of presentation modes, the player is also interested in which of the plurality of presentation modes the cut-in announcement presentation is performed.

(Setting suggestion production)
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 that receives the setting value designation command for designating the set value executes the effect corresponding to the setting value designated by the setting value designation command. That is, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value.

In this example, the mode of the effect image displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R when the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed is changed in accordance with the specified set value, thereby executing the first setting suggesting performance for suggesting the set value to the player. When the first setting suggesting effect is not executed, no effect image is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R when the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. When the first setting suggestion effect is executed, effect images are displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. The decoration pattern when the first setting suggesting performance is executed is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). That is, the display priority of the decorative design, the effect image, and the background image when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is higher in the order of background image<effect image<decorative design.

Modes of effect images displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the first setting suggestion effect is executed include a white mode, a blue mode, and a red mode. In this example, when the first setting suggesting performance of the white mode is executed, the effect image emitting white light is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, when the first setting suggesting performance of the blue mode is executed, the effect image emitting blue light is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and when the first setting suggesting performance of the red mode is executed, the effect image emitting red light is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

In addition, in this example, when the cut-in notice performance is executed, the mode of the cut-in image displayed on the image display device 5 is changed according to the specified set value, thereby executing the second setting suggesting performance suggesting the set value to the player. When the cut-in announcement effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is not executed, the cut-in image in the normal mode is displayed. The cut-in image in the normal mode is a cut-in image in which the character "chance" displayed in the cut-in image is displayed in white characters. When the cut-in announcement effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is executed, a cut-in image in blue mode or red mode is displayed. The cut-in image in blue mode is a cut-in image in which the letters "chance" displayed in the cut-in image are displayed in blue letters, and the cut-in image in red mode is a cut-in image in which the letters "chance" displayed in the cut-in image are displayed in red letters.

(Production decision processing at the time of fluctuation start)
A CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result, a variation pattern designation command designating a variation pattern, and a reservation memory number subtraction designation command (a first reservation memory number subtraction designation command or a second reservation memory number subtraction designation command) to a performance control CPU 120 when starting variable display of special symbols.

The effect control CPU 120 designates the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reservation memory number subtraction designation command) that designates that the number of reserved memories has been subtracted when the variable display of the special design (first special design or second special design) is started, the display result designation command that designates the display result (jackpot or loss, jackpot type in the case of a big hit), and the variable display period of the special design and the performance contents (reach and super reach). Based on the reception of a set of commands called a variation pattern designation command from a game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103), it is possible to specify that the variable display of special symbols is executed, and the variable display period of special symbols and the contents of performance (reach, super reach, etc.). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can specify that the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol or second special symbol) is terminated and the display result is derived based on the reception of the symbol determination designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variable display of the special symbols is terminated and the display result is determined.

FIG. 12-9 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation. In this fluctuation start effect determination process, whether or not to execute each of the first set suggestive effect, the cut-in notice effect, and the second set suggestive effect and the mode of execution thereof are determined. In the following description, the state (period) in which the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (variable probability state) and the first period (50 fluctuations or less from the end of the special figure 1 jackpot, 100 fluctuations or less from the end of the special figure 2 jackpot) may be referred to as "the game state is a high probability / high base state (variable probability state) [first period]", and the game state is a high probability / high base state (variable probability state) and the second period (special figure 1 jackpot end). 51 fluctuations or more, 101 fluctuations or more from the end of the special figure 2 jackpot) (period) is sometimes referred to as "the game state is a high probability / high base state (probability variation state) [second period]".

The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable start time effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the production control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands (reserved memory number subtraction designation command, display result designation command, and variation pattern designation command) accompanying the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the production control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) for executing the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols based on the display result designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command. And, the decoration based on the designated fluctuation pattern. The effect to be executed during the variable display of the symbols is determined by the effect determination processing at the start of variation shown in FIG. 12-9.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether (i) the gaming state is a low probability/high base state (time saving state), or (ii) the gaming state is a high probability/high base state (variable probability state) [first period] (step S21TM1000). (i) If the gaming state is a low probability/high base state (time saving state), or (ii) If the gaming state is a high probability/high base state (probability variable state) [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), proceed to step S21TM1010 and after. On the other hand, if (i) the gaming state is not the low-probability/high-base state (time-saving state) and (ii) the gaming state is not the high-probability/high-base state (probability variable state) [first period] (NO in step S21TM1000), the process proceeds to step S21TM1070.

Here, the case where the gaming state is in the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) [first period] means that the game state is controlled to the high probability/high base state (variable probability state) until the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example) without the occurrence of a big hit within the first period. In addition, the case where the gaming state is the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) [second period] means that the game state is controlled to the high probability/high base state and the second period (51st time or later or 101st time or later in this example) after the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example) without the occurrence of a big hit.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines (i) when the gaming state is the low probability/high base state (time saving state), or (ii) when the gaming state is the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), determines whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the effect mode based on the execution/non-execution determination table for the first setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 12-10 (A)) (step S2). 1TM1010), and proceeds to step S21TM1020.

As shown in FIG. 12-10(A), in the execution/non-execution determination table of the first setting suggestion effect, a determination value for determining whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed and the effect mode is assigned according to the set setting value. When the set value is '1' or '2' (that is, when the set value designated by the set value designation command is '1' or '2'), it is determined not to execute the first set suggestion performance at a rate of 90%, it is determined to execute the first set suggestion performance in the white mode at a rate of 5%, the first set suggestion performance in the blue mode is determined at a rate of 3%, and the first set suggestion performance in the red mode is determined at a rate of 2%. When the set value is '3' or '4' (that is, when the set value specified by the set value designation command is '3' or '4'), it is determined not to execute the first set suggestive effect at a rate of 90%, to execute the first set suggested effect in the white mode at a rate of 2%, to execute the first set suggested effect in the blue mode at a rate of 5%, and to execute the first set suggested effect in the red mode at a rate of 3%. When the set value is '5' or '6' (that is, when the set value designated by the set value designation command is '5' or '6'), it is determined not to execute the first set suggestion effect at a rate of 90%, to execute the first set suggestion effect in the white mode at a rate of 2%, to execute the first set suggestion effect in the blue mode at a rate of 3%, and to execute the first set suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of 5%.

In this way, when the set value is "1" or "2", the performance mode of the first set suggestion performance when the first set suggestion performance is executed has the highest percentage of execution of the first set suggestion performance of the white mode (5%), the second highest percentage of execution of the first set suggestion performance of the blue mode (3%), and the lowest percentage of execution of the first set suggestion performance of the red mode (2%). When the set value is ``3'' or ``4'', the performance mode of the first set suggestion performance when the first set suggestion performance is executed has the highest percentage of execution of the first set suggestion performance of the blue mode (5%), the second highest percentage of execution of the first set suggestion performance of the red mode (3%), and the lowest percentage of execution of the first set suggestion performance of the white mode (2%). When the set value is '5' or '6', the performance mode of the first set suggestion performance when the first set suggestion performance is executed has the highest percentage of execution of the first set suggestion performance of the red mode (5%), the second highest percentage of execution of the first set suggestion performance of the blue mode (3%), and the lowest percentage of execution of the first set suggestion performance of the white mode (2%).

In other words, the ratio of execution of the first setting suggestive effect is a common ratio (10% in this example) for any set value, and there is no difference in setting, but with regard to the ratio of execution of the first suggestive effect of each effect mode, when the setting is low (set value is "1" or "2"), the ratio of the first set suggestive effect of the white mode is high, when the intermediate setting is set (set value is "3" or "4"), the ratio of the first suggestive effect of the blue mode is high, and when the setting is high. (The set value is "5" or "6"), the ratio of execution of the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode is high. Therefore, the player will be interested in the effect mode when the first setting suggestion effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern is "super reach out" or "super reach jackpot" (step S21TM1020). When the variation pattern is ``missing super reach'' or ``big hit super reach'' (YES in step S21TM1020), whether or not to execute cut-in notice performance is determined based on the execution/non-execution determination table for cut-in notice performance (see FIG. 12-10(B)) (step S21TM1030), and the process proceeds to step S21TM1040. On the other hand, if the variation pattern is not "Super Reach Lost" or "Super Reach Big Hit" (NO in step S21TM1020), the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 12-10(B), in the execution/non-execution decision table for the cut-in notice effect, a determination value for deciding whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect is assigned according to the display result. When the display result is 'missing' (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is 'missing'), it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice performance at a rate of 80%, and to execute the cut-in notice performance at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, when the display result is a "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is a "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice performance at a rate of 40%, and to execute the cut-in notice performance at a rate of 60%. In this way, when the cut-in foretelling effect is executed, the percentage of big wins is higher than when the cut-in foretelling effect is not executed. Therefore, the player will be interested in whether or not the cut-in announcement effect will be executed.

Next, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in announcement effect (step S21TM1040). When it is determined to execute the cut-in advance notice effect (YES in step S21TM1040), the execution/non-execution of the second setting suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined based on the execution/non-execution determination table (see FIG. 12-10(C)) of the second setting suggestion effect (step S21TM1050), and the process is terminated as it is. If it has been decided not to execute the cut-in announcement effect (NO in step S21TM1040), the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 12-10(C), in the execution/non-execution determination table of the second setting suggestion effect, a determination value for determining whether or not the second setting suggestion effect is to be executed and the effect mode is assigned according to the set setting value. When the set value is '1', '3' or '5' (that is, when the set value designated by the set value designation command is '1', '3' or '5'), it is decided not to execute the second set suggestion performance at a rate of 30%, it is decided to execute the second set suggestion performance of the blue mode at a rate of 50%, and the second set suggestion performance of the red mode is determined to be executed at a rate of 20%. Further, when the set value is ``2'', ``4'' or ``6'' (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specification command is ``2'', ``4'' or ``6''), it is decided not to execute the second set suggestion performance at a rate of 30%, it is decided to execute the first set suggestion performance of the blue mode at a rate of 20%, and the first set suggestion performance of the blue mode is determined to be executed at a rate of 50%.

Thus, when the set value is '1', '3' or '5', regarding the performance mode of the second set suggestion performance when the second set suggestion performance is executed, the ratio of execution of the second set suggestion performance of the blue mode is higher than the ratio of execution of the second set suggestion performance of the red mode. Further, when the set value is ``2'', ``4'' or ``6'', regarding the performance mode of the second set suggestion performance when the second set suggestion performance is executed, the ratio of execution of the second set suggestion performance of the red mode is higher than the ratio of execution of the second set suggestion performance of the blue mode. That is, the ratio at which the second suggested effect is executed is a common ratio (30% in this example) regardless of the set value, and there is no difference in the setting, but the ratio at which the second suggested effect set in each effect mode is executed is higher when the second set suggested effect is selected in the blue mode when set to odd numbers (set value is "1", "3", or "5"), and when set to even numbers (set value is "2" or "5"). 4” or “6”), the rate at which the second set suggestion effect in the blue mode is executed is higher than the rate at which the second set suggestion effect in the red mode is selected. Therefore, the player will be interested in the effect mode when the second setting suggestion effect is executed.

Also, (i) the gaming state is not the low-probability/high-base state (time-saving state), and (ii) the gaming state is not the high-probability/high-base state (probability-variable state) [first period] (NO in step S21TM1000), (iii) it is determined whether the gaming state is the high-probability/high-base state [second period] (step S21TM1060). (iii) If the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), the process proceeds to step S21TM1070. (iii) If the gaming state is not the high probability/high base state [second period] (NO in step S21TM1060), the process is terminated as it is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot" (step S21TM1070). When the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" (YES in step S21TM1070), the execution/non-execution of the first setting suggestion performance and the performance mode are determined based on the execution/non-execution determination table (see FIG. 12-10(A)) of the first setting suggestion performance (step S21TM1080), and the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the display result of the variable display is not a "big hit" (NO in step S21TM1070), the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 12-9, when the game state is the high probability/high base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), it is determined whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect (step S21TM1020). That is, when the game state is the high probability/high base state [first period], whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display regardless of the variable display result. On the other hand, when the game state is high probability/high base state [second period] (YES at step S21TM1060), only when the variable display result is "big hit" (YES at step S21TM1070), it is determined whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect (step S21TM1020). That is, when the game state is the high-probability/high-base state [second period], whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion performance is determined only in the final fluctuation of the second period when the fluctuation display result is "big win".

Further, in the present embodiment, the rate at which the first setting suggestion effect is executed is 10% regardless of the set value (see FIG. 12-10(A)). As described above, when the game state is the high probability/high base state [first period], whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion performance is determined for each variable display regardless of the result of the variable display, so the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion performance for each variable display in the first period is 10%. On the other hand, as described above, when the gaming state is in the high-probability/high-base state [second period], whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined only in the final variation of the second period. Therefore, in the second period, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is 0% until the variation display one time before the final variation in which the variation display result is "big win", and the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect in the final variation in which the variation display result is "big win" is 10%.

For example, when the variable display result of the second special symbol is "probability variable big hit", after the game state shifts to the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) after the end of the big win game, when the big win game state is not reached until the special figure game is executed 100 times, the first period is 100 times, and in this first period (100 rotations), it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed for each variable display. The probability that the setting suggestion effect is executed is [{1-(90/100)̂100}×100=99.9%]. On the other hand, when the variation display result of the second special symbol is "probable variation big win", in the second period (after 101 times) after 100 special games are executed without entering the big win gaming state, it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed only in the final variation of the second period when the display result is "big win". 00)×100=10%]. In this way, the execution ratio of the first setting suggesting performance in the first period is higher than the execution ratio of the first setting suggesting performance in the second period, so that the interest in the game can be improved in the period when the game state is controlled to the high probability/high base state (variable probability state).

As shown in FIG. 12-9, when the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestive effect is executed in step S21TM1010, and whether or not the second setting suggestive effect is executed is determined in step S21TM1050. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-9, when the game state is the high probability/high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), it is determined in step S21TM1080 whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect. In this way, two kinds of setting suggesting performances, that is, the first set suggesting performance and the second set suggesting performance are executed in the first period, and one kind of setting suggesting performance, only the first set suggesting performance, is executed in the second period, so that the amusement of the game can be improved in the period when the game state is controlled to the high probability/high base state (probability variable state).

12-6 (A1), in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the variation display result is "missing", the percentage of "super reach missing" selected as the variation pattern is [{(997−901+1)/997}×100=10%] since 901 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach missing". is. On the other hand, when the variation display result is "missing", as shown in FIG. 12-6 (C1), the ratio of selecting "super reach missing" as the variation pattern in the second period is [(0/997) × 100 = 0%] because none of the determination values in the range 1 to 997 of the MR3 determination value is assigned to the "super reach missing" variation pattern. That is, the selection rate of the variation pattern with super reach (“missing super reach”) in the first period is higher than the selection rate of the variation pattern (“missing super reach”) with super reach in the second period.

12-6 (A2), when the variation display result is "big hit", the ratio of selecting "super reach big hit" as the variation pattern in the first period [excluding the final variation] is [{(997-51+1)/997}×100=95% because 51 to 997 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the "super reach big hit" variation pattern. ]. On the other hand, when the variation display result is a "big win" in the second period, when the variation display result is a "big win", the ratio of selecting the "super reach jackpot" as the variation pattern is [(0/997)×100=0%] because none of the determination values in the range 1 to 997 of the determination values of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of the "super reach jackpot". That is, the selection rate of the variation pattern with super reach (“super reach jackpot”) in the first period is higher than the selection rate of the variation pattern with super reach (“super reach jackpot”) in the second period.

Further, as described above, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect in the first period is higher than the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect in the second period. In this way, the selection ratio of the variation patterns ("super reach failure", "super reach jackpot") with super reach is different between the first period and the second period, and the execution ratio of the first setting suggestive performance is different between the first period and the second period, so that the interest of the game can be improved in the period when the game state is controlled to the high probability/high base state (probability variable state).

(Specific example of the first setting suggestion effect)
Next, specific examples of the first setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-11 (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B3). FIGS. 12-11 (A1) to (A3) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 when the first setting suggestion effect in the white mode is executed in the first period, and FIGS.

(First setting suggestion effect in the first period)
As shown in FIG. 12-11 (A1), when the gaming state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (probability variable state) [first period], the production mode is controlled to chance time by the production control CPU 120. When the production mode is chance time, an "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the characters "chance time" are displayed at the top of the screen. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the second special design, the effect control CPU 120 is executing the variable display of the decorative design (information corresponding to the second special design) in the design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5, and is executing the variable display of the second small design (information corresponding to the second special design) in the second small design display areas 5l2, 5c2 and 5r2 of the image display device 5. In the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1 and 5r1 of the image display device 5, the first small pattern combination ("417" in this example) indicating that the variable display result is "missing" is continuously stopped and displayed in response to the fact that the variable display result of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "missing".

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the performance control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays "4" in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5 because the second reserved memory number is 4. The active display area 21TM031 displays an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 21TM021 displays four second reserved displays 21TM020.

As shown in FIG. 12-11 (A2), at the timing when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first setting suggestion effect in the white mode, stops displaying the decorative symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol "4" in the symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol "5" in the symbol display area 5R. Display TM100A. The decoration pattern when the first setting suggesting performance is executed is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). That is, the display priority of the decorative design, the effect image, and the background image when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is higher in the order of background image<effect image<decorative design. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the second small pattern in the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5 in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the second special pattern.

As shown in FIG. 12-11 (A3), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 erases the effect image 21TM100A displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to end the first setting suggestive effect, the decorative symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol "4" in the symbol display area 5C, and the decorative pattern in the symbol display area 5R. The pattern "5" is fixed and stopped, the second small pattern "2" is fixed and stopped in the second small pattern display area 5l2, the second small pattern "4" is fixed and stopped in the second small pattern display area 5c2, and the second small pattern "5" is fixed and stopped in the second small pattern display area 5r2.

(First setting suggestion effect in the second period)
As shown in FIG. 12-11 (B1), when the gaming state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (probability variable state) [second period], the production mode is "FEVERZONE" by the production control CPU 120. It is controlled. When the effect mode is "FEVERZONE", a "typhoon image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative design, and the characters "FEVERZONE" are displayed in the center of the screen. When the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is performing the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and is performing the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 of the image display device 5, and the image is displayed. In the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the display device 5, the combination of the first small patterns ("417" in this example) indicating that the variable display result is "missing" is continuously stopped and displayed in response to the fact that the variable display result of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "missing".

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the performance control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays "4" in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5 because the second reserved memory number is 4. The active display area 21TM031 displays an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 21TM021 displays four second reserved displays 21TM020.

As shown in FIG. 12-11 (B2), at the timing when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, in response to the display result becoming a "jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 executes the first set suggestive effect in the blue mode, stops displaying the decorative symbol "7" in the symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol "7" in the symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol "7" in the symbol display area 5R, and the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5. Effect image 21TM100B emitting blue light is displayed on R respectively. The decoration pattern when the first setting suggesting performance is executed is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). That is, the display priority of the decorative design, the effect image, and the background image when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is higher in the order of background image<effect image<decorative design. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the second small pattern in the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5 in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the second special pattern.

As shown in FIG. 12-11 (B3), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 erases the effect image 21TM100B displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to end the first setting suggestive effect, the decorative symbol "7" in the symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol "7" in the symbol display area 5C, and the decorative pattern in the symbol display area 5R. The pattern "7" is fixed and stopped, the second small pattern "7" is fixed and stopped in the second small pattern display area 5l2, the second small pattern "7" is fixed and stopped in the second small pattern display area 5c2, and the second small pattern "7" is fixed and stopped in the second small pattern display area 5r2.

(Specific example of the second setting suggestion effect)
Next, a specific example of the second setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-12 (1) to (4). FIGS. 12-12(1), (2), and (3) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 when the cut-in advance notice effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is not executed, and FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 12-12 (1), when the game state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (variable probability state) [first period], the production mode is controlled to chance time by the production control CPU 120. When the production mode is chance time, an "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the characters "chance time" are displayed at the top of the screen. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the second special design, the effect control CPU 120 is executing the variable display of the decorative design (information corresponding to the second special design) in the design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5, and is executing the variable display of the second small design (information corresponding to the second special design) in the second small design display areas 5l2, 5c2 and 5r2 of the image display device 5. , in the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, the first small pattern combination ("417" in this example) indicating that the variable display result is "missed" is continuously stopped and displayed in response to the fact that the variable display result of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "missed".

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the performance control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays "4" in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5 because the second reserved memory number is 4. The active display area 21TM031 displays an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 21TM021 displays four second reserved displays 21TM020.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-12 (2), the effect control CPU 120 causes the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 to stop and display the decorative symbol “5” at the timing to establish the ready-to-win state in the variation pattern, and displays the characters “reach!!” on the upper part of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the second small symbols continues in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2. That is, in the first small pattern display area 5l1 corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and in the first small pattern display area 5r1 corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the first small pattern is continuously and variably displayed without being stopped and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display 21TM150 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B at the center of the screen while continuing the ready-to-win state. The operation prompting display 21TM150 includes an image simulating the push button 31B and a downward arrow displayed above the image simulating the push button 31B, and is a display prompting the user to press the push button 31B. Since the operation prompting display 21TM150 is an image having a higher display priority than the background image and the decoration pattern (the display layer is higher), it appears to the player that it is displayed in front of the background image and the decoration pattern.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in notice effect in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is being displayed. Here, when it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice performance but not the second set suggestion performance in the performance determination processing at the time of fluctuation start, the cut-in notice performance is executed but the second set suggestion performance is not executed. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect and the second setting suggestion effect, the second set suggestion effect is executed together with the cut-in notice effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-12(3), the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is being displayed, but does not execute the second setting suggestion effect. In this example, the cut-in image 21TM200A in the normal mode (the cut-in image in which white characters "Chance" are displayed) is displayed on the image display device 5 in a display mode having a higher priority than other effects being executed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 12-12(4), the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect and the second setting suggestion effect in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is being displayed. In this example, a cut-in image 21TM200B in a red mode (a cut-in image in which red characters "Chance" are displayed) is displayed on the image display device 5 in a display mode having a higher priority than other effects being executed.

(Specific example of continuous challenge production)
Next, specific examples of continuous challenge effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-13 (1) to (7). 12-13 (1) and (2) to (4) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 when the continuous challenge effect of the failure mode is executed, and FIGS. 12-13 (1) and (5) to (7) are explanatory views showing examples of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 when the continuous challenge effect of the success mode is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-13 (1), when the final variation of the first period (in this example, the 50th special symbol game after the variation display result of the first special symbol is a "big hit" or the 100th special symbol game after the variation display result of the second special symbol is a "big hit") is being executed, the continuous challenge effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120. A CPU 120 for performance control displays the characters "continuous challenge" and an operation prompting display 21TM150 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B in the central part of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the character 21TM300 in the lower right part of the screen. The operation prompting display 21TM150 includes an image simulating the push button 31B and a downward arrow displayed above the image simulating the push button 31B, and is a display prompting the user to press the push button 31B.

When the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is performing the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2 and 5r2, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1 and 5r1, the variable display result of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) is "missing". In response to the event, the combination of decorative symbols ("417" in this example) indicating that the variable display result is "missing" is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the performance control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays "4" in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5 because the second reserved memory number is 4. Further, during the period when the continuous challenge performance is executed, the variable display of decorative patterns (information corresponding to the second special pattern) is not executed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and the reserved display (first reserved display 21TM010, second reserved display 21TM020) is not displayed in the reserved display areas (first reserved display area 21TM011, second reserved display area 21TM021). Also, neither the square object indicating the active display area 21TM031 nor the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed.

In response to the operation of the push button 31B by the player when the operation prompting display 21TM150 is displayed, in FIGS. 12-13 (2) to (4), the currently controlled game state is the low probability/high base state (time saving state).

12-13(2), the production control CPU 120 executes a continuous challenge production in a failure mode in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is displayed, displays the characters "failure" and the object "?" 300A is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-13 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 finishes the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the display result is "missing".

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-13 (4), when the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the production mode is the normal mode, the "daytime image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 stops and displays the combination of decorative symbols ("417" in this example) indicating that the variation display result is "missing" in response to the fact that the variation display result of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) is "missing", and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1, the previously executed (most recently executed) ) Corresponding to the fact that the variable display result of the first special symbol is "missed", the combination of the first small symbols ("417" in this example) indicating that the variable display result is "missed" is continuously stopped and displayed, and in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2, the second special symbol previously executed (executed most recently) corresponds to the fact that the variable display result of the second special symbol is "missed", the second indicating that the variable display result is "missed" A combination of two small symbols ("245" in this example) is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the performance control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays "0" in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5 because the second reserved memory number is 0. In addition, the active display is not displayed in the active display area 21TM031 because there is no variable display currently being executed.

On the other hand, when the push button 31B is operated by the player while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is being displayed, in FIGS. 12-13(5) to 12-13(7), based on the fact that the currently controlled game state is the high probability/high base state (probability variable state), the continuous challenge effect of the success mode is executed.

12-13(5), the effect control CPU 120 executes a continuous challenge effect in a success mode in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player when the operation prompting display 21TM150 is displayed, displays the characters "success" and the object "○" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the character 21TM in the lower right part of the screen. 300B is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-13 (6), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the display result is "missing".

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-13 (7), when the game state is continuously controlled to the high probability/high base state (variable probability state), the production mode is controlled to "FEVERZONE" by the production control CPU 120. When the presentation mode is "FEVERZONE", the "typhoon image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the characters "FEVERZONE" are displayed in the center of the screen. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 confirms and stops the combination of decorative symbols ("245" in this example) indicating that the variation display result is "missing" in response to the fact that the variation display result of the second special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) is "missing", and in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2, the previously executed (most recently executed) ) In response to the fact that the variation display result of the second special symbol is "miss", the combination of the second small symbols ("245" in this example) indicating that the variation display result is "miss" is continuously stopped and displayed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1, the first special symbol previously executed (most recently executed) has been changed to "miss", so that the variation display result is "miss". A combination of one small pattern ("417" in this example) is continuously stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5 because the first reserved memory number is 0, and displays "0" in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5 because the second reserved memory number is 0.

As shown in FIG. 12-13, in the final variation of the first period (in this example, the 50th special symbol game after the variation display result of the first special symbol is a "jackpot" or the 100th special symbol game after the variation display result of the second special symbol is a "big hit"), the production control CPU 120 executes a continuous challenge production as a suggestive production that suggests a shift from the first period to the second period (that the high base state continues). are According to such a configuration, even when the game state is controlled to either the low-probability/high-base state (time-saving state) or the high-probability/high-base state (probability variable state), the player can play the game while having expectations for the transition to the second period until the final variation of the first period in which the continuous challenge performance is executed.

(other forms)
In the above-described gaming machine capable of changing the set value, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be simultaneously executed in parallel. Also, the game machine capable of changing the set value may be capable of controlling a small winning game state which is a game state different from the big winning game state and which is advantageous for the player. For example, in a small winning game state, a game ball can win a special variable winning ball device different from the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning hole and the special variable winning ball device 7 forming the big winning hole. Also, the game machine capable of changing the setting value may be capable of being controlled to a state (for example, a KT state described later) in which the frequency of small hits is increased.

For example, the special variable winning ball device is provided downstream of the variable winning ball device in the right gaming area. When the variable winning ball device is in the open state, the frequency (ratio) of game balls flowing into the special variable winning ball device on the downstream side in the open state is extremely low, and when the variable winning ball device is in the closed state, control may be performed to increase the frequency (ratio) of game balls flowing into the special variable winning ball device on the downstream side in the open state. According to such a configuration, in a high base state in which the variable winning ball device is open for a long period (or open frequency is high), the frequency (percentage) of game balls flowing into the special variable winning ball device in the open state even when hitting to the right is low.

For example, it is assumed that the game state includes a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, it is assumed that there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. Then, when the gaming state is controlled to a low probability state and non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state), when controlled to a low probability state and 1KT state (low probability / 1KT state: time saving state), when controlled to a high probability state and 1KT state (high probability / 1KT state; variable state), and when controlled to a high probability state and 2KT state (high probability / 2KT state: small win RUSH state). shall be

In the first KT state among the KT states, a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device is likely to be in an open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device on the upstream side is extremely long, and even if a small win occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device on the downstream side (for example, about 1 ball per 100 variations). Specifically, in the first KT state, the control is performed so that small hits are likely to occur, and the high base state is controlled so that the open time of the variable winning ball device is lengthened. In the second KT state among the KT states, the opening time of the variable winning ball device on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball easily wins the special variable winning ball device on the downstream side. Specifically, in the second KT state, the control is performed so that small hits are likely to occur and the low base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device is shortened.

Also, the KT state is a game state in which a small win is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Concretely, the probability that the variable winning ball device will be in the open state as a normal game hit is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. The KT state is a game state in which the small win is more likely to occur than the normal state because the ratio of determining the small win is low when the first special pattern varies, whereas the ratio of the small win determined when the second special pattern varies is high. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated mainly by causing variations in the second special symbols, and the game state is advantageous to the player.

As the game state is thus controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small winning RUSH state), the game ball is easily won in the special variable winning ball device by being controlled to the state where the small winning is likely to occur and being controlled to the low base state to shorten the opening time of the variable winning ball device. According to such a configuration, it is possible to control a high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) different from a high probability/high base state (probability variable state) as a high probability state advantageous to a player, and to improve the amusement of the game in the high probability state.

(Other modifications)
(1) <Reverse breakthrough type small hit RUSH machine>
In the above embodiment, once controlled in a high -accuracy / high -base state (probable change state) after the jackpot gaming, the accuracy state continues until the next jackpot occurs, but not only this form, the gaming state is highly accurate before the next jackpot occurs, not limited to such a form. It may be possible to change from a high -base state to a high accuracy / 2 kt state (small hit RUSH state).

For example, when shifting to a high accuracy/1st KT state (variable probability state) after the end of a big win game, the high accuracy/1st KT state (variable probability state) is maintained until the next big win occurs or 100 times of variation display is completed. Then, when 100 times of variation display is completed without the occurrence of the next big win, the game machine shifts to a high accuracy/second KT state (small winning RUSH state) from the 101st variation display, and maintains the high accuracy/second KT state (small winning RUSH state) until the next big win occurs. On the other hand, when it shifts to the low-probability/first KT state (time-saving state) after the end of the jackpot game, the low-probability/first KT state (time-saving state) is maintained until the next big win occurs or the 100th fluctuation display is completed, but from the 101st-time fluctuation display, it shifts to the low-probability/non-KT state (normal state). For the player, whether or not the 100th variation display can be broken through without falling to the normal state greatly affects the subsequent advantage, so the game machine adopting such a configuration is called a reverse breakthrough type small winning RUSH machine.

In such a reverse breakthrough type small winning RUSH machine, there are a first period from the end of the big winning game (after being controlled to a high probability/first KT state (probability variable state) or low probability/first KT state (time saving state)) to the end of the 100th variation display, and a second period from the 101st variation display to the occurrence of the next big win. In the first period, the rate of selecting a variation pattern with a variable display period (eg, 10 seconds or more) longer than a predetermined variable display period (eg, 5 seconds) is higher than in the second period, and in the second period, the rate of selecting a variation pattern with a variable display period (eg, 3 seconds) shorter than the predetermined variable display period (eg, 5 seconds) is higher than in the first period.

In the first period of the present example, the common "evening image" is displayed as a background image in any game state (high probability/first KT state (probability variable state) or low probability/first KT state (time reduction state)) controlled after the end of the jackpot game, making it difficult for the player to grasp which game state is controlled in the first period. Here, after the end of the big win game, the state is shifted to a high probability/first KT state (probability variable state), and when the next big win does not occur in the 100th variation display, the continuous challenge presentation of the success mode is executed in the 100th variation display, and the 101st variation display is shifted to the high probability/second KT state (small winning RUSH state). After the end of the jackpot game, the machine shifts to the low probability/1st KT state (time reduction state), and when the next big hit does not occur in the 100th variation display, the continuous challenge presentation of the failure mode is executed in the 100th variation display, and the 101st variation display is shifted to the low probability/non-KT state (normal state).

Thus, when the game state is the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state), it is possible to shift the game state to the high probability/second KT state (small winning RUSH state) in response to the execution of the variable display for a predetermined number of times before the occurrence of the next big win, so that the amusement of the game in the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state) can be improved. Further, by executing the continuous challenge effect at the predetermined time of the variable display, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state).

Further, for example, when the state is shifted to the high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state) after the end of the big win game, the high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state) may be maintained until the next big win occurs or the number of occurrences of the small win reaches 50 times. Then, when the number of occurrences of small wins reaches 50 times without the occurrence of the next big win, the change display after the 50th small win game is completed is shifted to a high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state), and the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state) may be maintained until the next big win occurs. On the other hand, in the case of shifting to the low probability/first KT state (time reduction state) after the end of the big win game, the low probability/first KT state (time reduction state) is maintained until the next big win occurs or the number of small win occurrences reaches 50, but after the 50th small win game is completed, the state is shifted to the low probability/non-KT state (normal state).

That is, there are a first period from the end of the big win game (after being controlled to the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state) or the low probability/first KT state) to the occurrence of the fiftieth small win, and the second period from the end of the fiftieth small win game to the occurrence of the next big win. In the first period of this example, the common "evening image" is displayed as a background image in any game state (high probability/first KT state (probability variable state) or low probability/first KT state (time reduction state)) controlled after the end of the big win game, so it is difficult for the player to grasp which game state is controlled in the first period. Here, after the end of the jackpot game, the state shifts to a high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state), and if the next big win does not occur in the variation display until the number of occurrences of the small win reaches 50 times, the continuous challenge production of the success mode described above is executed in the variation display in which the number of occurrences of the small win reaches 50 times, and the variation display after the next time of the variation display in which the number of occurrences of the small win reaches 50 times shifts to the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state). do. In addition, after the end of the big win game, the state is shifted to the low probability/first KT state (time reduction state), and when the next big win does not occur in the variation display until the number of occurrences of the small win reaches 50 times, the continuation challenge performance of the failure mode is executed in the variation display in which the number of occurrences of the small win becomes 50 times, and the variation display after the next time of the variation display in which the number of occurrences of the small win becomes 50 times is shifted to the low probability/non-KT state (normal state).

Thus, when the game state is the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state), it is possible to shift the game state to the high probability/second KT state (small winning RUSH state) in response to the number of occurrences of small wins reaching a predetermined number before the occurrence of the next big win, so that the amusement of the game in the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state) can be improved. Further, by executing the continuous challenge effect at the predetermined time of the variable display, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state).

(2) <Type 1/2 type mixer>
In a game machine of a type called the first type, a big win determination is performed based on establishment of a starting condition, and a big win game is executed when a big win is won. In addition, in a game machine of a type called the second type (wings), an opening and closing winning device having a feather accessory that can be opened and closed is provided, and when a game ball wins inside the opening and closing winning device and wins a specific area (V winning opening) provided inside the opening and closing winning device, a jackpot game is executed. There is also a type of game machine called a 1st-2nd type mixer that fuses the 1st type and the 2nd type (feathers).

For example, in a one- and two-kind mixing machine, big win determination is performed based on establishment of a first starting condition (for example, winning of a game ball in a first start winning hole), and when a big win is won, the variation display result of the first special pattern becomes a big win pattern, and a big win game is executed. Also, a big win determination is performed based on establishment of a second starting condition (for example, the game ball passes through a second starting area (gate)), and when a big win is won, the variation display result of the second special pattern becomes a big win pattern, and a big win game is executed. When a small win is won, a small win game is executed by opening and closing a feather accessory provided in the opening and closing winning device, and when a game ball wins inside the opening and closing winning device while the feather accessory is opened and enters a specific area (V winning opening) provided inside the opening and closing winning device, a big win game is executed.

In such a one-two-kind mixing machine, the player makes the game ball enter the first start winning hole by hitting to the left in the low base state, and after the big win game based on the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, the game is controlled to the high base state by switching to the right hit to pass the game ball through the second start area. For example, this high base state (right-handed period) is continued until the variable display of the second special pattern is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, six times), and if no big win occurs within the variable display of the second special pattern of the predetermined number of times, the game state shifts to the low base state.

Here, in the effect based on the variation pattern corresponding to the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time) of the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation display result of the second special symbol of the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time) and the variation display result of the second special symbol of each of the second holding memories (for example, each of the three second holding memories) existing at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol of the predetermined number of times is started may be notified. That is, when the second reserved memory number is 3 at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started for the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time) in the high base state, the result of the variable display of the second special symbol for a total of four times is notified by the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol for the predetermined number of times. Then, after the variable display of the second special symbol is completed for the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time), the variable display of the second special symbol is executed three times, but regarding the variable display of these second special symbols, a variation pattern with an extremely short variation display period (for example, 1 second) is designated. In other words, from the player's point of view, it looks as if four times of variable display have been executed by the effect corresponding to the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time) of the variable display of the second special symbol.

In the one-and-two mixed machine of this example, the first period corresponds to the period from when the game state shifts to the high base state (time saving state) until the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (6 times) without the occurrence of the big win, or until the big win occurs before the special game of the predetermined number of times is executed. The second period corresponds to the period after the game state shifts to the high base state (time saving state) and the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (6 times) without the occurrence of a big hit, that is, the period during which the special game is executed for the number of second reserved memories at the start of the predetermined number of special game.

In such a one-two-mixer machine, in the first period, the rate of selecting a variation pattern with a longer variation display period (eg, 10 seconds or more) than a predetermined variation display period (eg, 5 seconds) is higher than in the second period, and in the second period, the rate of selecting a variation pattern with a shorter variation display period (eg, 1 second) than the predetermined variation display period (eg, 5 seconds) is higher than in the first period.

(3) <Variable falling machine>
As a pachinko game machine, there is a pachinko game machine that executes a variable probability fall determination for whether or not to shift the game state to a low probability state in a state where the game state is controlled to a high probability state, and shifts the game state to a low probability state based on the result of the variable probability fall determination. And, the pachinko game machine 1 that executes such probability variable fall determination is called a probability variable fall machine.

For example, when a ``variable probability big hit'' occurs in the variable probability fall machine, the machine is controlled to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state) after the end of the big win game state, and the variable probability fall determination is executed when the variable display is started in the high probability/high base state (variable probability state). Here, until the 100th variable display starts without the display result of the variable display executed in the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) becoming a “jackpot”, (i) If it is determined that “there is a probability variable fall” in any of the probability variable fall judgments executed in response to the variable display up to the 100th time, from the start of the variable display corresponding to the probability variable fall judgment (any of the first to 100th fluctuation displays) from the start of the low probability / high base state (time-saving state), maintained in a low-probability/high-base state (time-saving state) until the 100th variable display is completed, and then controlled to a low-probability/low-base state (normal state). Here, the period from the control to the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) after the end of the big win game state to the execution of the 100th variation display without falling to the normal state and without the occurrence of the big win corresponds to the first period.

On the other hand, (ii) if none of the probability variable fall determinations executed in response to the 100th variable display does not determine that there is a “probable variable fall”, the high probability / high base state (probability variable state) is maintained until at least the 100th variable display is completed. It is controlled to the low base state (normal state). Here, the period from the end of the 100th variation display in the high-probability/high-base state (probability-variable state) to the normal state or the occurrence of the next big hit corresponds to the second period.

In such a variable tumble machine, in the first period, the rate of selecting a variation pattern with a longer variation display period (eg, 10 seconds or more) than a predetermined variation display period (eg, 5 seconds) is higher than in the second period.

(4) In the above embodiment, in the first period, the rate of selecting a variation pattern with a variable display period (eg, 10 seconds or more) longer than a predetermined variable display period (eg, 5 seconds) is higher than in the second period, and in the second period, the rate of selecting a variation pattern with a variable display period (eg, 1 second) shorter than the predetermined variable display period (eg, 5 seconds) is higher than in the first period. can be different. For example, the first period may be a pattern fixing stop period (e.g. 1.0 seconds) longer than a predetermined period (e.g. 0.7 seconds), and the second period may be a design fixing stop period (e.g. 0.5 seconds) shorter than the predetermined period (e.g. 0.7 seconds).

(5) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (A), the percentage of "non-reach out (high-speed fluctuation)" selected as the fluctuation pattern in the first period is 0%. However, not limited to such a form, "non-reach out (high-speed fluctuation)" may be selected as the fluctuation pattern even in the first period.

For example, when a jackpot of type "2R variable probability big hit [next time]" is provided in addition to the jackpot type shown in the present embodiment (see FIG. 12-3), since there is no normal 2R jackpot, at the time when the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 2, the player can recognize that the jackpot type is "2R variable probability big hit [next time]" and is controlled to a high probability / high base state (variable probability state) after the big win game ends. becomes. If, in the first period after the end of the ``2R probability variable jackpot [next time]'', the rate of selection of a variation pattern with a variable display period (for example, 10 seconds or more) longer than a predetermined variable display period (for example, 5 seconds) is set higher than in the second period, the interest is reduced due to the long variable display period, although the player recognizes that the game state is a high-probability state (probability variable state) and this state will continue until the next big win. Therefore, in a first period after the completion of a specific jackpot type such as ``2R probability variable jackpot [next time]'', for example, when a jackpot game of a type in which there is no normal jackpot of the same number of rounds and it is determined that the probability variable state continues until the next jackpot when the jackpot game ends, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the same fluctuation pattern determination table as in the second period. As a result, it is possible to increase the percentage of determining the fluctuation pattern as "non-reach out (high-speed fluctuation)", shorten the fluctuation time in the first period, and prevent a decline in interest.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the selection ratio of the variable display period in the first period and the selection ratio of the variable display period in the second period are different has been shown, but the execution ratio of the advance notice effect in the first period and the execution ratio of the advance notice effect in the second period may be made different.

For example, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (suspended display, active display) based on the determination result at the time of starting winning or the determination result at the start of fluctuation. Here, the execution ratio of the change effect in the first period and the execution ratio of the change effect in the second period may be different. In both the first period and the second period, the change effect can be executed, so that the interest of the game in the high probability/high base state (variable probability state) can be improved. In the first period, since the variable display period is long, the change performance requiring a predetermined period can be executed at a high rate, and in the second period, the variable display period is short, so the execution rate of the change performance is preferably low. As a result, in the first period, the period required until the occurrence of the next big win becomes longer, so that gambling properties are prevented from becoming excessively high, sound game properties can be realized, and change performances are executed at a high rate, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest due to the long variable display period. In addition, in the second period, by setting the execution ratio of the change performance to be lower than that in the first period, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of interest due to the execution of the change performance at a high rate even though no big wins have occurred for a long period of time.

Further, in the present embodiment, based on the determination result at the time of starting winning or the determination result at the time of start of fluctuation, it is possible to execute an effect effect (for example, effect in which the character performs an action on the pending display or the active display) acting on the corresponding display (suspended display, active display). Here, the execution ratio of the action presentation in the first period and the execution ratio of the action presentation in the second period may be different. Since the action effect can be executed in both the first period and the second period, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high probability/high base state (variable probability state). In the first period, since the variable display period is long, the action performance requiring a predetermined period can be executed at a high rate, and in the second period, the variable display period is short, so the execution rate of the action performance should be low. Thus, in the first period, the period required until the occurrence of the next big win becomes longer, so that gambling properties are prevented from becoming excessively high, sound game properties can be realized, and effect performance is executed at a high rate, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest due to the long variable display period. Also, in the second period, by setting the execution ratio of the action performance to be lower than that in the first period, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest caused by the execution of the action performance at a high rate even though the big win is not generated for a long period of time.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a pre-reading announcement effect that announces the degree of expectation for a big hit of variable displays that are not executed (variable displays whose execution is suspended). Here, the execution ratio of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the first period and the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice effect in the second period may be different. In both the first period and the second period, the look-ahead announcement effect can be executed, so that the interest of the game in the high-probability/high-base state (probability-variable state) can be improved. In the first period, since the variable display period is long, it is possible to execute the look-ahead foretelling performance requiring a predetermined period at a high rate, and for the second period, the variable display period is short, so the execution rate of the look-ahead foretelling performance is preferably low. As a result, in the first period, the period required until the occurrence of the next big win is lengthened, so that gambling properties are prevented from becoming excessively high, sound game properties can be realized, and since the look-ahead advance notice performance is executed at a high rate, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest due to the long variable display period. In addition, in the second period, by setting the execution ratio of the read-ahead advance notice performance to be lower than that in the first period, it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest due to the execution of the read-ahead notice performance at a high rate even though no big win has occurred for a long period of time.

In the above-described embodiment, the execution ratio of setting suggestion effects may differ between the first period and the second period. For example, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 12-10(A) may be 10% in the first period and 2% in the second period, or conversely, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect may be 2% in the first period and 10% in the second period. In addition, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion performance may be changed according to the number of variable displays executed in the second period. For example, as the number of variable displays executed in the second period increases (as the so-called addiction between probability variation becomes longer), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion performance may become higher. Specifically, the execution ratio of the first set suggestion performance is 2% during the period of 101 to 150 variations from the end of the big win game based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, but the execution ratio of the first set suggestion performance is 5% during the period of 151 variation to 200 variation, and the execution percentage of the first set suggestion performance is 10% after the 201 variation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a prolonged addiction between probability variations.

In the above-described embodiment, as special effects related to setting suggestion, the first setting suggestion effect suggesting which of the low settings (1, 2), intermediate settings (3, 4), or high settings (5, 6) is exemplified, and the second setting suggestion effect suggesting which of the odd setting (1, 3, 5) or the even setting (2, 4, 6). It can be a performance. For example, when the setting change mode for changing the setting value is controlled at the time of turning on the power, an effect suggesting that the setting value has been changed may be executed during the subsequent demonstration display or during the game (for example, when the reserved memory exists or the variable display of the special symbol is executed). In addition, when the setting value is changed according to the setting change operation under control in the setting change mode, an effect suggesting the change of the setting value may be executed during the subsequent demonstration display or during the game (for example, when the reserved memory exists or the variable display of the special pattern is executed).

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Effect display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Effect control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
setting means capable of setting a set value related to the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state;
setting confirmation control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed;
interrupt processing execution means for executing interrupt processing capable of executing game-related processing;
variable means for changing between a first state advantageous to the player and a second state disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means capable of executing a predetermined game a plurality of times for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
variable timing means for timing a change period for changing the variable means to the first state;
a state notification means for notifying that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation state;
an advantageous state notification effect executing means capable of executing an advantageous state notification effect for notifying that the control is to be in the advantageous state;
an advantageous state notification timing means for timing an advantageous state notification period during which the advantageous state notification effect is executed;
a notification effect executing means capable of executing a notification effect in response to the end of the advantageous state;
a notification timing means for timing a notification period during which the notification effect is executed;
a storage means capable of storing game information;
initialization means capable of initializing the game information stored in the storage means based on the operation of the initialization operation means;
The setting confirmation control means is capable of controlling the setting confirmation state when power supply to the game machine is started and before the interrupt process is executed,
The interrupt processing is executed after the setting confirmation state ends, and after the interrupt processing is executed, the setting confirmation state is not controlled until the power supply to the game machine is stopped,
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the change period is being clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is resumed and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the clocking of the change period is interrupted until the setting confirmation state is finished, and when the setting confirmation state is finished, the clocking of the change period is resumed;
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the advantageous state notification period is being clocked, and thereafter the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the timing of the advantageous state notification period is interrupted until the setting confirmation state is terminated, and when the setting confirmation state is terminated, the timing of the advantageous state notification period is resumed.
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the notification period is clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is resumed and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the clocking of the notification period is interrupted until the setting confirmation state is finished, and when the setting confirmation state is finished, the clocking of the notification period is resumed.
The storage means
a predetermined area for storing at least the game information; and a specific area for storing set value data indicating a set value corresponding to an address higher than the predetermined area,
Having an area for storing information not used in the game between the predetermined area and the specific area,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images